for
Contents
Contents
#1.
#2.
Subject Name
Mathematics
Topic Name
Page No.
1148
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Linear Algebra
Probability & Distribution
Numerical Methods
Calculus
Differential Equations
Complex Variables
Laplace Transform
1 28
29 57
58 73
74 112
113 131
132 143
144 148
Network Theory
8
9
10
11
12
13
#3.
19
168 185
186 203
204 206
207 214
215 216
217 223
224 238
239 250
251 256
257 261
262 275
276 340
Basics of Control System
Time Domain Analysis
Stability & Routh Hurwitz Criterion
Root Locus Technique
Frequency Response Analysis using Nyquist plot
Frequency Response Analysis using Bode Plot
Compensators & Controllers
State Variable Analysis
Analog Circuits
28
29
30
31
149 167
217 275
Control Systems
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
#5.
#4.
149 216
276 282
283 294
295 300
301 308
309 316
317 322
323 329
330 340
341 421
Diode Circuits  Analysis and Application
AC & DC BiasingBJT and FET
Small Signal Modeling Of BJT and FET
BJT and JFET Frequency Response
th
th
341 353
354 363
364 372
373 375
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page I
32
33
34
#6.
422 472
Number Systems & Code Conversions
Boolean Algebra & Karnaugh Maps
Logic Gates
Logic Gate Families
Combinational and Sequential Digital Circuits
AD/DA Convertor
Semiconductor Memory
Introduction to Microprocessors
422 424
425 430
431 435
436 438
439 456
457 462
463 464
465 472
473 504
Amplitude Modulation (AM)
DSBSC, SSB and VSB Modulation
Angle Modulation
Receivers
Noise in Analog Modulation
Digital Communications
473 476
477 479
480 481
482 483
484 489
490 504
EDC
49
50
51
52
53
#9.
376 381
382 420
421
Communication
43
44
45
46
47
48
#8.
Digital Circuits
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
#7.
Contents
505 525
Semiconductor Theory
P  N Junction Theory and Characteristics
Transistor Theory (BJT, FET)
Basics of IC Bipolar, MOS & CMOS Types
Basics of OPTO Electronics
505 510
511 513
514 520
521 524
525
EMT
54
55
56
57
58
526 557
Electromagnetic Field
EM Wave Propagation
Transmission Lines
Guided E.M Waves
Antennas
526 536
537 543
544 550
551 554
555 557
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page II
Mathematics
Linear Algebra
ME 2005
1.
Which one of the following is an
Eigenvector of the matrix[
(A) [
(B) [ ]
2.
5.
]?
(C) [
(D) [
ME 2006
3.
Multiplication of matrices E and F is G.
Matrices E and G are
os
sin
E [ sin
] and
os
G
4.
sin
os
sin
(B) [ os
os
sin
os
(C) [ sin
sin
os
sin
(D) [ os
os
sin
7.
Eigenvectors of 0
1 is
(A) 0
(B) 1
(C) 2
(D) Infinite
ME 2008
8.
1 are
ME 2007
6.
The number of linearly independent
os
(A) [ sin
9.
(C) 1
(D) 2
The matrix [
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 1
10.
11.
ME 2012
15.
For a matrix,M
(B) ( )
1 is
(A) 2
(B) 2 3
(C) 2 3
(D) 2
ME 2011
13. Consider the following system
equations:
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
The system has
(A) A unique solution
(B) No solution
(C) Infinite number of solutions
(D) Five solutions
14.
of
(D) ( )
1 , one of the
(C) ( )
(A) ( )
+, the transpose
ME 2010
12. One of the Eigenvectors of the matrix
16.
ME 2009
Mathematics
x + 2y + z =4
2x + y + 2z =5
xy+z=1
The system of algebraic equations given
above has
(A) a unique algebraic equation of x = 1,
y = 1 and z = 1
(B) only the two solutions of ( x = 1,
y = 1, z = 1) and ( x = 2, y = 1, z = 0)
(C) infinite number of solutions.
(D) No feasible solution.
ME 2013
17. The Eigenvalues of a symmetric matrix
are all
(A) Complex with non zero positive
imaginary part.
(B) Complex with non zero negative
imaginary part.
(C) Real
(D) Pure imaginary.
18.
ME 2014
19. Given that the determinant of the matrix
[
] is
12 , the determinant of
the matrix [
(A)
th
] is
(B)
th
(C)
th
(D)
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 2
20.
21.
22.
2.
3.
1 is
(A) { }
(C) 2
(B) { }
(D) 2 3
CE 2005
1.
Consider the system of equations (
)
is
s l r Let
(
)
(
) where
(
) e n Eigen pair of an Eigenvalue
and its corresponding Eigenvector for
real matrix A. Let I be a (n n) unit
matrix. Which one of the following
statement is NOT correct?
(A) For a homogeneous n n system of
linear equations,(A
) X = 0 having
a nontrivial solution the rank of
(A
) is less than n.
(B) For matrix
, m being a positive
integer, (
) will be the Eigen pair for all i.
(C) If
=
then   = 1 for all i.
(D) If
= A then is real for all i.
Mathematics
and
 will be
)
(C) (4 3)
(D) (3 4
(A) (2 2)
(B) (3 3
CE 2006
4.
Solution for the system defined by the set
of equations 4y + 3z = 8; 2x z = 2 and
3x + 2y = 5 is
(A) x = 0; y =1; z =
(B) x = 0; y = ; z = 2
(C) x = 1; y = ; z = 2
(D) non existent
5.
],
]are 2
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 3
8.
(B)
1
1
m trix 0
(A)
(B)
is
(D)
( )
( )
( )
( )
11.
is
15.
(C)
(D)
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
CE 2012
1 are
and 8
and 5
14.
(C)
CE 2008
9.
The product of matrices ( )
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D) PQ
10.
1 is
Mathematics
n
n
CE 2009
12. A square matrix B is skewsymmetric if
(C)
(A)
(D)
(B)
CE 2011
13. [A] is square matrix which is neither
symmetric nor skewsymmetric and , is its transpose. The sum and difference of
these matrices are defined as
[S] = [A] + ,  and [D] = [A] ,  ,
respectively. Which of the following
statements is TRUE?
(A) Both [S] and [D] are symmetric
(B) Both [S] and [D] are skewsymmetric
(C) [S] is skewsymmetric and [D] is
symmetric
(D) [S] is symmetric and [D] is skew
symmetric
1 are
CE 2013
16. There is no value of x that can
simultaneously satisfy both the given
equations. Therefore, find the le st
squares error solution to the two
equations, i.e., find the value of x that
minimizes the sum of squares of the
errors in the two equations.
2x = 3 and 4x = 1
17.
CE 2014
18.
19.
] n
], the product K JK is
(A) 915
(B) 1355
th
th
(C) 1640
(D) 2180
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 4
4.
20.
is ____________
21.
The
rank
of
the
matrix
] is ________________
CS 2005
1.
Consider the following system of
equations
in
three
real
variables x x n x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
This system of equation has
(A) no solution
(B) a unique solution
(C) more than one but a finite number of
solutions
(D) an infinite number of solutions
2.
1
n
n
(C)
(D)
n
n
CS 2006
3.
F is an n x n real matrix. b is an n
real
vector. Suppose there are two nx1
vectors, u and v such that u v , and
Fu=b, Fv=b. Which one of the following
statement is false?
(A) Determinant of F is zero
(B) There are infinite number of
solutions to Fx=b
(C) There is an x 0 such that Fx=0
(D) F must have two identical rows
Mathematics
CS 2007
5.
Consider the set of (column) vectors
defined by X={xR3 x1+x2+x3=0, where
XT =[x1, x2, x3]T }. Which of the following is
TRUE?
(A) {[1, 1, 0]T, [1, 0, 1]T} is a basis for
the subspace X.
(B) {[1, 1, 0]T, [1, 0, 1]T} is a linearly
independent set, but it does not span
X and therefore, is not a basis of X.
(C) X is not the subspace for R3
(D) None of the above
CS 2008
6.
The following system of
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Has unique solution. The only possible
value (s) for is/ are
(A) 0
(B) either 0 or 1
(C) one of 0,1, 1
(D) any real number except 5
7.
1 0
1 n 0
1 0
(A) One
(B) two
(C) three
(D) four
CS 2010
8.
Consider the following matrix
A=[
]
x y
If the Eigen values of A are 4 and 8, then
(A) x = 4, y = 10
(C) x = 3, y = 9
(B) x = 5, y = 8
(D) x = 4, y = 10
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 5
CS 2011
9.
Consider the matrix as given below
[
13.
14.
CS 2013
11. Which one of
x x
equal [
y y
z z
x(x
y(y
(A) 
z(z
x
(B) 
y
z
x y
(C) 
y z
z
x y
(D) 
y z
z
15.
is __________.
[
16.
],
CS 2012
10. Let A be the 2
(C) n
(D)
n
Mathematics
ECE 2005
1.
Given an orthogonal matrix
CS 2014
12. Consider the following system of
equations:
x
y
x
z
x
y
z
x
y
z
The number of solutions for this system is
__________.
A= [
]. ,
is
(A) [
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 6
Mathematics
(B) [
6.
(C) [
(A) 0
(B) 1
(D) [
2.
Let,
A=0
1 and
Then (a + b)=
(A)
(B)
3.
= 0
1.
(C)
(D)
Eigenvector is
(C) 0
(B) 0 1
(D) 0
ECE 2006
4.
the
ECE 2007
7.
It is given that X1 , X2 M are M nonzero, orthogonal vectors. The dimension
of the vector space spanned by the 2M
vector X1 , X2 XM , X1 , X2 XM is
(A) 2M
(B) M+1
(C) M
(D) dependent on the choice of X1 , X2
XM.
9.
Eigenvector
1 is
(A) 2
(B) 4
5.
1 , the Eigenvalue
to
(C) 6
(D) 8
v =0 1
=4
(C) 2
(D) 3
ECE 2008
8.
The system of linear equations
4x + 2y = 7, 2x + y = 6 has
(A) a unique solution
(B) no solution
(C) an infinite number of solutions
(D) exactly two distinct solutions
1 the
(A) 0 1
v =0
ECE 2009
10. The Eigen values of the following matrix
are
[
The matrix is
(A) 0
(C) 0
(B) 0
(D) 0
(A) 3, 3 + 5j, 6 j
(B) 6 + 5j, 3 + j, 3 j
(C) 3 + j, 3 j, 5 + j
(D) 3, 1 + 3j, 1 3j
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 7
ECE 2010
11. The Eigenvalues of a skewsymmetric
matrix are
(A) Always zero
(B) Always pure imaginary
(C) Either zero or pure imaginary
(D) Always real
ECE 2011
12. The system of equations
x y z
x
y
z
x
y
z
has NO solution for values of
given by
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
Mathematics
ECE 2014
16. For matrices of same dimension M, N and
scalar c, which one of these properties
DOES NOT ALWAYS hold?
(A) (M )
M
(M)
(B) ( M )
(C) (M N)
M
N
(D) MN NM
17.
18.
J
ECE\EE\IN 2012
13.
Given that A = 0
1 and I = 0
the value of A3 is
(A) 15 A + 12 I
(B) 19A + 30
(C) 17 A + 15 I
(D) 17A +21
ECE 2013
14. The minimum Eigenvalue of the following
matrix is
[
19.
20.
(A) 0
(B) 1
15.
[
]
Which is obtained by reversing the order
of the columns of the identity matrix I .
Let
I
J where
is a nonnegative real number. The value of for
which det(P) = 0 is _____.
1,
(C) 2
(D) 3
(A) 2
(B) 5
)h s
)4 5
]
(C) 8
(D) 16
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 8
EE 2005
1.
5.
If R = [
(A) ,
(B) ,
2.
(C) ,
(D) ,
(B) [
] [
] [
(C) [
] [
] [
(D) [
] [
] [
(A) [ ]
(B) [
(C) [
(B) [
(D) [ ]
] ,R=[
(C) [ ]
]
(D) [
EE 2007
6.
X = [x , x . . . . x  is an ntuple nonzero
vector. The n n matrix V = X
(A) Has rank zero (C) Is orthogonal
(B) Has rank 1
(D) Has rank n
7.
8.
EE 2006
Statement for Linked Answer Questions 4
and 5.
4.
is
] , one of
(A) [
] ,Q=[
] [
P=[
(A) [
3.
Mathematics
] are
three vectors
An orthogonal set of vectors having a
span that contains P,Q, R is
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 9
10.
equals
(A) 511 A + 510
(B) 309 A + 104
(C) 154 A + 155
(D) exp (9A)
EE 2008
11. If the rank of a (
) matrix Q is 4, then
which one of the following statements is
correct?
(A) Q will have four linearly independent
rows and four linearly independent
columns
(B) Q will have four linearly independent
rows and five linearly independent
columns
(C) Q will be invertible
(D)
Q will be invertible
12.
13.
(A) A A+ A = A
(B) (AA+ ) = A A+
14.
=0
If I denotes identity matrix, then the
inverse of matrix P will be
(A) (
I)
(B) (
I)
(C) (
I)
(D) (
I)
(C) A+ A =
(D) A A+ A = A+
Let P be a
real orthogonal matrix. x
is a real vector [x x  with length
x
(x
x ) . Then, which one of the
following statements is correct?
(A)
x
x
where at least one
vector satisfies
x
x
(B)
x
x for all vectors x
(C)
x
x
where at least one
vector satisfies
x
x
(D) No relationship can be established
between x and
x
9.
Mathematics
EE 2009
15. The trace and determinant of a
matrix are known to be 2 and 35
respe tively Its Eigenv lues re
(A) 30 and 5
(C) 7 and 5
(B) 37 and 1
(D) 17.5 and 2
EE 2010
16. For the set of equations
x
x
x
x =2
x
x
x
x =6
The following statement is true
(A) Only the trivial solution
x
x
x
x = 0 exists
(B) There are no solutions
(C) A unique nontrivial solution exists
(D) Multiple nontrivial solutions exist
17.
An Eigenvector of
(A) ,
(B) ,
(C) ,
(D) ,
] is

EE 2011
18.
The matrix[A] = 0
1 is decomposed
(A) 0
th
th
1 and 0
1
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 10
(B) 0
(C) 0
(D) 0
1 and 0
1 and 0
1 and 0
23.
1
1
1
EE 2013
19.
The equation 0
x
1 0x 1
0 1 has
0 1.
(A) [ 1 1]T
(B) [3 1]T
(A) 0
(C) 0
(B) 0
(D) 0
1?
(C) [1 1]T
(D) [ 2 1]T
2.
1 and
EE 2014
21. Given a system of equations:
x
y
z
x y
z
Which of the following is true regarding
its solutions?
(A) The system has a unique solution for
any given and
(B) The system will have infinitely many
solutions for any given and
(C) Whether or not a solution exists
depends on the given and
(D) The system would have no solution
for any values of and
22.
IN 2005
1.
Identify which one of the following is an
(A) No solution
x
(B) Only one solution 0x 1
Mathematics
IN 2006
Statement for Linked Answer Questions 3
and 4
A
system of linear simultaneous
equations is given as Ax=B where
[
] n
[ ]
3.
4.
5.
For a given
that
0
matrix A, it is observed
0
1 n
Then matrix A is
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 11
2 1 1 0 1 1
1 1 0 2 1 2
10.
(A) A
1 1 0 2
1 1
(B) A
1 2 0 2 1 1
(C) A
1 2 0
02 1
2 1 1
0 2
(D) A
1 3
IN 2007
6.
Let A = [ ]
i j n with n
= i. j. Then the rank of A is
(A)
(C) n
(B)
(D) n
7.
The matrix P =[
12.
9.
)(
(D) n
IN 2011
13.
The matrix M = [
] has
Eigenvalues
. An Eigenvector
corresponding to the Eigenvalue 5 is
,
 . One of the Eigenvectors of
the matrix M is
(A) ,
(C) ,
(B) ,
(D) ,
] rotates a vector
(C)
(D)
IN 2010
11. X and Y are nonzero square matrices of
size n n. If
then
(A) X = 0 and Y 0
(B) X 0 and Y = 0
(C) X = 0 and Y = 0
(D) X 0 and Y 0
IN 2009
8.
Mathematics
IN 2013
14. The dimension of the null space of the
15.
matrix [
] is
(A) 0
(B) 1
(C) 2
(D) 3
] 0
(B) 0 1 0
th
th
1 is
(C) [ ] 0 1
j
j
(D) [ ] 0 1
j
1
1
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 12
Mathematics
IN 2014
16. For the matrix A satisfying the equation
given below, the eigenvalues are
, [
(A) (
,)
(B) (1,1,0)
]
(C) (
)
(D) (1,0,0)
and G = [
[Ans. A]
[
Now E F = G
in onsistent
4.
5.
[Ans. A]
6.
[Ans. B]
1 Eigenv lues re 2, 2
I)
I)
( )
7.
matrix be A = 0
sin
os
/
I)
[Ans. A]
(
I)
.
olving for , Let the symmetric and real
[Ans. C]
os
Given , E = [ sin
No (
3.
sin
os
[Ans. A]
For S
( )
n ( )
( (
)
minimum of m n)
For inconsistence
( )
( )
he highest possi le r nk of is
os
[ sin
,E
2.
th
Now 
Which gives (
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 13
Mathematics
x
[
][
[Ans. B]
Let
eigenv lues re
12.
[Ans. A]
0
1 Eigenv lues re
Eigenve tor is x
13.
[Ans. C]
[
taking K
( )
infinite m ny solutions
9.
10.
[Ans. C]
Sum of the diagonal elements = Sum of
the Eigenvalues
1 + 0 + p = 3+S
S= p 2
[Ans. B]
Eigenvalues of a real symmetric matrix
are always real
15.
[Ans. B]
0
If
[Ans. B]
( )
11.
14.
( )
[( )
) ]
16.
[Ans. A]
iven M
MM
th
[Ans. C]
The given system is
x
y z
x y
z
x y z
Use Gauss elimination method as follows
Augmented matrix is
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 14
,  
 ]
[
So, 
[Ans. C]
Suppose the Eigenvalue of matrix A is
(
i )(s y) and the Eigenvector is
x where s the onjug te p ir of
Eigenvalue and Eigenvector is n x.
So Ax = x
and x x
king tr nspose of equ tion
x
x
[( )
n is s l r ]
x
x x x
x x x x ,
x x x x
(x x) (
re s l r )
(x x)
20.
[Ans. C]
We know that
os x
os x sin x
( ) os x
sin x ( ) os x
Hence 1, 1 and 1 are coefficients. They
are linearly dependent.
1 eigen v lues
Eigenve tor is
21.
[Ans. D]
We know that the Eigenvectors
corresponding to distinct Eigenvalues of
real symmetric matrix are orthogonal.
x
y
x
y
[ ][ ] x y
x y
x y
y
x
22.
[Ans. D]
(
)
In case of matrix PQ
CE
1.
QP (generally)
[Ans. C]
If
=
i.e. A is orthogonal, we can
only s y th t if is n Eigenv lue of
then
[Ans. A]
In an over determined system having
more equations than variables, it is
necessary to have consistent unique
solution, by definition
3.
[Ans. A]
With the given order we can say that
order of matrices are as follows:
34
Y 43
33
[Ans. A]

[Ans. D]
0
nnot e zero )
19.
18.
nk ( )
nk (  )
So, Rank (A) = Rank (AB) = 2 < n (no. of
variables)
So, we have infinite number of solutions
17.
Mathematics
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 15
(
) 33
P 23
32
P(
)
(23) (33) (32)
22
( (
)
) 22
4.
[Ans. D]
The augmented matrix for given system is
[
 ]
 ]
 ]
8.
 ]
( )
( )
( )
( )
olution is non existent for above
system.
5.
6.
7.
[Ans. B]
= Trace (A)
+ + = Trace (A)
= 2 + ( 1) + 0 = 1
Now = 3
3+ + =1
1 is
(
)
0
9.
10.
1
1
[Ans. B]
( ) P=(
(
)(
)
=(
) (I) =
)P
[Ans. B]
A=0
Characteristic equation of A is

=0
(4
)( 5
) 2 5 =0
+
30 = 0
6, 5
11.
[Ans. A]
The augmented matrix for given system is
[
[Ans. A]
Inverse of 0
Mathematics
 ]
th
[Ans. D]
The augmented matrix for given system is
x
[
 ] 6y7 [ ]
z
k
Using Gauss elimination we reduce this to
an upper triangular matrix to find its rank
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 16
 ]
17.
[Ans. 16]
, , M trix , The product of matrix PQR is
,  ,  , The minimum number of multiplications
involves in computing the matrix product
PQR is 16
18.
[Ans. 23]
k
[
 ]
 ]
Now if k
Rank (A) = rank (AB) = 3
Unique solution
If k = 7, rank (A) = rank (AB) = 2
which is less than number of variables
When K = 7, unique solution is not
possible and only infinite solution is
possible
12.
[Ans. A]
A square matrix B is defined as skewsymmetric if and only if
= B
13.
[Ans. D]
By definition A +
is always symmetric
is symmetri
is lw ys skew symmetri
is skew symmetri
Mathematics
][
K JK
[
,
]

19.
[Ans. A]
Sum of Eigenvalues
= Sum of trace/main diagonal elements
= 215 + 150 + 550
= 915
20.
[Ans. 88]
The determinant of matrix is
[
14.
[Ans. B]
1 =(
15.
,(
=
i)(
i
i
1
i 
i)
i
i
i
i
i
i
1
Interchanging Column 1& Column 2 and
taking transpose
[Ans. B]
0
[Ans. 0.5]
0.5
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 17
= (
21.
)+
= 1, 6
The Eigenvalues of A are 1 and 6
[Ans. 2]
]
3.
[Ans. D]
Given that Fu =b and Fv =b
If F is non singular, then it has a unique
inverse.
Now, u =
b and v=
b
Since
is unique, u = v but it is given
th t u
v his is contradiction. So F
must be singular. This means that
(A) Determinant of F is zero is true. Also
(B) There are infinite number of
solution to Fx= b is true since F = 0
(C) here is n
su h the
is
also true, since X has infinite number
of solutions., including the X = 0
solution
(D) F must have 2 identical rows is false,
since a determinant may become
zero, even if two identical columns
are present. It is not necessary that 2
identical rows must be present for
F to become zero.
4.
[Ans. C]
It is given that Eigenvalues of A is
5, 2, 1, 4
I
Let P = 0
1
I
Eigenvalues of P : 
I
I


I
(
)
I
I
I
Eigenvalue of P is
( 5 +1 ), ( 2+ 1), (1+ 1), (4+1 ),
( 5 1 ), ( 2 1 ),(1 1), (4 1)
= 4, 1, 2, 5, 6, 3,0,3
5.
[Ans. B]
x
X= {x
x
x
= ,x x x  then,
[
( )
( )
]
( )
( )
]
( )
[Ans. B]
The augmented matrix for the given
system is [
 ]
 ]

]
[Ans. B]
0
CS
1.
)(
Mathematics

th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 18
7.
 ]
[Ans. D]


x
y
(
)(
y)
When
(
y)
x
y
x
When
(
y)
x
y
x
x
y
Solving (1) & (2)
x
y
[Ans. D]
The augmented matrix for above system
is
[
Mathematics
 ]
 ]
( )
( )
Now as long as 5 0,
rank (A) =rank (AB) =3
can be any real value except 5. Closest
correct answer is (D).
9.
[Ans. A]
The Eigenvalues of a upper triangular
matrix are given by its diagonal entries.
Eigenvalues are 1, 4, 3 only
[Ans. A]
10.
[Ans. D]
Eigenvalues of 0

 =0
Eigenvalues of 0

=0,1
1
 =0
=0
( )
)(
) =0
= 1, 1
n ( )
n
 =0
(
(
)
)
Eigenvalues of A are
respectively
So Eigenvalues of
)
=0
)
= i or 1
= 1 i or 1 + i
Eigenvalues of 0
)(
)(
= 0
(
(
= 0, 0
Eigenvalues of 0

) =0
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 19
11.
12.
[Ans. A]
p
q
nd
Since 2
& 3rd columns have been
swapped which introduces a ve sign
Hence (A) is not equal to the problem
16.
(
)
( )
no of v ri
nique solution exists
14.
[
]
x
x
Let X = x
e eigen ve tor
x
[x ]
By the definition of eigenvector, AX =
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
[
] [x ]
[x ]
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
n x
x
x
x
x
x
(I) If
s yx
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
(2) If
Eigenv lue
Three distinct eigenvalues are 0, 2, 3
Product of non zero eigenvalues = 2 3 = 6
les
[Ans. 0]
The Eigenvectors corresponding to distinct
Eigenvalues of real symmetric matrix are
orthogonal
ECE
1.
2.
[Ans. A]
If the trace or determinant of matrix is
positive then it is not necessary that all
eigenvalues are positive. So, option (B), (C),
(D) are not correct
[Ans. C]
Since, ,
]
(
=I
16
[Ans. A]
We know,
[Ans. 0]
 
[Ans. 6]
Let A =
[Ans. 1]
x
y
x
z
x y z
x
y
z
ugmente m trix is [
13.
15.
Mathematics
7=0
1
1
1
1
b
, a
60
10
1 1 21 7
a+b =
3 60 60 20
Or 2a 0.1b=0, 2a
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 20
3.
[Ans. C]
8.
[Ans. B]
Approach 1:
Given 4x + 2y =7
and 2x + y =6
(A I)=0
( 4 ) (3 ) 2 4=0
2 + 20=0 = 5, 4
4 2 x 7
2 1y 6
0 0 x 5
2 1y 6
x1
x2
Putting = 5, 0
1 =0
x + 2x = 0 x = 2x
x
x
1= 2
2 1
Hence, 0
4.
1 is Eigenvector.
[Ans. C]
Then Eigenvector is x
Verify the options (C)
5.
or 2x y=
1 We know th t it is Eigenvalue
We know
I A=0
2 I2 +32 =0
= 4, 8 (Eigenvalues)
For
= 4, ( I
)=0
)=0
9.
[Ans. C]
Matrix will be singular if any of the
Eigenvalues are zero.

= 0
For = 0, P = 0
p
p
p
p  =0
p p
p p
10.
[Ans. D]
Approach1: Eigenvalues exists as complex
conjugate or real
Approach 2: Eigenvalues are given by
v =0 1
For
= 8, ( I
v =0
6.
[Ans. C]
[
]
[
[Ans. C]
There are M nonzero, orthogonal vectors,
so there is required M dimension to
represent them
 =0
( )
7.
7
2
2x+y=6
Since both the linear equation represent
parallel set of straight lines, therefore no
solution exists.
Approach 3:
Rank (A)=1; rank (C)=2,
As Rank (A)
rank (C) therefore no
solution exists.
[Ans. A]
or m trix
Mathematics
11.
th
)((
,
)=0
)
j
[Ans. C]
Eigenvalue of skew symmetric matrix is
either zero or pure imaginary.
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 21
12.
13.
[Ans. B]
Given equations are x y z
x
y
z
and x
y
z
If
and
,
then x
y
z
have Infinite solution
If
and
, then
x
y
z
(
) no solution
x
y
z
If
n
x
y
z
will have solution
x
y
z
and
will also give solution
et of , 
et of [
16.
[Ans. D]
Matrix multiplication is not commutative
in general.
17.
A.
=I=
Using Cauchey Hamilton Theorem,
[Ans. B]
0
Mathematics
will
Characteristic Equations is
18.
By Cayley Hamilton theorem
I
(
I)
I
14.
I
 
[
[Ans. A]
[
20.
[Ans. B]
)
]
19.
 
  Product of Eigenvalues = 0
Minimum Eigenv lue h s to e
15.
[Ans. B]
,
Let
[ ]
Then AB = [4]; BA
Here m = 1, n = 4
)
And et(I
th
les
[Ans. B]
onsi er
( )
(  )
no of v r
Infinitely many solutions
21.
et(I
th
1
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 22
(not positive)
( ) is not true
(A), (C), (D) are true using properties of
Eigenvalues
22.
EE
1.
2.
[Ans. B]
]
j( )
 
=[
Top row of
=,
[Ans. D]
Since matrix is triangular, the Eigenvalues
are the diagonal elements themselves
namely = 3, 2 & 1.
Corresponding to Eigenvalue = 2, let
us find the Eigenvector
[A  ] x = 0
x
[
][x ]
[ ]
x
Putting
in above equation we get,
x
[
][x ] [ ]
x
Which gives the equations,
5x
x
x =0
. . . . . (i)
x =0
. . . . . (ii)
3x = 0
. . . . . (iii)
Since eqa (ii) and (iii) are same we have
5x
x
x =0
. . . . . (i)
x =0
. . . . . (ii)
Putting x = k, we get
x = 0, x = k and 5x
k
=0
R= [
Mathematics
, of tor( ) 
x = k
 =
= 1(2 + 3) 0(4 + 2) 1 (6 2) = 1
Since we need only the top row of
, we
need to find only first column of (R)
which after transpose will become first
row adj(A).
cof. (1, 1) = + 
=2+3=5
cof. (2, 1) =
= 3
cof. (2, 1) = + 
i.e. x x x = k : k : 0
= :1:0
=2:5:0
x
x
[ ]=[ ] is an Eigenvector of matrix p.
x
= +1
3.
cof. (A) = [
[Ans. A]
Rank [PQ] = Rank [P] is necessary for
existence of at least one solution to
x q.
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 23
4.
[Ans. A]
We need to find orthogonal vectors, verify
the options.
Option (A) is orthogonal vectors
(
)(
[Ans. B]
The vector (
) is linearly
dependent upon the solution obtained in
 and ,
Q. No. 4 namely ,
We can easily verify the linearly
dependence as

6.
7.
[Ans. B]
xy
xx
 yx
xy
xx
x n xy yx
xy
x xy
y y  y x y 
(x y)
x y
= Positive when x and y are linearly
independent.
)
i
8.
Mathematics
9.
[Ans. A]
A=0
A  = 0
[Ans. B]
hen n
n m trix
xx
x x
x x
x x
x x x x
x x
*
+
x x x x
x x
Take x common from 1st row,
x common from 2nd row
x common from nth row.
It h s r nk
 =0
[Ans. A]
To calculate
Start from
derived above
I = 0 which has
I
[Ans. D]
k
L(x) = 

x
= (x )
I)(
x
(
(
k
x )
I)
I
x
= x
=[
x k
x
L(x) = M [x ]
x
Comparing both , we get,
I)
(
I)
I

(
I)
I)
I
Hence Eigenvalue of M :  M
I)(
I
]
x
M=[
I)
I
)
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 24
11.
12.
13.
[Ans. A]
If rank of (5 6 ) matrix is 4,then surely
it must have exactly 4 linearly
independent rows as well as 4 linearly
independent columns.
= A is correct
=A[(
)
A
= A[(
)
Put
=P
Then A [
] = A. = A
Choice (C)
= is also correct since
=(
)
=
I
14.
os
x in )
 x  = x
(x in
[Ans. C]
Trace = Sum of Principle diagonal
elements.
16.
[Ans. D]
On writing the equation in the form of
AX =B
, *
nk ( )
nk( )
Number of variables = 4
Since, Rank (A) = Rank(C) < Number of
variables
Hence, system of equations are consistent
and there is multiple nontrivial solution
exists.
17.
[Ans. B]
Characteristic equation 

I
(1 ) (
)(
)
is
os )
18.
[Ans. D]
,  ,L,  Options D is correct
19.
[Ans. D]
x
x
(i)
} (i) n (ii) re s me
x
x
(ii)
x
x
So it has multiple solutions.
* +
Argument matrix C =*
[Ans. B]
Let orthogonal matrix be
os
in
P=0
1
in
os
By Property of orthogonal matrix A
I
x os
x in
So, x = [
]
x in
x os
 x  =
(x
x
x
+ *x +
x
[Ans. D]
If characteristic equation is
=0
Then by Cayley Hamilton theorem,
I=0
=
Multiplying by
on both sides,
=
I = (
I)
[Ans. D]
Choice (A)
Since
Mathematics
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 25
20.
[Ans. D]
Eigen value
A
Eigenvectors 0
1 n 0
Let matrix 0
x
x
10
10
I= 
i.e., (1 ) (2 )
2
Thus the Eigenvalue are 1, 2.
If x, y, be the component of Eigenvectors
corresponding to the Eigenv lues
we
have
x
[A I 0
1 0y1=0
Mathematics
21.
22.
23.
IN
1.
[Ans. B]
AX=0 and (A) = 2
n=3
No. of linearly independent solutions
= n r
= 3
=1
3.
[Ans. C]
There are 3 nonzero rows and hence
rank (A) = 3
4.
[Ans. C]
Rank (A) = 3 (This is Coefficient matrix)
Rank (A:b) =4(This is Augmented matrix)
s r nk( ) r nk (
) olution oes
not exist.
5.
[Ans. C]
We know
Hen e from the given
problem, Eigenvalue & Eigenvector is
known.
[Ans. B]
Since there are 2 equations and 3 variables
(unknowns), there will be infinitely many
solutions. If
if
then
x
y
z
x y
z
x z y
For any x and z, there will be a value of y.
Infinitely many solutions
[Ans. A]
For all real symmetric matrices, the
Eigenvalues are real (property), they may
be either ve or ve and also may be same.
The sum of Eigenvalues necessarily not be
zero.
[Ans. C]
p q
0
1
r s
( pplying p
q
r
s element ry tr nsform tions)
p
q pr qs
[
]
pr qs r
s
hey h ve s me r nk N
1
X1 , X2
1
1
2 , 1 1, 2 2
, where
1 1
P X1 X2
1 2
1 0 1 0
0 2 0 2
[Ans. B]
Given:
2.
Solving
0
& D=
0
1
Hence
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 26
1 1 1 0 2 1
A
1 2 0 2 1 1
6.
12.
[Ans. B]
A= [
]=[
A=[
[Ans. B]
Given
I
Hence rank (A) = n
Hence AX= Y will have unique solution
8.
[Ans. C]
9.
[Ans. C]
Approach 1:
13.
14.
Assume,
10
Now  I
[Ans. B]
Dim of null space [A]= nullity of A.

)(
 is also vector
For given A = [
I)
0
[Ans. B]
If AX =
From this result [1, 2,
for M

(
I)
n
For diagonal matrix Eigenvalues are
diagonal elements itself.
n(n
)
[Ans. A]
A=[ ]
i if i j
= 0 otherwise.
For n n matrix
Mathematics
)=0
[Ans. D]
11.
[Ans. C]
A null matrix can be obtained by
multiplying either with one null matrix or
two singular matrices.
]
]
( )
By rank nullity theorem
Rank [A]+ nullity [A]= no. of columns[A]
Nullity [A]= 3
Nullity , 
Approach 2:
Eigenvalues of (
I) is = 1, 1/2
Eigenvalues of (X+5I) is = 3, 2
Eigenvalues of (
I) (X+5I) is =
,
10.
15.
[Ans. A]
A=
Characteristics equation 

I

j
j
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 27
x
] 0x 1
Mathematics
0 1
x
x
j
j
j
j
x
] 0x 1
0 1
x
16.
[Ans. C]
A[
]=[
  
]

 
(
 )
=Product of eigenvalues
Verify options
Options (C) correct answer
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 28
Mathematics
(B)
(D)
ME  2008
6.
A coin is tossed 4 times. What is the
probability of getting heads exactly 3
times?
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
2.
ME  2009
7.
The standard deviation of a uniformly
distributed random variable between 0
and 1 is
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
ME  2006
3.
Consider a continuous random variable
with probability density function
f(t) = 1 + t for 1 t 0
= 1 t for 0 t 1
The standard deviation of the random
variable is:
(C)
(A)
(D)
(B)
4.
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
ME  2007
5.
Let X and Y be two independent random
variables. Which one of the relations
between expectation (E), variance (Var)
and covariance (Cov) given below is
FALSE?
(A) E (XY) = E (X) E (Y)
(B) Cov (X, Y) = 0
(C) Var (X + Y) = Var (X) + Var (Y)
(D)
(X Y )
( (X)) ( (Y))
8.
ME  2010
9.
A box contains 2 washers, 3 nuts and 4
bolts. Items are drawn from the box at
random one at a time without
replacement. The probability of drawing
2 washers first followed by 3 nuts and
subsequently the 4 bolts is
(A) 2/315
(C) 1/1260
(B) 1/630
(D) 1/2520
ME  2011
10. An unbiased coin is tossed five times. The
outcome of each toss is either a head or a
tail. The probability of getting at least one
head is________
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
ME  2012
11. A box contains 4 red balls and 6 black
balls. Three balls are selected randomly
from the box one after another, without
replacement. The probability that the
selected set has one red ball and two
black balls is
(A) 1/20
(C) 3/10
(B) 1/12
(D) 1/2
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 29
ME  2013
12. Let X be a normal random variable with
mean 1 and variance 4. The probability
(X
) is
(A) 0.5
(B) Greater than zero and less than 0.5
(C) Greater than 0.5 and less than 1.0
(D) 1.0
13.
18.
19.
20.
16.
( )
( )
( )
Mathematics
CE  2005
1.
Which one of the following statements is
NOT true?
(A) The measure of skewness is
dependent upon the amount of
dispersion
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 30
CE  2007
4.
If the standard deviation of the spot speed
of vehicles in a highway is 8.8 kmph and
the mean speed of the vehicles is
33 kmph, the coefficient of variation in
speed is
(A) 0.1517
(C) 0.2666
(B) 0.1867
(D) 0.3646
Mathematics
CE  2008
5.
If probability density function of a random
variable x is
x for
x
nd
f(x) {
for ny other v lue of x
Then, the percentage probability
P.
/ is
(A) 0.247
(B) 2.47
6.
(C) 24.7
(D) 247
CE  2009
7.
The standard normal probability function
can be approximated as
(x )
x  )
exp(
Where x = standard normal deviate. If
mean and standard deviation of annual
precipitation are 102 cm and 27 cm
respectively, the probability that the
annual precipitation will be between
90 cm and 102 cm is
(A) 66.7%
(C) 33.3%
(B) 50.0%
(D) 16.7%
CE  2010
8.
Two coins are simultaneously tossed. The
probability of two heads simultaneously
appearing is
(A) 1/8
(C) 1/4
(B) 1/6
(D) 1/2
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 31
CE  2011
9.
There are two containers with one
containing 4 red and 3 green balls and the
other containing 3 blue and 4 green balls.
One ball is drawn at random from each
container. The probability that one of the
balls is red and the other is blue will be
(A) 1/7
(C) 12/49
(B) 9/49
(D) 3/7
CE  2012
10. The annual precipitation data of a city is
normally distributed with mean and
standard deviation as 1000mm and
200 mm, respectively. The probability
that the annual precipitation will be more
than 1200 mm is
(A) < 50 %
(C) 75 %
(B) 50 %
(D) 100 %
11.
14.
15.
16.
(C)
(B)
(D)
CE  2013
12. Find the value of such that the function
f(x) is a valid probability density function
____________________
(x
)(
f(x)
x)
for
x
otherwise
CE  2014
13. The probability density function of
evaporation E on any day during a year in
a watershed is given by
f( )
mm d y
Mathematics
CS  2005
1.
Box P has 2 red balls and 3 blue balls and
box Q has 3 red balls and 1 blue ball. A
ball is selected as follows: (i) select a box
(ii) choose a ball from the selected box
such that each ball in the box is equally
likely to be chosen. The probabilities of
selecting boxes P and Q are 1/3 and 2/3
respectively. Given that a ball selected in
the above process is red, the probability
that it comes from box P is
(A) 4/19
(C) 2/9
(B) 5/19
(D) 19/30
2.
otherwise
The probability that E lies in between 2
and 4 mm/day in a day in the watershed
is (in decimal) ______
(B) f(b)
th
th
f( )
(D) x f(x)dx
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 32
CS  2006
3.
For each element in a set of size 2n, an
unbiased coin is tossed. The 2n coin
tosses are independent. An element is
chosen if the corresponding coin toss
were head. The probability that exactly n
elements are chosen is
(A) ( n )
(C) ( n )
(D)
(B) ( n )
CS  2007
Linked Data for Q4 & Q5 are given below.
Solve the problems and choose the correct
answers.
Suppose that robot is placed on the
Cartesian plane. At each step it is easy to
move either one unit up or one unit right,
i.e if it is at (i,j) then it can move to either
(i+1,j) or (i,j+1)
4.
How many distinct paths are there for the
robot to reach the point (10,10) starting
from the initial position (0,0)?
(C) 210
(A)
20
(D) None of these
(B) 2
5.
6.
/
. / .
Wh t is
the probability that 2 appears at an
earlier position than any other even
number in the selected permutation?
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D) none of these
Mathematics
CS  2008
7.
Let X be a random variable following
normal distribution with mean +1 and
variance 4. Let Y be another normal
variable with mean of 1 and variance
unknown
If (X
)
(Y ) the
standard deviation of Y is
(A) 3
(C)
(B) 2
(D) 1
8.
CS  2009
9.
An unbalanced dice (with 6 faces,
numbered from 1 to 6) is thrown. The
probability that the face value is odd is
90% of the probability that the face value
is even. The probability of getting any
even numbered face is the same. If the
probability that the face is even given that
it is greater than 3 is 0.75, which one of
the following options is closest to the
probability that the face value exceeds 3?
(A) 0.453
(C) 0.485
(B) 0.468
(D) 0.492
CS  2010
10. Consider a company that assembles
computers. The probability of a faulty
assembly of any computer is p. The
company
therefore
subjects
each
computer to a testing process. This
testing process gives the correct result for
any computer with a probability of q.
What is the probability of a computer
being declared faulty?
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 33
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
11.
12.
pq+(1 p)(1 q)
(1 q)p
(1 p)q
pq
CS  2011
13. A deck of 5 cards (each carrying a distinct
number from 1 to 5) is shuffled
thoroughly. Two cards are then removed
one at a time from the deck. What is the
probability that the two cards are
selected with the number on the first card
being one higher than the number on the
second card?
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
14.
15.
Mathematics
CS  2012
16. Suppose a fair six sided die is rolled
once. If the value on the die is 1,2, or 3 the
die is rolled a second time. What is the
probability that the some total of value
that turn up is at least 6?
(A) 10/21
(C) 2/3
(B) 5/12
(D) 1/6
17.
CS  2013
18. Suppose p is the number of cars per
minute passing through a certain road
junction between 5 PM and 6 PM, and p
has a Poisson distribution with mean 3.
What is the probability of observing
fewer than 3 cars during any given
minute in this interval?
e
(A) e
(C)
e
(B) e
(D)
CS  2014
19. Suppose you break a stick of unit length
at a point chosen uniformly at random.
Then the expected length of the shorter
stick is ________ .
20.
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 34
21.
22.
23.
24.
ECE  2006
3.
A probability density function is of the
).
form (x)
e  x (
The value of K is
(A) 0.5
(C) 0.5a
(B) 1
(D) A
4.
ECE  2007
5.
If E denotes expectation, the variance of a
random variable X is given by
(A) E[X2] E2[X]
(C) E[X2]
(B) E[X2] + E2[X]
(D) E2[X]
6.
ECE  2005
1.
A fair dice is rolled twice. The probability
that an odd number will follow an even
number is
2.
( )
( )
( )
( )
Mathematics
ECE  2008
7.
The probability density function (PDF) of
a random variable X is as shown below.
x2
1
exp
dx is
2 0
8
(A) 1
(B)
(C) 2
(D)
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 35
(x)
exp( x)
exp( x) is
the probability density function for the
real random variable X, over the entire x
axis. M and N are both positive real
numbers. The equation relating M and N
is
8.
PDF
PDF
1 x
1
(A)
The corresponding
0 cumulative
1
distribution function (CDF) has the form
(A)
(B) 2M
ECE  2009
9.
Consider two independent random
variables X and Y with identical
distributions. The variables X and Y take
value 0, 1 and 2 with probabilities
(B)
(D) 1
CD
F
C
D
F
10.
0
1
1
10
1
2
CDF 1
(C)
N=1
(C) M + N = 1
(D) M + N = 3
(B)
CDF
Mathematics
1
2
(A)
(C)
2
(B)
11.
(D)
1
1
1
0
0
1
CDF
1
1
th
10
10
1
C2
2
(D)
10
1
C2
2
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 36
Consider two identically distributed zeromean random variables U and V . Let the
cumulative distribution functions of U
and 2V be F(x) and G(x) respectively.
Then, for all values of x
(x))
(A) ( (x)
(B) ( (x)
(C) ( (x)
(D) ( (x)
Mathematics
(x)) x
(x)) x
ECE  2014
17. In a housing society, half of the families
have a single child per family, while the
remaining half have two children per
family. The probability that a child picked
at random, has a sibling is _____
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
of
(x))
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 37
EE  2005
1.
If P and Q are two random events, then
the following is TRUE
(A) Independence of P and Q implies that
probability (P Q) = 0
(B) Probability (P Q) Probability (P)
+Probability (Q)
(C) If P and Q are mutually exclusive,
then they must be independent
(D) Probability (P Q) Probability (P)
2.
EE  2006
3.
Two f ir dice re rolled nd the sum r
of the numbers turned up is considered
(A) Pr (r > 6) =
(B) Pr (r/3 is an integer) =
(C) Pr (r = 8r/4 is an integer) =
(D) Pr (r = 6r/5 is an integer) =
EE  2007
4.
A loaded dice has following probability
distribution of occurrences
Dice Value
Probability
1
2
6
If three identical dice as the above are
thrown, the probability of occurrence of
values, 1, 5 and 6 on the three dice is
(A) same as that of occurrence of 3, 4, 5
(B) same as that of occurrence of 1, 2, 5
(C) 1/128
(D) 5/8
Mathematics
EE  2008
5.
X is a uniformly distributed random
variable that takes values between 0 and
1. The value of E{X } will be
(A) 0
(C) 1/4
(B) 1/8
(D) 1/2
EE  2009
6.
Assume for simplicity that N people, all
born in April (a month of 30 days), are
collected in a room. Consider the event of
atleast two people in the room being born
on the same date of the month, even if in
different years, e.g. 1980 and 1985. What
is the smallest N so that the probability of
this event exceeds 0.5?
(A) 20
(C) 15
(B) 7
(D) 16
EE  2010
7.
A box contains 4 white balls and 3 red
balls. In succession, two balls are
randomly selected and removed from the
box. Given that the first removed ball is
white, the probability that the second
removed ball is red is
(A) 1/3
(C) 1/2
(B) 3/7
(D) 4/7
ECE\EE\IN  2012
8.
Two independent random variables X and
Y are uniformly distributed in the interval
,
. The probability that max ,
 is
less than 1/2 is
(A) 3/4
(C) 1/4
(B) 9/16
(D) 2/3
EE  2013
9.
A continuous random variable x has a
probability density function
+ is
f(x) e
x
. Then *x
(A) 0.368
(C) 0.632
(B) 0.5
(D) 1.0
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 38
EE  2014
10. A fair coin is tossed n times. The
probability that the difference between
the number of heads and tails is (n 3) is
(C)
(A)
(B)
(D)
11.
12.
13.
14.
IN  2005
1.
The probability that there are 53 Sundays
in a randomly chosen leap year is
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
2.
Mathematics
exp .
/ d =0.6
IN  2006
4.
You have gone to a cybercafe with a
friend. You found that the cybercaf has
only three terminals. All terminals are
unoccupied. You and your friend have to
make a random choice of selecting a
terminal. What is the probability that
both of you will NOT select the same
terminal?
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D) 1
5.
th
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 39
6.
Mathematics
IN  2007
7.
Assume that the duration in minutes of a
telephone conversation follows the
IN  2011
12. The box 1 contains chips numbered 3, 6,
9, 12 and 15. The box 2 contains chips
numbered 6, 11, 16, 21 and 26. Two chips,
one from each box, are drawn at random.
The numbers written on these chips are
multiplied. The probability for the
product to be an even number is
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
e ,x
9.
(A)
(C)
(B) 6
(D) 36
IN  2013
13. A continuous random variable X has
probability density f(x) =
.
Then P(X > 1) is
(A) 0.368
(C) 0.632
(B) 0.5
(D) 1.0
IN  2014
14. Given that x is a random variable in the
r nge ,
 with
prob bility density
function
___________________
IN  2009
10. A screening test is carried out to detect a
certain disease. It is found that 12% of the
positive reports and 15% of the negative
reports are incorrect. Assuming that the
probability of a person getting a positive
report is 0.01, the probability that a
person tested gets an incorrect report is
(A) 0.0027
(C) 0.1497
(B) 0.0173
(D) 0.2100
15.
IN  2010
11. The diameters of 10000 ball bearings
were measured. The mean diameter and
standard deviation were found to be
10 mm and 0.05mm respectively.
Assuming Gaussian distribution of
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 40
Mathematics
4.
[Ans. D]
The number of ways coming 8 and 9 are
(2,6),(3,5),(4,4),(5,3),(6,2),(3,6),(4,5),
(5,4),(6,3)
Total ways =9
So Probability of coming 8 and 9 are
[Ans. D]
5.
[Ans. D]
X and Y are independent
( ) ( ) ( ) re true
Only (D) is odd one
6.
[Ans. A]
Number of favourable cases are given by
HHHT
HHTH
HTHH
THHH
Total number of cases
= 2C1 2C1 2C1 2C1 =16
2.
[Ans. B]
Probability of defective item =
Probability of not defective item = 1 0.1
= 0.9
So, Probability that exactly 2 of the
chosen items are defective
=
( ) ( )
3.
[Ans. B]
Probability =
7.
[Ans. A]
A uniform
function
t)dt
t
t
6
t(
t)dt
t)dt
= (t
=0
t )dt
1
density
Density function
f(x) b a
0
t (
t)dt
a,x b
a x,x b
Mean E(x)=
t)dt
x(F(x))
x a
ab
2
b
b
x2F(x) xF(x)
x a
x a
=
Standard deviation = v ri nce
=
and
0,x a
x a
f(x) f x dx
, axb
0
b a
xb
0,
t (
distribution
Variance = t f(t)dt
= t (
( oth defective)
S mple sp ce
( oth defective)
1
1
b
dx x.
dx
Variance x
ba
x a
x a b a
b
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 41
x3 xL
3(b a) a 2 b a
Mathematics
3
1 7
(3 3 1)
2 8
b3 a3 (b2 a2 )2
3(b a) 4 b a 2
2
3(b a)
4 b a
b2 a2 2ab
12
9.
[Ans. C]
Probability of drawing 2 washers, first
followed by 3 nuts, and subsequently the
4 bolts
10.
[Ans. D]
Required probability =
(b a)2
12
. / . /
(b a)2
12
(b a)
12
11.
[Ans. D]
Given 4R and 6B
,

12.
[Ans. C]
Standard deviation =
8.
10
1
12
12
[Ans. D]
Let probability of getting atleast one head
= P(H) then
P (at least one head) = 1 P(no head)
P(H)=1 P(all tails)
But in all cases, 23=8
1 7
8 8
X=0
P (H) = 1
(X
) is
Below X
(X
) has to be less than 0.5 but
greater than zero
Alternately
Probability of getting at least one head
( ) ( )
13.
1 7
1
8 8
Alternately
From Binomial theorem
Probability of getting at least one head
pq
( )
( )
X=1
[Ans. D]
A
event that he knows the correct
answer
B
event that student answered
correctly the question P(B) = ?
( )
( )
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 42
( )
he knows
correct nswer
)
(
( )
14.
( ) ( )
)
( )
[Ans. D]
x
1
2
P(x) 0.3
0.6
(x)
(x)
x
18.
V(x)
x
(
(x )
[Ans. A]
3
0.1
So from figure
Mean value = 1
V ri nce : me n x defective pieces
(x )
)
n(n
(
)
(
) (
)
(
)
(x)
x (x)
Mathematics
, (x)
(x) ( x (x))
) ( )
( )
15.
[Ans. A]
19.
16.
Given that
x x
z
ere x
, s x gre ter th n
z
)
ence prob bility (z
17.
( ) ( )
( ) ( )
e
dz
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 43
20.
[Ans. B]
Mean m = np = 5.2
me
(x
) e
25 Calculators
23 Nondefective
2 Defective
5 Calculators
e
(x
Mathematics
)
4 Nondefective
1 Defective
CE
1.
2.
[Ans D]
A, B, C are true
(D) is not true. Since in a negatively
skewed distribution
mode > median > mean
[Ans. D]
Let the mean and standard deviation of
the students of batch C be and
respectively and the mean and standard
deviation of entire class of first year
students be and respectively
Now given,
and
Now Z =
4.
[Ans. C]
5.
[Ans. B]
Given f(x) = x for
x
= 0 else where
(
f(x)dx
x dx
=0 1
The probability expressed in percentage
P=
= 2.469% = 2.47%
6.
[Ans. A]
Given
P(private car) = 0.45
P(bus 1 public transport) = 0.55
Since a person has a choice between
private car and public transport
P(public transport) = 1 P(private car)
= 1 0.45 =0.55
P(bus) = P(bus public transport)
(bus public tr nsport)
(public tr nsport)
= 0.55 0.55
= 0.3025 0.30
Now P(metro)
= 1 [P(private car) + P(bus)]
= 1 (0.45 + 0.30) = 0.25
[Ans. B]
Since population is finite, hypergeometric
distribution is applicable
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 44
12.
[Ans. D]
ere
cm;
(
x 102)
=P.
[Ans. 6]
f(x)dx
( x
f(x)
( x
cm
6
Mathematics
)dx
x
otherwise
x7
/
[
=P(
x
)
This area is shown below:
)]
0.44
( )
)(
= 0.5 0.3345
= 1.1655 16.55%
Closest answer is 16.7%
8.
13.
[Ans. 0.4]
(
f( )d
[Ans. C]
( )
P(2 heads) =
9.
[Ans. C]
P(one ball is Red & another is blue)
= P(first is Red and second is Blue)
14.
=
10.
[Ans. A]
Given = 1000, = 200
We know that Z
When X= 1200, Z
Req. Prob = P (X
(Z
)
(
Z
Less than 50%
11.
[Ans. D]
(X
)
( )
(X
(X
15.
[Ans. B]
S * T+
n( )
( )
n(S)
16.
( )
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 45
no of vehicles
(
veh km
= 2.e
= 0.2707
CS
1.
[Ans. A]
P: Event of selecting Box P,
Q: Event of selecting Box P
P(P)=1/3, P(Q)=2/3
P(R/P)=2/5, P(R/Q)=3/4
P(R/P).P(P)
P(R/P).P(P) P(R/Q)P(Q)
2/51/3
4/19
2/51/3 3/ 4 2/3
P(P/R)=
2.
5.
[Ans. D]
The robot can reach (4,4) from (0,0) in
8C ways as argued in previous problem.
4
Now after reaching (4,4) robot is not
allowed to go to (5,4)
Let us count how many paths are there
from (0,0) to (10,10) if robot goes from
(4,4) to (5,4) and then we can subtract
this from total number of ways to get the
answer.
Now there are 8C4 ways for robot to reach
(4,4) from (0,0) and then robot takes the
U move from ( ) to ( ) ow from
(5,4) to (10,10) the robot has to make 5
U moves nd moves in ny order
which can be done in 11! ways
= 11C5 ways
Therefore, the number of ways robot can
move from (0,0) (10,10) via (4,4) (5,4)
move is
[Ans. C]
If f (x) is the continuous probability
density function of a random variable X
then,
(
x b) P(
x b)
b
= f x dx
3.
4.
[Ans. A]
The probability that exactly n elements
are chosen
=The probability of getting n heads out of
2n tosses
=
) . /
=
=
) (
Mathematics
(Binomial formula)
)
8C
4
[Ans. A]
Consider the following diagram
(3,3)
11C
5
8 11
4 5
20 8 11
ways
10 4 5
(0,0)
The robot can move only right or up as
defined in problem. Let us denote right
move by nd up move by U ow to
reach (3, 3), from (0,0) , the robot has to
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 46
6.
[Ans. D]
umber of permut tions with in the
first position =19!
Number of permutations with in the
second position = 10 18!
(Fill the first space with any of the 10 odd
numbers and the 18 spaces after the 2
with 18 of the remaining numbers in 18!
ways)
umber of permut tions with in rd
position =10 9 17!
(Fill the first 2 place with 2 of the 10 odd
numbers and then the remaining 17
places with remaining 17 numbers)
nd so on until is in th place. After
that it is not possible to satisfy the given
condition, since there are only 10 odd
numbers v il ble to fill before the
So the desired number of permutations
which satisfies the given condition is
8.
[Ans. C]
Let C denote computes science study and
M denotes maths study.
P(C on Monday and C on Wednesday)
= P(C on Monday, M on Tuesday and C on
Wednesday)
+ P(C on Monday, C on Tuesday and C on
Wednesday)
=1 0.6 0.4+ 1 0.4 0.4
= 0.24 + 0.16 = 0.40
9.
[Ans. B]
It is given that
P (odd) = 0.9 P (even)
Now since P(x) = 1
P (odd) + P (even) = 1
0.9 P (even) + P (even) = 1
P(even) =
/ = P (z
.z
/ = P (z
(z
) = P (z
10.
_____(i)
P(f ce
)
)
(
)
(
(0.5263)
= 0.1754
It is given that
P(even  face > 3) = 0.75
[Ans. A]
Given = 1, = 4
=2
and = 1,
is unknown
Given, P(X
) = P (Y 2 )
Converting into standard normal variates,
.z
= 0.5263
Mathematics
= 0.75
= 0.75
( )
( )
=1
f ulty
q
p
=3
not
f ulty
=0.468
[Ans. A]
The tree diagram of probabilities is
shown below
q
th
pq
th
q)(
p)
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 47
11.
[Ans. A]
If
b c
Then, no. of divisors of
(x
)(y
)(z
)
iven
o of ivisors of
(
)(
(
)(
)
13.
14.
15.
[Ans. C]
(x ) , (x)V(x)
Where V(x) is the variance of x,
Since variance is and hence never
negative,
( t le st one he d)
TT )
( )
16.
No. of divisors of
of
o of divisors of
(
)(
)
Mathematics
[Ans. B]
Required Probability
= P (getting 6 in the first time)
+ P (getting 1 in the first time and getting
5 or 6 in the second time)
+ P (getting 2 in the first time and getting
4 or 5 or 6 in the second time)
+ P (getting 3 in the first time and getting
3 or 4 or 5 or 6 in the second time)
( )
( )
( )
17.
[Ans. C]
The p.d.f of the random variable is
x
+1
P(x) 0.5 0.5
The cumulative distribution function F(x)
is the probability upto x as given below
x
+1
F(x) 0.5 1.0
So correct option is (C)
18.
[Ans. C]
e
(k)
[Ans. A]
+
The five cards are *
Sample space
ordered pairs
st
nd
P (1 card = 2 card + 1)
)( )( )( )+
*(
k
P is no. of cars per minute travelling.
[Ans. D]
y = a x is the correct expression
Since variance of constant is zero.
[Ans. A]
Let A be the event of head in one coin. B
be the event of head in second coin.
The required probability is
*
) ( )+
(
) )
( )
(
)
( )
(
)
(both coin he ds)
For k = 2 , P(2)=
Hence
( )
e
e
th
( )
( )
e
4
th
e
5
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 48
e
(
20.
( )
(
24.
[Ans. 10]
22 occurs in following ways
6 6 6 4
w ys
6 6 5 5
w ys
[Ans. 0.25]
( ) P(S) = 1
( )
( )
(
)
utu lly exclusive (
)
( )
( )
et ( ) x; ( )
x
P(A) P(B) = x(
x)
Maximum value of y = x (
x)
dy
(
x) x
dx
= 2x = 1
x
(max)
x
21.
( )
)
e
19.
( )
Mathematics
ximum v lue of y
ECE
1.
[Ans. D]
3 1
6 2
3 1
P(even number )
6 2
Since events are independent, therefore
1 1 1
P(odd/even)
2 2 4
P(Odd number)
p
22.
2.
[Ans. A]
I
23.
ut
rom
x
th
th
dx
dx
dx
nd
x
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 49
Put
3.
in
equ tion
A
0.6
B
A P A B
We know that, P
PB
B
[Ans. C]
P x.dx 1
Ke
Mathematics
.dx 1
ax
e dx
dx
x x,for x 0
x for x 0
K K
1
a a
( )
= 0.6 0.2
= 0.12
or
( )
7.
[Ans. A]
CDF: F x
dx
For x<0, F x
x 1
dx
4.
[Ans. D]
. / ( )
P (Y/D) =
. / ( )
. / ( )
=
5.
. / ( )
=0.4
F0
1
2
For x>0, F x F0
x 1
dx
[Ans. A]
var[x]= =E[(x x)2]
Where, x=E[x]
x= expected or mean value of X defining
1 x2
x concave downwards
2 2
E[X] =
xf xdx
x
8.
[Ans. A]
x P xi x xi dx
P xdx 1
x
xiP xi
By simplifying
2
3
M N 1
9.
[Ans. B]
x+y=2
x y=0
=> x =1, y = 1
P(x=1,y=1) =
[Ans. C]
Probability of failing in paper 1,
P (A) = 0.3
th
th
= 1/16
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 50
10.
[Ans. C]
14.
[Ans. C]
P(no. of tosses is odd)
(no of tosses is
be tail always.
So probability of getting head in first two
tosses
(
)(
)(
) (
)
= (1/2)10
11.
Mathematics
[Ans. B]
Both the teacher and student are wrong
Mean =
k
= 0.1 + 0.4 + 1.2 + 0.8 + 0.5
= 3.0
E(x2) =
k
etc
So,
P(no. of tosses in odd)
[Ans. D]
P(H, H, H, T) +P (H, H, H, H )
=
13.
. /
. /
15.
[Ans. B]
( V V)
( V
V )
*z
v
v+ Linear combination of
Gaussian random variable is Gaussian
(z )
and not mean till zero
because both random variables has mean
zero hence ( )
Hence Option B is correct
16.
[Ans. D]
F(x) = P{X x}
(x)
* X x+
x
2X
3
. / =
[Ans. C]
Total number of cases = 36
Favorable cases:
(1, 1)
(2, 1)
(3, 1)
(4, 1)
(5, 1)
(6, 1)
(1, 2)
(2, 2)
(3, 2)
(4, 2)
(5, 2)
(6, 2)
(1, 3)
(2, 3)
(3, 3)
(4, 3)
(5, 3)
(6, 3)
(1, 4)
(2, 4)
(3, 4)
(4, 4)
(5, 4)
(6, 4)
(1, 5)
(2, 5)
(3, 5)
(4, 5)
(5, 5)
(6, 5)
(1, 6)
(2, 6)
(3, 6)
(4, 6)
(5, 6)
(6, 6)
Total number of favorable cases
Then probability
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 51
17.
18.
(x)
et S
x f(x)
[Ans. C]
21.
II)gives
)S
(x)
i.e. The expected number of tosses (after
first head) to get first tail is 2 and same
can be applicable if first toss results in
tail.
Hence the average number of tosses is
22.
20.
(I
(II)
(I)
f(x)
(x)
x (x)
*X is l rgest +
19.
Mathematics
(z
23.
th
dz
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 52
x exp 4
x
x
x exp 4
5 dx
5 dx
5 dx
2.
x exp 4
x exp 4
[ exp (
,
24.
x exp 4
[Ans. B]
P(AB) =
5 dx
5 dx
x ) dx]
4/5
Parcel is
sent to R
Required probability =
R
3.
1/5
Parcel is lost
Parcel is lost
parcel
is
[Ans. C]
If two fair dices are rolles the probability
distribution of r where r is the sum of the
numbers on each die is given by
r
P(r)
4/5
that
)
( )
Parcel is sent to
Probability
1/5
Mathematics
lost
2
Probability that parcel is lost by
3
Probability that parcel is lost by
provided that the parcel is lost
4
5
EE
1.
6
[Ans. D]
(A) is false since of P & Q are
independent
pr(P Q) = pr(P) pr(Q)
which need not be zero.
(B) is false since
pr(P Q)
= pr(P) + pr(Q) pr(P Q)
(C) is false since independence and
mutually exclusion are unrelated
properties.
7
8
9
10
11
12
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 53
P(1, 5, 6) =
P(3, 4, 5) =
P(1, 2, 5) =
is correct.
[Ans. C]
x is uniformly distributes in [0, 1]
Probability density function
=
=
Mathematics
f(x) =
=1
dx
=
=
6.
[Ans. B]
Let N people in room. So no. of events that
at least two people in room born at same
date
Solving, we get N = 7
7.
[Ans. C]
(II is redI is white)
(II is red nd I is white)
(I is white)
(I is white nd II is red)
(I is white)
8.
[Ans. B]
pr(r = 8) =
pr(r = 8  r/4 is an integer) =
=
Choice (C) is correct.
4.
[Ans. C]
Dice value
1
Probability
and
is the entrie
rectangle
The region in which maximum of {x, y} is
less than
5
6
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 54
12.
Mathematics
dx
x
dx
dx
x
13.
p .m x,x y
f(x)dx
by property
kx dx
k
9.
14.
[Ans. A]
(x
)
,e
10.
e dx
e 
, e 
[Ans. B]
Let number of heads = x,
Number of tails n x
ifference x (n x)or (n
x n or n
x
If x n n
x
n
x
If n
IN
1.
[Ans. D]
or x
[Ans. C]
Since the reading taken by the instrument
is normally distributed, hence
P(x
x )
Where,
[Ans. *] Range 0.13 to 0.15
Let proportionality constant = k
( dot) k ( dots)
k
( dots)
k
( dots)
k ( dots)
k
( dots)
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
rob bility of showing dots
[Ans. D]
Since leap chosen will be random, so, we
assume it being the case of uniform
probability distribution function.
Number of days in a leap year=366 days
Now
.dx
e n of the distribution
St nd rd devi tion of the
distribution.
exp(
)dx
where, n=x 10 (
kg)
and from the data given in question
dx
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 55
3.
[Ans. D]
Mean=
8.
[Ans. B]
By definition of Gaussian distribution,
total area under the curve =1. Hence half
of the area =0.5
9.
[Ans. A]
=5.9 V.
(
V
(closest answer is 0.2)
P(x)=
4.
[Ans. C]
( )
Mean =
( )
x (x)dx =
Var(x)= (x
1 2
3 3
5.
Mathematics
[Ans. A] ]
(x
(x)dx
) dx =
10.
[Ans. C]
Probability of incorrect report
11.
[Ans. C]
mm
mm
Then probability
P(x)dx 1
x dx = 6
c
1
2
6.
[Ans. A]
Probability that the sum of digits of two
dices is even is same either both dices
shows even numbers or odd numbers on
the top of the surface
( )
( )
( )
Where
( )
Probability of occurring even
number of both the dices
( )
Probability of occurring odd
number of both the dices
(
(X
where x
mm
( )
nd (
( )
12.
7.
[Ans. A]
f(x) dx=P
or
or e
.dx =P
[Ans. D]
For the product to be even, the numbers
from both the boxes should not turn out
to be odd simultaneously.
( )
( )( )
or P = .
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 56
13.
[Ans. A]
f(x)dx
e 
14.
15.
e dx
[Ans. 2]
For valid pdf
Mathematics
dx
pdf dx
;k
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 57
Mathematics
Numerical Methods
ME 2005
1.
Starting from x = 1, one step of Newton
Raphson method in solving the equation
x +3x 7=0 gives the next value (x) as
(A) x=0.5
(C) x = .5
(B) x= . 0
(D) x=2
2.
ME 2006
3.
Match the items in columns I and II.
Column I
Column II
(P) GaussSeidel
(1) Interpolation
method
(Q) Forward
(2) Nonlinear
NewtonGauss
differential
method
equations
(R) RungeKutta
(3) Numerical
method
integration
(S) Trapezoidal
(4) Linear algebraic
Rule
equation
(A)
2
(B)
2
(C)
2
(D)
2
4.
at (0 5) is
(C) y = x
(D) y = x
5
5
ME 2007
5.
A calculator has accuracy up to 8 digits
2
sinxdx
0
ME 2010
6.
Torque exerted on a flywheel over a cycle
is listed in the table. Flywheel energy (in
J per unit cycle) using impsons rule is
Angle (degree)
Torque (Nm)
0
0
60
1066
120
323
180
0
240
323
300
55
360
0
(A) 542
(C) 1444
(B) 992.7
(D) 1986
ME 2011
7.
The integral
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 58
10.
The value of .
( )
value approximate
estimate?
calculated using
12.
13.
Consider
an
equation
= t
.If x =x at t = 0 , the
CE 2005
Linked Answer Question 1 and 2
Give a>0, we wish to calculate its
reciprocal value 1/a by using Newton
Raphson Method for f(x) = 0.
2.
= (x
(B) x
= (x
x )
(C) x
= 2x
ax
(D) x
=x
in
the
(C)
(D)
CE 2007
4.
The following equation needs to be
numerically solved using the NewtonRaphson method
x3 + 4x 9 = 0 the iterative equation for
the purpose is (k indicates the iteration
level)
differential
1.
(A)
(B) 0
value)
is evaluated
ordinary
Mathematics
CE 2006
3.
A 2nd degree polynomial f(x) has values of
1, 4 and 15 at x = 0, 1 and 2 respectively.
5.
(A) x
(B) x
(C) x
=x
(D) x
CE 2008
6.
Three values of x and y are to be fitted in
a straight line in the form y = a + bx by
the method of least squares. Given
x = 6, y = 2 x =
and xy =
the values of a and b are respectively
(A) 2 and 3
(C) 2 and 1
(B) 1 and 2
(D) 3 and 2
CE 2009
7.
In the solution of the following set of
linear equation by Gauss elimination
using partial pivoting 5x + y + 2z = 34;
4y 3z = 12; and 10x 2y + z = 4; the
pivots for elimination of x and y are
(A) 10 and 4
(C) 5 and 4
(B) 10 and 2
(D) 5 and 4
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 59
CE 2010
8.
The table below given values of a function
F(x) obtained for values of x at intervals
of 0.25.
x
0 0.25
0.5 0.75 1.0
F(x) 1 0.9412 0.8 0.64 0.50
The value of the integral of the function
between the limits 0 to using impsons
rule is
(A) 0.7854
(C) 3.1416
(B) 2.3562
(D) 7.5000
CE
9.
2011
The square root of a number N is to be
obtained by applying the Newton
Raphson iterations to the equation
x
= 0. If i denotes the iteration
index, the correct iteration scheme will be
(A) x
(B) x
= (x
= (x
CE 2013
12. Find the magnitude of the error (correct
to two decimal places) in the estimation
of following integral using impsons
Rule. Take the step length as 1.___________
(x
1.
Consider
(D) x
= (x
he error in
xe dx
is 2
1
R
xn1 xn can be used to compute
2
xn
the
(A) square of R
(B) reciprocal of R
(C) square root of R
(D) logarithm of R
0 .
CE 2012
The estimate of .
1
3
for a continuous
The values of
and ( ) are 19.78 and
500.01, respectively. The corresponding
error in the central difference estimate
for h = 0.02 is approximately
(A) .
0
(C) .5
0
(B) .0
0
(D) .0
0
11.
f(x)
series
CS 2008
2.
The minimum number of equal length
subintervals needed to approximate
3.
10.
the
= (x
0) dx
CS 2007
(C) x
Mathematics
obtained using
CS 2010
4.
NewtonRaphson method is used to
compute a root of the equation
x
13 = 0 with 3.5 as the initial value.
The approximation after one iteration is
(A) 3.575
(C) 3.667
(B) 3.677
(D) 3.607
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 60
CS 2012
5.
The bisection method is applied to
compute a zero of the function
f(x) = x
x
x
in the interval
[1,9]. The method converges to a solution
after ___________ iterations.
(A) 1
(C) 5
(B) 3
(D) 7
CS 2013
6.
Function f is known at the following
points:
x
f(x)
0
0
0.3 0.09
0.6 0.36
0.9 0.81
1.2 1.44
1.5 2.25
1.8 3.24
2.1 4.41
2.4 5.76
2.7 7.29
3.0 9.00
he value of f(x)dx computed using
the trapezpidal rule is
(A) 8.983
(C) 9.017
(B) 9.003
(D) 9.045
CS 2014
7.
The function f(x) = x sin x satisfied the
following equation:
( ) + f(x) + t cos x = 0.
The value of t is _________.
8.
Mathematics
(B) Only II
(C) Both I and II
(D) Neither I nor II
9.
= x dx
where a and b are given, which of the
following statements is/are TRUE?
(I) The value of K obtained using the
trapezoidal rule is always greater
then or equal to the exact value of
the defined integral
(II) The value of K obtained using the
impsons rule is always equal to the
exact value of the definite integral
(A) I only
(B) II only
(C) Both I and II
(D) Neither I nor II
ECE 2005
1.
Match the following and choose the
correct combination
Group I
Group II
(A) Newton1. Solving nonRaphson
linear equations
method
(B) RungeKutta
2. Solving linear
method
simultaneous
equations
(C) impsons
3. Solving ordinary
Rule
differential
equations
(D) Gauss
4. Numerical
elimination
integration
method
5. Interpolation
6. Calculation of
Eigen values
(A) A6, B1, C5, D3
(B) A1, B6, C4, D3
(C) A1, B3, C4, D2
(D) A5, B3, C4, D1
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 61
ECE 2007
2.
The equation x3 x2+4x 4=0 is to be
solved using the NewtonRaphson
method. If x=2 is taken as the initial
approximation of the solution, then the
next approximation using this method
will be
(A) 2/3
(C) 1
(B) 4/3
(D) 3/2
(A) 2
sin x
..
2 cos x
..
(C) 2
..
(D) 2
..
8.
The series
eXn
1 eXn
X2 eXn 1 Xn 1
(D) Xn1 n
Xn eXn
ECE 2014
6.
The Taylor expansion of
is
(C) Xn1 1 Xn
ECE 2013
5.
A polynomial
f(x) = a x
a x
a x
a x a
with all coefficients positive has
(A) No real root
(B) No negative real root
(C) Odd number of real roots
(D) At least one positive and one
negative real root
(B) 2
7.
ECE 2008
3.
The recursion relation to solve x=
using NewtonRaphson method is
(A)
=e
(B)
=
e
ECE 2011
4.
A numerical solution of the equation
f(x) = x x
= 0 can be obtained
using Newton Raphson method. If the
starting value is x = 2 for the iteration,
the value of x that is to be used in the next
step is
(A) 0.306
(C) 1.694
(B) 0.739
(D) 2.306
Mathematics
converges to
(A) 2 ln 2
(B) 2
(C) 2
(D) e
EE 2007
1.
is
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 62
EE 2009
4.
Let x
7 = 0. The iterative steps for
the solution using Newton aphsons
method is given by
(A) x
= (x
(B) x
=x
(C) x
=x
(D) x
=x
EE 2013
7.
When the Newton Raphson method is
applied
to
solve
the
equation
f(x) = x
2x
= 0 the solution at the
end of the first iteration with the initial
guess value as x = .2 is
(A) 0.82
(C) 0.705
(B) 0.49
(D) 1.69
EE 2014
8.
The function ( ) =
is to be
solved using NewtonRaphson method. If
the initial value of is taken as 1.0, then
the absolute error observed at 2nd
iteration is ___________
IN 2006
1.
For k = 0
2
. the steps of
NewtonRaphson method for solving a
nonlinear equation is given as
2
5
xk 1 xk xK2 .
3
3
(x
EE 2011
5.
Solution of the variables
and
for the
following equations is to be obtained by
employing the NewtonRaphson iterative
method
equation(i) 0x inx
0. = 0
equation(ii) 0x
0x cosx
0. = 0
Assuming the initial values
= 0.0 and
= .0 the jacobian matrix is
0
0.
0
0.
(A) *
(C) *
+
+
0
0.
0
0.
0 0
0
0
(B) *
(D) *
+
+
0
0
0
0
6.
Mathematics
IN 2007
2.
Identify the NewtonRaphson iteration
scheme for finding the square root of 2.
3.
(A) x
(x
(B) x
= (x
(C) x
(D) x
= 2
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 63
IN 2008
4.
It is known that two roots of the
nonlinear equation x3 6x2 +11x 6 = 0
are 1 and 3. The third root will be
(A) j
(C) 2
(B)
j
(D) 4
IN 2013
8.
While numerically solving the differential
equation
with
2xy = 0 y(0) =
using
IN 2009
5.
Mathematics
IN 2014
9.
The iteration step in order to solve for the
cube roots of a given number N using the
Newton aphsons method is
(D) 2
(A) x
=x
(B) x
= (2x
(C) x
=x
(D) x
= (2x
x )
)
x )
)
IN 2010
6.
The velocity v (in m/s) of a moving mass,
starting from rest, is given as
=v
t.
( )
= 0 using the
NewtonRaphson method.
Let f(x) = x
x and x = 1 be the initial
guess of x. The value of x after two
iterations (x ) is
(A) 0.0141
(C) 1.4167
(B) 1.4142
(D) 1.5000
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 64
Mathematics
y = sin ( ) =
2
[Ans. C]
By NR method ,
=x
f(x) = x
f( ) =
x =x
( )
( )
y = sin (
x =
y = sin( ) = 0
5
y = sin ( ) =
y = sin (
f (x) = x
f ( )= ,
=1
) = 0.70 0
)=
7
y = sin ( ) =
[Ans. C]
Given x y = 2
(i)
.0 x 0.0 y = b
(ii)
Multiply 0.99 is equation (i) and subtract
from equation (ii); we get
( .0
0. )x = b (2 0. )
0.02x = b
.
0.02x = b
x =
0.02
[Ans. D]
4.
[Ans. B]
Given f(x) = (x
2
)
f (x) = (x
f(x)dx = [(y
0.70 0
6.
y )
[(0
0)
0.70 0
0.70 0
[(0
y )]
7.
[Ans. C]
x
y=
( 0
0)
2(
2.7 /unit cycle.
Slope of normal = 3
( roduct of slopes = 1)
Slope of normal at point (0, 5)
y 5 = (x 0)
y= x 5
[Ans. A]
b a 2
0
h=
=
=
n
y = sin(0) = 0
0=0
[Ans. B]
ower = = Area under the curve.
h
(y
= [(y
y )
y
y )
2(0.70 0
2(y
2(y
)]
sinx dx =
5.
)=0
Trapezoidal rule
= 50 units
3.
0.70 0
(0.5) = .5
y = sin (
2.
0.70 0
1
1
x
dx = (y
= (
55)
2 )]
2
h
y
2
y )
= .
8.
[Ans. D]
By the definition only
y = sin ( ) = 0.70 0
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 65
9.
xdx is
h
ydx = [y
2
2(y
0.33
y ]
0.33
xdx =
.)
0.33
0.333
2(0.
0.
)]
13.
= . 0
10.
[ln(2.5)
2ln( . )
= .75
11.
2(ln2. )
2y
2 ln( . )
CE
1.
t
x = 0.0
0. = 0.
= 2t
t
f(x)dx = [y
2(y
iven in question
0
1
1
2
1
0.5
dx = [y
x
2
t
x =
2
rapezoidal rule
x
y
)dt
[Ans. C]
dx by trapezoidal rule
x
h=
[Ans. D]
The variation in options are much, so it
can be solved by integrating directly
dx
= t
dt
dx = ( t
ln( )]
2ln( .7)
Mathematics
..y
)]
a=0
i.e. f(x) =
2
3
0.33
a=0
Now f (x) =
f(x ) =
f (x ) =
2(y )]
0.
0.5]
=x
x
12.
=x
)
(
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 66
2.
[Ans. B]
For a = 7 iteration equation
Becomes x
= 2x
7x
with x = 0.2
x = 2x
7x = 2 0.2 7(0.2) = 0.12
and x = 2x
7x = 2 0.12 7(0. 2)
= 0.1392
[Ans. A]
f(x) = 1, 4, 15 at x = 0, 1 and 2
respectively
f(x)dx = (f
2f
=x
x
5.
f )
and
4.
= 30
= 5
5 =
5 ( ) =
ince = from (i)
5 ( )
=
=5
=
olving for and
(5 ) =
5
=0
= 2 and =
Alternative method
5
1
0
31
0
0
5
25
30
1
5
6
0
(x 5)(x
)=0
5x
(x 5)(x 2)(x
)=0
x=2 5
x )dx
+ =
2=
[Ans. A ]
Given f(x) = x
x
=0
f (x) = x
Newton Raphson formula is
= (i)
Also
= 5
= *x
2x
x
2a
a = 5
2a
a =
Solving (i) and (ii) a =
and a =
f(x) = 1 x + 4 x
x
[Ans. A]
Given
x 10 x + 31x 30 = 0
One root = 5
Let the roots be and of equation
ax + bx + cx + d = 0
= (
f(x )
f (x )
(x
x
)
( x
)
x
x
x
( x
)
=x
x
3.
Mathematics
6.
[Ans. D]
Y = a + bx
Given
n= x =
and xy =
th
th
y = 2 x = 14
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 67
9.
5
[0
0
 2]
2
0
[0
5
f(x )
f(x )
=x
=x
2x
2x
[x
10.
[Ans. D]
Error in central difference formula is
(h)
This means, error
If error for h = 0.03 is 2
0
then
Error for h = 0.02 is approximately
(0.02)
2
0
0
(0.0 )
11.
[Ans. D]
Exact value of .
 2]
2
[0
0
2
/2
Now to eliminate y, we need to compare
the elements in second column at and
below the diagonal element Since a = 4
is already larger in absolute value
compares to a = 2
The pivot element for eliminating y is
a = 4 itself.
The pivots for eliminating x and y are
respectively 10 and 4
8.
[Ans. A]
x
[Ans. A]
The equation is
5x + y + 2z = 34
0x + 4y 3z = 12
and 10x 2y + z =
The augmented matrix for gauss
elimination is
5
2
[0
 2]
0
2
Since in the first column maximum
element in absolute value is 10 we need
to exchange row 1 with row 3
Mathematics
dx = .0
=
=
0.5
]
[2
0. 7
= .
So, the estimate exceeds the exact value by
Approximate value Exact value
= 1.1116 1.0986
=0.012(approximately)
12.
4
266
[Ans. A]
I = h(f
=
0.
= 0.7 5
2f
0.25(
0.
0.
0.5)
(x
f )
2
= [( 0
0)dx
2
2(2 )
)]
= 2 5.
The value of integral
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 68
(x
0) dx = *
=2
x
5
0x+
3.
[Ans. A]
+
, x = 0.5
2 =
=x =
2 = + R
=R
=
So this iteration will compute the square
root of R
= +
=
8 = 4 +9
=
4.
= = 1.5
[Ans. A]
Here, the function being integrated is
f(x) = xe
f (x) = xe + e = e (x + 1)
f (x) = xe + e + e = e (x + 2)
Since,
both
are
increasing
functions of x, maximum value of f ( ) in
interval 1
2, occurs at = 2 so
(
)
(2
max f
=e
2) = e
Truncation Error for trapezoidal rule
= TE (bound)
[Ans. D]
y=x
dy
= 2x
dx
f(x)= x
x
= .5
5.
(b a) max f ( ) 1
(2 1) [e (2 + 2)]
Now putting
= 57 7
)=5
f(x )
2
oot lies between and
x =(
)=2
f(x ) 0
2
After ' ' interations we get the root
x =(
=
max f ( )
[Ans. B]
f( ) = 5
f( ) = 5
72
)
)
f(
0 f(
0
is number of subintervals
= . 07
max f ( )
Where
(x
2=+
=
= 1000 e
At convergence
x
=x =
=
Given x
2.
)/
[Ans. C]
5
Magnitude of error
= 2 5.
2 . = 0.5
CS
1.
Mathematics
6.
[Ans. D]
h
f(x)dx = [f(0)
2
=
0
[
.
.
0.
f( )
2(0.0
0.
. . 7.2 )
2(f )]
]
5 . ]
= 9.045
h=
Now, No. of intervals,
=
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 69
7.
8.
9.
ECE
1.
2.
[Ans. ]
Given (x) + f(x) + t cos x = 0
and f(x) = x sin x
f (x) = x cos x + sin x
f (x) = x ( sin x) + cos x + cos x
= 2 cos x x sin x
= 2 cos x f (x)
2 cos x f (x) + f(x) +t cos x = 0
2 cos x = tcos x t = 2
[Ans. A]
f(x) = 0.75x
2x
2x
f (x) = 2.25x
x 2
x =2 f = 2 f =
f
x =x
=0
f
f = f = 2
f
x =x
=2
f
f = 2 f =
f
x =x
=0
f
Also, root does not lies between 0 and 1
So, the method diverges if x = 2
nly ( )is true.
x1 2
3.
1 x n
4.
x1 x0
e
e
e xn
1 exn
[Ans. C]
x
f(x )
f (x )
=x
f(2) = (2
) = 2
f (2) =
=2
and
= .
5.
[Ans. D]
f(x) = a x
a x
a x
a x a
If the above equation have complex roots,
then they must be in complex conjugate
pair, because its given all coefficients are
positive ( they are real )
So if complex roots are even no. (in pair)
then real roots will also be even.
ption ( )is wrong
From the equation
( 0)
roduct of roots =
As no. of roots = 4,
Product of roots < 1
either one root 0
(or)
Product of three roots < 0
ption ( )is rong.
Now, take option (A),
Let us take it is correct .
Roots are in complex conjugate pairs
=
Product of roots
0
   
0 which is not possible
ption (A) is wrong
orrect answer is option ( )
[Ans. C]
By definition (& the application) of
various methods
4=0
Next approximation x1 x0
8 4
12 3
[Ans. C]
Given : f(x)= x e
By Newton Raphson method,
f(x )
x
x
=x
=x
f (x )
[Ans. C]
For value of K if trapezoidal rule is used
then the value is either greater than
actual value of definite integral and if
impsons rule is used then value is exact
Hence both statements are TRUE
[Ans. B]
y(t) =x3 x2 + 4x
x0 = 2
Mathematics
f x0
f ' x0
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 70
6.
[Ans. A]
sin x 2 cos x
x
= (x
)
7.
[Ans. B]
8.
[Ans. D]
2(
x
2
Put x =
as given,
x = [e ( 2)
]/e
= 0.71828
[Ans. C]
=e
.. = e
u(t)
x
2
. . x in
t
[Ans. D]
Here,
x = e u(t) dt = f(t) dt
At t = 0.01, x = Area of trapezoidal
=
x
f(x y) =
=(
)x
h
4.
5.
=[
=*
( )
f(x ) = e
f(x ) = e
6.
0x cos x
0x sinx
20x
0sinx
]
0cosx
0
0
is
0
+
0
[Ans. D]
x
x
x
=0
(x
)(x
)=0
x
=0 x
=0
x=
x= j
=x
(
The matrix at x = 0 x =
( )
[Ans. B]
u(x x ) = 0x sin x
0. = 0
v(x x ) = 0x
0x cosx
0. = 0
The Jacobian matrix is
u
u
x
x
v
v
[ x
x ]
[Ans. A]
Here
f(x) = e
f (x) = e
The Newton Raphson iterative equation is
=x
= *x
2
o maximum permissible value of is 2 .
i.e. x
[Ans. A]
since h = here
= x
=x
= 0.0099
or stability 
f(0.0 )] =
= [f(0)
2.
i=0
x =
as e =
EE
1.
Now put
3.
Mathematics
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 71
7.
[Ans. C]
x =x
=
.2
f(x )
f (x )
( .2)
2( .2)
( .2)
2
4.
[Ans. C]
Approach 1
Given, x3 6x2 + 11x 6 = 0
Or (x 1)(x 3)(x 2) = 0
x= 1, 2, 3.
= 0.705
8.
f(x )
=
f (x ) e
=
(e
Approach 2
For ax3 +bx2 + cx +d = 0
If the three roots are p,q,r then
Sum of the roots= p+q+r= b/a
Product of the roots= pqr= d/a
pq+qr+rp=c/a
)
e
5.
[Ans. D]
dx
x
=
dt
f(x, y) =
e
= 0. 7 0.
= 0.0
Absolute error at 2nd itteration is
0 0.0  = 0.0
IN
1.
=x
h
=(
[Ans. A]
As k xk+1 xk
xk = x
h (x y ) = x
)x
2.
3.
h(
or stability 
x = x
x =5
x =5
Mathematics
= 1.70
[Ans. A]
Assume x =
f(x) = x
=0
f(x )
x
=x
= [x
f (x ) 2
6.
[Ans. A]
dv
=v t
dt
t
v dv
=v t
dt
0 0 0 0+0 0. = 0
0.1 0 0+0.1 0. = 0.0
7.
[Ans. C]
f(x) = x
x
f (x) = x
= g(x)
x = initial guess
g (x) = x
g (x )
x =x
g (x )
2
]
x
[Ans. C]
Given p(x) = x + x + 2
There is no sign change, hence at most 0
positive root ( rom escartes rule of
signs)
p( x) = x
x+2
There is one sign change, hence at most 1
negative root ( rom escartes rule of
signs)
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 72
=
x =x
= .5
= .
= .5
g(x )
g (x )
0.75
7
8.
[Ans. D]
dy
= 2xy x = 0 y = h = 0.2
dx
y =y
h. f(x y )
(0.2)f(0 ) =
=
and y = y
[f(x y ) f(x y )]
(0. )[f(0 ) f(0.2 )]
=
= 0.
is the value of y after first step, using
Eulers predictor corrector method
9.
[Ans. B]
For convergence
x
Mathematics
= x =x x=
x =
(2x
x=
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 73
Mathematics
Calculus
ME 2005
1.
ME 2006
2.
be
(A)
(B)
8.
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
What is q?
(A)
(C) X
(D) 8
)
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
10.
(A) 0
(B)
is equal to
11.
(C)
(D) 1
)(
(D) Zero
(B)
(
(C)
(D)
(C) 2 (
ME 2007
(B) 2
6.
leads to
(A) 4y
(B) 16y
(C) 0
(D)
dt is:
9.
4.
By a change of variables
x(u,v) = uv, y(u,v) = v/u is double
integral, the integral f(x,y) changes to
f(uv, u/v) ( ). Then, ( )
(A) 2 v/u
(C) v
(B) 2 u v
(D) 1
I = (
2x2 7x 3
, then limf(x) will
x 3
5x2 12x 9
Assuming i =
3.
5.
If f( x ) =
7.
th
th
)
(
)

)
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 74
12.
If
y (2) =
(A) 4 or 1
(B) 4 only
13.
, then
14.
20.
21.
Let
(C) 1
(D) 1/ln2
y2 4x and x2 4y is
(A)
(B) 8
23.
(C)
(D) 16
z2 1 xy is
(A) 1
is
(A) 4
(C) 1
(B) 2
(D) 1
at x=2, y=1?
ME 2009
22. The area enclosed between the curves
What is
(A) 0
(B) ln2
(B)
16.
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
between x = 0 and x = 1 is
(A) 0.27
(C) 1
(B) 0.67
(D) 1.22
15.
19.
(C) 1 only
(D) Undefined
ME 2008
Mathematics
(C)
(D) 2
(B)
24.
17.
18.
The value of
(A)
(B)
x+2y=2
0
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D) 1
(C)
(D)
25.
is
th
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D) 1
equal to
(A) 7
(C) 3
(B) 4
(D) 0
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 75
ME 2010
26. Velocity vector of a flow field is given as
The function
(A)
o
o
(C)
(D)
(B)
o
o
except at x = 3/2
(C)
o
o
except at x = 2/3
(D)
o
o
28.
29.
ME 2012
33. Consider the function ( )
in the
interval
. At the point x = 0,
f(x) is
(A) Continuous and differentiable.
(B) Non continuous and differentiable.
(C) Continuous and non differentiable.
(D) Neither continuous nor
differentiable.
R
R
R
R
34.
R
R
ME 2011
30. If f(x) is an even function and is a positive
real number, then ( )dx equals
31.
What is
(A)
(B)
32.
36.
is
(C)
(D)
(C)
(B)
(C)
is
(A)
(B)
has
(C)
(D)
37.
equal to?
( )
(C) 0
(D) 1
(C) 1
(D) 2
R except at x = 3
(D)
/ is
35.
(A) 0
(B)
.
(A) 1/4
(B) 1/2
Mathematics
ME 2013
38. The following surface integral is to be
evaluated over a sphere for the given
steady velocity vector field
defined with respect to a
cartesian coordinate system having i, j and
k as unit base vectors.
(
(D)
th
th
)
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 76
45.
is
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
46.
) is
(A) 0
(C) 5
(B) 3
(D) 6
(C) 3
(D)Not defined
47.
ME 2014
40.
is
(A) 0
(B) 1
41.
42.
/ is equal to
(A) 0
(B) 0.5
43.
)
)
)
(
(A) 3
(B) 0
48.
(C) 1
(D) 2
(C) (
(B) (
(D) .
(A)
)
/
).
(
(
CE 2005
1.
Value of the integral (
(C) 1
(D) 2
Curl of vector
(A) (
(B) (
(C)
(D)
44.
Mathematics
2.
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 77
CE 2006
3.
What is the area common to the circles
o
2
(A) 0.524 a
(C) 1.014 a2
(B) 0.614 a2
(D) 1.228 a2
4.
CE 2007
5.
Potential function is given as
=
. When will be the stream
function () with the condition
= 0 at x = y = 0?
(A) 2xy
(C)
(B)
+
(D) 2
6.
Evaluate
(C)
(D)
(A)
(B)
7.
10.
12.
transformed to
(A)
(B)
9.
(C)
(D) 18
parabola is y = 4h
(A)
(D)
(C)
= 0 by substituting
(C)
where x is the
= 0 can be
(D)
14.
The
is
(A) 2/3
(B) 1
(C) 40.5
(D) 54.0
(B) 2
is
CE 2010
13. A parabolic cable is held between two
supports at the same level. The horizontal
span between the supports is L. The sag at
the midspan is h. The equation of the
CE 2008
+
A velocity is given as
= 5xy + 2 y2 + 3yz2 . The divergence
The equation
The value of (
(A) 13.5
(B) 27.0
CE 2009
11. For a scalar function
f(x, y, z) = + 3 + 2 the gradient at
the point P (1, 2, 1) is
(A) 2 + 6 + 4
(C) 2 + 12 + 4
(D)
(B) 2 + 12 4
8.
Mathematics
15.
th
(C) 3/2
(D)
Given a function
( )
The optimal value of f(x, y)
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 78
CE 2013
21.
CE 2011
16.
22.
(C) a
(D) 2a
and
R
.
The area of the parallelogram is
Q
(C) 1
(D)
24.
25.
(C) 1
(D)
R
P
( )
wh
(A) ad bc
(B) ac+bd
(A) 0
(B)
(C) ad + bc
(D) ab cd
dx is
(A) 1
(B) 0.5
(A) sec
(B)
(C) 1
(D) 8/3
23.
20.
(A)
(B)
Wh ho
h
o such that
the function defined below is continuous
?
f(x)={
18.
The value of
(A) 0
(B) 1/15
CE 2014
(A) 0
(B) a/2
17.
Mathematics
26.
(C) o
(D)
(C)
(D)
The expression
(A) log x
(B) 0
th
th
(C) x log x
(D)
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 79
CS 2005
1.
Let G(x)
CS 2010
1
g(i)xi where x<1.
2
(1 x) i0
What is g(i)?
(A) i
(B) i+1
(C) 2i
(D) 2i
CS 2007
2.
Consider the following two statements
about the function f(x) =x:
P: f(x) is continuous for all real values of x
Q: f(x) is differentiable for all real values
of x
Which of the following is true?
(A) P is true Q is false
(B) P is false Q is true
(C) Both P and Q are true
(D) Both P and Q are false
CS 2008
3.
4.
x sinx
equals
Lim
x x cosx
(A) 1
(B) 1
(C)
(D)
Let
P=
7.
(A) 0
(B) 1
(C)
(D) 1
(A) 0
(B) 2
(C) i
(D) i
CS 2012
9.
Consider the function f(x)= sin(x) in the
interval x , . The number and
location(s) of the local minima of this
function are
(A) One , at
(B) One , at
(C) Two , at and
(D) Two , at and
CS 2013
10. Which one the following function is
continuous at x =3?
(A) ( )
(B) ( )
(C) ( )
(D) ( )
CS 2014
11. Let the function
( )
CS 2009
6.
/ ?
CS 2011
8.
Given i = , what will be the
evaluation of the definite integral
Mathematics
(
(
Where
evaluates to
o
o (
o (
)
)
)
)
(
(
)
)
(C) ln2
(D)
ln 2
.
th
th
h h
th
( )
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 80
13.
14.
(A)
h h
( )
I only
II only
Both I and II
Neither I nor II
(B)
(C)
(D)
ECE 2006
2.
As x is increased from
function f x
e
1 ex
3
The integral sin d is given by
3.
1
2
2
(B )
3
(A)
(B)
, the
to
is equal to_______.
15.
Mathematics
4
3
8
(D)
3
(A)
(C)
(D)
ECE 2005
1.
The derivative of the symmetric function
drawn in given figure will look like
(C)
P ds , where P is a vector, is
4.
equal to
(A) P dl
(C) P dl
(B) P dl
(D)
Pdv
5.
th
2
(A) P P P
(C) 2P P
2
(B) P P
(D) P 2P
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 81
ECE 2007
6.
For the function
, the linear
approximation around = 2 is
(A) (3 x)
(B) 1 x
ECE 2008
12. Consider points P and Q in the x y plane,
with P=(1,0) and Q=(0,1). The line
Q
(C) 3 2 2 1 2 x e
(D)
7.
8.
9.
10.
14.
15.
16.
17.
(A) 0.5
(B) 1
11.
13.
Consider the function f(x) =
x 2.
The maximum value of f(x) in the closed
interval [ 4,4] is
(A) 18
(C) 2.25
(B) 10
(D) Indeterminate
sin /2
lim
is
0
(C) 2
(D) not defined
Y
3
2
) along
(
the semicircle with the line segment PQ as
its diameter
(A) Is
(B) Is 0
(C) Is 1
h
1
1
Mathematics
(A) 1.0
(B) 2.5
(C) 4.0
(D) 5.0
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 82
21.
ECE 2009
18. The Taylor series expansion of
sinx
at x is given by
x
(A) 1
x 2 .....
3!
(B)
2
x
1
.....
(C)
2
x
1
.....
3!
19.
3!
.....
(C)
(D)
ECE 2010
20. If
(A) 0
(B)
is
(C) 10V
(D) 15V
ECE\IN 2012
23. The direction of vector A is radially
outward from the origin, with
where
and K is
constant. The value of n for which
. A = 0 is
(A) 2
(C) 1
(B) 2
(D) 0
ECE\EE 2012
24. The maximum value of
( )
in the interval
[1,6] is
(A) 21
(C) 41
(B) 25
(D) 46
ECE 2013
25. The maximum value of unit which the
approximation
holds to within
10% error is
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
26.
, then has a
maximum at
minimum at
maximum at
minimum at
ECE 2011
22. Consider a closed surface S surrounding a
volume V. If is the position vector of a
point inside S, with the unit normal of S,
3!
(D) 1
If
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
Mathematics
is
(A) 0
(B) 1/3
(C) 1
(D) 3
(C) 1
(D) 2
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 83
27.
Mathematics
34.
35.
, magnitude
30.
For
function ( )
(A)
o
(B)
o
The value of
(A)
(B)
(B)
2.
3.
If S =
/ is
31.
32.
in the interval
EE 2006
4.
A surface S(x, y) = 2x + 5y 3 is
integrated once over a path consisting of
the points that satisfy
(x+1)2+ (y 1)2 = . The integral
evaluates to
(A) 17
(C) /17
(D) 0
(B) 17/
5.
33.
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
(C)
(D)
(A)
The expression V = R (
th
(A) R (
(B) R (
(C)
(D)
th
R) h
R )
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 84
EE 2007
6.
EE 2010
The integral
equals
(A)
(B) 0
) o
EE 2009
8.
f(x, y) is a continuous function defined
over (x, y) [0, 1] [0, 1]. Given the two
constraints, x > and y > , the
volume under f(x, y) is
(A)
(B)
(C)
9.
10.
11.
a minimum
a discontinuity
a point of inflection
a maximum
13.
(A) 0
(B) 1
, is equal to
(C) e
(D) 1/e
EE 2011
14. The two vectors [1, 1, 1] and [1, a,
where a = .
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
has
12.
)
(
At t = 0, the function ( )
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
(C) (1/2) o
(D) (1/2)
EE 2008
7.
Consider function f(x)= (
) where
x is a real number. Then the function has
(A) only one minimum
(B) only two minima
(C) three minima
(D) three maxima
(D)
Mathematics
15.
],
/, are
orthonormal
orthogonal
parallel
collinear
EE 2013
16. Given a vector field
, the line integral
F(x, y) = (
)
(
)
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 85
(B)
(C) (
(
(D)
19.
20.
21.
23.
( )
Where f and
v are scalar and vector fields respectively.
If
h
is
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
24.
EE 2014
18. Let ( )
. The maximum value of
the function in the interval (
) is
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
The line integral of function
, in the
counterclockwise direction, along the
circle
is
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
Minimum of the real valued function
(
) occurs at x equal to
( )
(A)
(C) 1
(B)
(D)
IN 2005
1.
A scalar field is given by f = x2/3 + y2/3,
where x and y are the Cartesian
coordinates. The derivative of f along the
line y = x directed away from the origin,
at the point (8, 8) is
( )
substitution u = (
2.
( ) (
( ) (
( ) (
(A)
(B)
(A)
(B) 0
3.
( )
is
(C) f(1)
(D) f(0)
(C)
(D)
is
2
4.
o . /
(D)
(A) R
22.
(C)
. The
Mathematics
(B) R
5.
(C) R
(D) R
If f =
+
+
where ai (i = 0 to n) are constants,
then
is
(A)
(B)
th
th
(C) nf
(D) n
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 86
6.
0
(A)
(C)
(B)
. /
(D)
. /
IN 2006
7.
The function
(
) is
approximated as
where is in
radian. The maximum value of for
which the error due to the approximation
is within
(A) 0.1 rad
(C) 0.3 rad
(B) 0.2 rad
(D) 0.4 rad
()
( )
(A) (
()
))
(B) (
()
))
()
))
()
))
()
(D) (
) ( )
( ))
( ))
13.
The expression
(A)
(B) x
14.
Given y =
(A)
(B)
10.
(C)
(D)
(C) 12
(D) 13
15.
(A) Indeterminate
(B) 0
(C) 1
(D)
IN 2009
16. A sphere of unit radius is centered at the
origin. The unit normal at a point (x, y, z)
on the surface of the sphere is
(A) (x, y, z)
(C) .
/
IN 2007
9.
The value of the integral
dx dy is.
is equal to
(A) 0
(B) 4
(B) .
(C)
(D)
is.
IN 2008
12. Consider the function y = x2 6x + 9. The
maximum value of y obtained when x
varies over the interval 2 to 5 is
(A) 1
(C) 4
(B) 3
(D) 9
(C)
8.
Mathematics
(D) .
IN 2010
17. The electric charge density in the region
R:
is given as
( )
, where x and y are in
meters. The total charge (in coulomb)
contained in the region R is
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D) 0
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 87
18.
The integral
evaluates to
(A) 6
(B) 3
19.
/ sin(t) dt
23.
24.
Given
()
()
o .
(C) 1.5
(D) 0
converges to
(A) cos (x)
(B) sin(x)
(C) sinh(x)
(D)
IN 2011
20.
The series
for
(A)
(B)
Mathematics
The
o w
(A) A circle
(B) A multiloop closed curve
(C) Hyperbola
(D) An ellipse
converges
(C)
(D)
IN 2013
21. For a vector E, which one the following
statement is NOT TRUE?
(A)
E
E
o o
(B) If
E
E is called conservative
(C) If
E
E is called irrotational
(D)
E
E
rotational
IN 2014
22. A vector is defined as
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 88
Mathematics
=
=
0 o
[Ans. A]
[Ans. D]
o
9.
[Ans. B]
10.
[Ans. B]
(
For V to be max
Hence, h
3.
[Ans. A]
. /
=
(
=
=
11.
4.
[Ans. A]
(
[Ans. A]
I= (
=2
[Ans. B]
Let the vectors be
)
( )( )( )
= 2
6.
[Ans. A]
A Line integral and a surface integral is
connected by stokes theorem
7.
[Ans. B]
[Ans. B]
[Ans. A]
Given:
I=
For
0 1
]
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 89
13.
14.
[Ans. B]
Since interval given is bounded, so
minimum value of functions is 1.
= 0
) 
L=
[Ans. D]
To see whether the integrals are bounded
or unbounded, we need to see that the
o
h
h
interval of integration. Let us write down
the range of the integrands in the 4
options,
Thus, (D) , i.e.,
[Ans. B]
h
19.
o
(
). (
( )
( )
( )
( )
Coefficient of (x )
Now f(x)= ex
(x)= ex
(a)= ea
( )
[Ans. D]
div {(
(
[Ans. C]
Taylor series expansion of f(x) about a is
given by
( )
dx is unbounded.
along a vector
(2x
(
(
16.
[Ans. B]
Let x= a3 a=2
=1.22
15.
).dx
= (
L=
L = (
=
18.
= (
[Ans. D]
h
Mathematics
)
(
)}
(
)
=3
21.
[Ans. C]
=
Hence at (1,1,2),
Directional derivative =
17.
[Ans. A]
I = .dx dy
The limit of y is form 0 to
and limit
of x from 0 to 2
I =
( )
(
(
)(
)
)
/
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 90
22.
[Ans. A]
Given:
23.
y2 4x
x2 4y
Mathematics
[Ans. A]
Short method:
Take a point on the curve z = 1, x = 0,
y=0
Length between origin and this point
)
(
)
(
) =1
(
This is minimum length because all
options have length greater than 1.
(4,4)
(0,0)
24.
x4
4x
16
[Ans. B]
Y
or x4 64x
or x(x 64) 0
3
or x3 64
or x 4
x = cos
y=sin
y 4
Required area = .
Path is x2 y2 1
R e
(x y)2 1 2sin cos
2 x3
2 x3 2
3 120
4
64
(4)3 2
3
12
32 16 16
3 3 3
cos2
(1 sin2)d
2 0
0
=
Alternately
For point where both parabolas cut each
other
1 1
1
2 2 2 2
Alternately
Given: x2 y2 1
Put x=cos , and y=sin
y2 4x, x2 4y
x 4 4x
2
= 1 sin2
or x2 8 x
or x4 64x
or x3 64
x 4,0 ,(4,0)
x2
dx
0 4
1
2
4x
0
cos2
1 1
2 0 2 2 2
Required area
4
2 x3 16
2 x3 2
3 120 3
25.
[Ans. C]
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 91
3z 2x 2yz
30.

31.
(
27.
( )
[Ans. D]
Standard limit formulae
32.
[Ans. B]
33.
[Ans. C]
The function is continuous in [ 1, 1]
It is also differentiable in [ 1, 1] except at
x = 0.
Since Left derivative = 1 and
Right derivative = 1 at x = 0
34.
[Ans. B]
[Ans. C]
R, and
R, except at
35.
[Ans. D]
( )
( )
( )
( )
f(x) has a point of inflection at x =0.
36.
[Ans. A]
[Ans. D]
,
29.
( )
28.
[Ans. D]
If f(x) even function

* +
[Ans. D]
Mathematics
[Ans. D]
Volume from x = 1 to x = 2,
th
th
)
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 92
38.
37.
[Ans. A]
By Gauss Divergence theorem,
( )
Mathematics
( )
( )
( )
[Ans. A]
The area enclosed is shown below as
shaded
( )
( )
(
Now, x = 0
which is point Q(0,0)
and x = 1
which is point
P(1,1)
So required area is
39.
[Ans. C]
( ) ( )
Using Integration by parts
Here,
f=ln(x) and dg=
and g=
* +
o
( ) ( )
* +
[
th
th
( )
]
)
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 93
40.
[Ans. A]
o
[Differentiating both
o
o
Hospital method]
o w
. /
45.
41.
Mathematics
[Ans. D]
o
o
o
( )
( )
( )
[Ans. B]
G
o
46.
[Ans. C]
Div
[Ans. B]
(
)
)
( )
,
o ( )( )
( )
o ( )( )
43.
47.

ho
[Ans. B]
Let
(
o (
[Ans. A]
[
[
]
)
48.
)]
()
[
,
(
44.
)
(
(
)
)
)]
(
,
(
[Ans. B]
)]
,
)
[
th
th
]

th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 94
CE
1.
((
( )
= y and
)
( )
. /
. /
[Ans. D]
Since the position of rail engine S(t) is
continuous and differentiable function
according to Lagranges mean value
theorem more
)
o )
o
(t) = v(t) =
*
(
( )
)+
m/sec
kmph
4.
[Ans. C]
f = 2 +3
= 126 kmph
Where v(t) is the velocity of the rail
engine.
3.
= 2y
h o
I=
= xy
Here I = (
2.
Mathematics
[Ans. D]
h
o h
r=2acos
(i) r = a represents a circle with centre
(
)
(ii) r = 2acos represents a circle
symmetric about OX with centre at
( )
The circles are shown in figure below. At
h
o o
o
P
y Q
3
(
)
(
)
( )
( )
( )
( )
5.
[Ans. A]
Potential function,
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 95
8.
Integrating
[Ans. D]
Put
wh
Mathematics
( )
[Ans. B]
Let I()
= (
dx ( )
=
) [ from eqn(i)]
o )1
=
dI =
Integrating, I =
( )
() ( )
+C=0
C=
()
( )
I(0) =
But from equation (i), I(0) =
dx
dx =
h
h
[Ans. D]
=5 +2
+ 3y
( )
9.
[Ans. C]
=0
If = 0
= 5y + 4y + 6yz
At(1, 1, 1)
div ( ) = 5.1 + 4.1 + 6.1.1
= 15
o
Since P and Q are nonzero vectors
o
0
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 96
10.
[Ans. A]
Since the limit is a function of x. We first
integrate w.r.t. y and then w.r.t. x
)
[Ans. D]
Length of curve f(x) between x = a and
x = b is given by
13.
Mathematics
+
Here,
4h ( )
= 8h
Since
(
and y = h at x =
* ( )
*
( )+
(Length of cable)
ho
11.
[Ans. B]
f = + 3 +2
f = grad f = i
+j
[Ans. A]
15.
[Ans. A]
( )
+k
14.
[Ans. B]
(
Putting,
o
(
Given,
+
.
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 97
+
.
ho
and get
+
.
Since,
We have either a maxima or minima at
o ()
18.
[Ans. A]
19.
o 
[Ans. A]
Area =  
R (
)
o
, we can use
Since,
Mathematics
minimum equal to
16.
R
R
[Ans. B]
Let I =
Since ( )
I=
( )
20.
[Ans. B]
21.
[Ans. B]
( )
( )
( )
(i) + (ii) 2I =
2I =
2I = 
I = a/2
17.
[Ans. C]
For a function f(x) to be continuous,
at x=a
( )
( )
o
(
If f(x) is continuous at x=
. /
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 98
Mathematics
[Ans. 12]
o )
( )
o ( )
( )
[
22.
Magnitude of acceleration
[Ans. C]
(
)
(
25.
[Ans. B]
We have
)
( )
, ow
( )
=1+0=1
Hence correct option is (C)
23.
( )
( )
[Ans. A]
(4, 3)
a
(2, 2)
b
( )
0.5
(1, 0)
0.5
o wh
o ordinate points are
given is given by
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 99
26.
[Ans. A]
=
4.
=1
[Ans. A]
P=
= log x
1
n 1 r
Cr xr
n
1 x r0
r 0
r 0
r 0
i 0
5.
= 12
g(i) =i+1
24
48
+ 37
48 x = 0
x=
=2
[Ans. A]
f(x)= x
Continuity: In other words,
f(x) = x o
x for x< 0
Since,
=
=0 ,
f (x) is continuous for all real values of x
Differentiability:
96x
48
= 36
Now at x = 0
=
48
At 2 also
0 (using
calculator)
There are 3 extrema in this function
( )
6.
( )
[Ans. D]
Since ( )
R h
So x is continuous but not differentiable
at x=0
3.
x (12 48x 48 ) = 0
x = 0 or 12 48x 48 = 0
4x 4 = 0
()
[Ans. D]
y = 3 16
r 1 xr i 1 xi
1)
w h
(
r1 Cr xr r1 C1xr
1
21 r
Cr xr
1 x 2 r0
Putting n=2,
2.
=
Q=
[Ans. B]
w h a =1, l=2k 1
P= (
CS
1.
Mathematics
I =
=
= (
)
(
Since tan (A B) =
[Ans. A]
=
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 100
Mathematics
9.
[Ans. B]
f(x) = sin x
( )
o
( )
o
(
(
)
)
(
(
)
)
( )
At
. /
gives maximum
value
=,
)
At
= ln ( sec ) ln (sec 0)
= ln ( )
= ln (
. /
value
( )
10.
)0=
[Ans. A]
For x =
7.
[Ans. B]
(
8.
) [
*(
) +
) +
.
11.
[Ans. C]
By Mean value theorem
12.
[Ans. A]
Define g(x) = f(x) f(x + 1) in [0, 1]. g(0)
is negative and g(1) is positive. By
intermediate value theorem there is
(
)
h h g(y) = 0
That is f(y) = f(y + 1)
Thus Answer is (A)
13.
[Ans. 2]
*
w
+
*
w +
For min
maximum non common
elements must be there
*
+
must be common to any 2 elements
of V1
(
)minimum value = 2
o
o
+
[
(
, f(x) =
For x = , f(x) = 3 1 = 2
For x = 3, f(x) = 2
(
) (
) = f(3)
[Ans. D]
gives minimum
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 101
14.
Mathematics
[Ans. 4]
(
)
o
o ()
o
o
)
ECE
1.
[Ans. C]
dy
0 for x< 0
dx
dy
0 for x> 0
dx
o
Substituting the limits
o ()
o ( )
2.
[Ans. A]
Given,
f x
f ' x
1 e .e e
1 e
3.
= x cos
x 2
2x
ex
1 ex
Let cos = t
At
o
o
o
[Ans. A]
[Ans. C]
= o ( ) o
=
LHS = I + II =
15.
ex
1 ex
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 102
8.
Mathematics
[Ans. A]
Given, f x x2 x 2
df x
0
dx
4.
2x 1=0
[Ans. A]
o h o
)
1
2
d2f x
= 2 ve
dx2
So it shows only minima for interval
[ 4, 4], it contains a maximum value that
will be at x= 4 or x=4
f( 4)=18 and f(+4)=10
5.
6.
[Ans. D]
From vector triple product
(
)
(
)
(
)
Here,
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
( )
[Ans. D]
y f x ; x 0,
[Ans. A]
( )
f x0
2
x x0 f' x0 x x0 f'' x0
......
e (x 2)(e
2
x0
or 0 lim y
x 2
)
x
2
e ......
2
x 22 ......
e2 3 x
7.
9.
10.
lim
0
ex e x
ex ex
x x2 x3
e 1 ..........
1 2 3
11.
ex 1
[Ans. B]
Two points on line are ( 1, 0) and (0, 1)
Hence line equation is,
y y
y 2 1 x c
x2 x1
y x c
y x 1 ( )
x x2 x3
..........
1 2 3
x2 x4
..........
ex ex
2 4
x x
e e
x3 x5
x ..........
3 5
1
or cot h (x)=
sin /2
1 sin /2
lim
0 2
/2
1 sin /2 1
= lim
2 0 /2 2
[Ans. C]
coth (x)=
[Ans. A]
2
2
5
I ydx x 1dx 2.5
2
1
1
1
x
(Since at x=1,y=2)
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 103
12.
[Ans. B]
Taking f(x, y)= xy, we can show that,
xdx+ydy, is exact. So, the value of the
integral is independent of path
15.
Mathematics
[Ans. A]
(0, 1)
4
I 4x3 10 2x dx 4x3 160x4 dx
0
0
1
4x4 160 5
=
x 33
5 0
4
(1, 0)
[Ans. A]
f(x)= +
(x)=
=0 x=0
(x)= +
>0 x R.
Hence minimum at x=0
f(0)=1+1=2
Alternatively:
For any even function the maxima &
minima can be found by
A.M. >= GM
=> exp(x) + exp( x) 2
Hence minimum value = 2
17.
[Ans. B]
[ 
13.
16.
 ]
[Ans. B]
Let f(x) ex sinx
o
2
x a
f x f a x a f'a
f''a
2!
where, a=
2
x
f x f x f'
f''
2!
Coefficient of (x )2 is
f ''
2
[Ans. A]
o
Thus, (
( )w
o ( )w
o ( )w
)w
h
h
h
[ 
 ]
o
ow
ow
ow
ow
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 104
18.
21.
[Ans. D]
sinx = x
= (x )
y=
or
19.
sin x = (x )
or
=1
)
(
= 1
)
(
....
(
)
...
....
( )
....
Therefore, at
22.
( )
and is the position vector)
23.
has a maximum.
[Ans. D]
Apply the divergence theorem
[Ans. C]
[Ans. A]
. /
* +
)
)
25.
[Ans. B]
( )
)]
(
(
)]
[Ans. C]
( )
, ( )
( )
( )
. /
24.
]
]
. /
along PQ y =1 dy =0]
= [
Since
[Ans. D]
o h o
=
20.
[Ans. A]
....
sin (x )
or
Mathematics
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 105
30.
[Ans. C]
E o
E o
31.
[Ans. *] Range
( )
(
)
( )
=1+1+1
=3
[Ans. D]
o h o
h
integral of a
32.
33.
)
)
)
)
[Ans. C]
Let x (opposite side), y (adjacent side)
and z (hypotenuse side) of a right angled
triangle
29.
(
)
( )
h
28.
to 0.01
( )
[Ans. D]
27.
26.
Mathematics
Given
)(
[Ans. A]
o
( )
( )
( )
Since ( ) is negative, maximum value of
f(x) will be where ( )
o
0(
o
( )
( )
( )
oh
( (
(
th
th
)(
))
)
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 106
34.
Now at x = 2
(2) =
(
)
=
(
)
= 2
<0
At x = 2 we have a maxima.
3.
At (1, 1),
[Ans. D]
5.
[Ans. D]
We consider options (A) and (D) only
because which contains variable r.
By integrating (D), we get
6.
[Ans. D]
By property of definite integral
)
)
=3
)
( )
(
On simplification we get option (D)
[Ans. C]
Grad u =
At (1, 3) Grad u =
,( )
7.
[Ans. B]
f(x) = (
)
(x) = 2(
)
=4x(
) =0
x = 0, x = 2 and x = 2 are the stationary
points.
(x) = 4[x(2x) +(
) ]
= 4[2
= 4 [3
= 12
(0) =
< 0, maxima at x = 0
(2) =(12)
= 32 > 0, minima at x =
( 2) =12(
)
= 32 > 0; minima at x =
There is only one maxima and only two
minima for this function.
=
2.
4.
EE
1.
[Ans. C]
At (1, 1, 1)
 
35.
Mathematics
[Ans. A]
f(x) =
(x) =
( )
=
(
)
Putting ( (x) = 0
(
)=0
(
)=0
x = 0 or x = 2 are the stationary points.
Now,
(
) (
(x) =
)(
)
=
(
(
))
=
(
)
(
)=2
At x = 0,
(0) =
Since (x) = 2 is > 0 at x = 0 we have a
minima.
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 107
8.
Mathematics
= ,
=, (
= (
[Ans. A]
))
) =1
14.
[Ans. B]
Dot product of two vectors
=1+a+ =0
So orthogonal
15.
[Ans. C]
f(x) =
( )
( )
So the equation f(x) having only maxima
at x = 1
16.
[Ans. B]
9.
10.
[Ans. C]
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
[Ans. D]
=(
)
(
(
) = (0, 2)
(
) = (2, 0)
Equation of starting line
11.
)
y = 2 x and dy = dx
17.
o
( )
.(

(
(
=0

) /
is undefined
[Ans. A]
Div ( )
=.
Discontinuous
/(
18.
= 1+1+1= 3
13.
[Ans. D]
But at
12.
[Ans. B]
(
y = 2 x , dy = dx
=(
(
)
Putting
[Ans. B]
P=
th
[Ans. A]
( )
o
M
th
) (
) (
(
( )
th
) (
) (
)
(
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 108
)
)
19.
Mathematics
[Ans. B]
/1
)( )(
23.
[Ans. A]
( )
( )
( )
24.
[Ans. B]
( )
( )
)(
(
( )
( )
( )
)
)
20.
[Ans. C]
( )
( )
(
)
For number of values of
)
o
( ) (
( ) (
( )
( )
)
( )
( )
M
21.
[Ans. B]
IN
1.
G
o
[Ans. A]
(
(
22.
[Ans. 2]
(
o .
/.
2.
[Ans. D]
Using L Hospital Rule., numerator
becomes =
th
th
()
= ( )
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 109
3.
[Ans. B]
Mathematics
When
( )
will be
And when
f(x)
( )
.
7.
1
[Ans. B]
Error,
4.
[Ans. A]
(t) =x (t) +y (t) +
Let R
z (t)
( ) =K (constant)
R
i.e., (t) + (t) + (t) = constant.
On analyzing the given (A) option, we find
(t)
that R
( )
[Ans. C]
Given :
f=
+
where,
+
(i=0 to n) are constant.
+(n 1)
+
and
=0+
(n 1)
+n
+
= ,
= nf
6.
[Ans. B]
( )
8.
[Ans. B]
()
When
( )
( )
( )
When
( )
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 110
()
14.
()
Mathematics
[Ans. B]
Given y = x2 + 2x + 10
= 2x + 2
( ) 

From equation (i)
()
()
()
()
15.
[Ans. C]
By definition
16.
[Ans. A]
()
Unit vector=
=xi+yj+zk
and
17.
[Ans. C]
R:
Y
( )
1
1
,
[Ans. D]
10.
[Ans. A]
This is a standard question of
differentiability & continuity
Area =
[Ans. C]
y=
=(
 o
9.
11.
+1
( )
Total charge =
=
=
18.
).(cos x + sin x) = 0
tan x = 1
Or x =
coulomb.
[Ans. B]
We know that
() (
( )wh
. /
y will be maximum at x =
y=
19.
=
12.
13.
[Ans. C]
y(2) =
y(5) =
[Ans. B]
Expansion of sin x
........
( )
( )
20.
[Ans. B]
In a G.P
[Ans. C]
y=
y=
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 111
21.
[Ans. D]
.E=0 is not irrational (it is solenoidal)
22.
[Ans. 1]
From Gauss divergence theorem, we have
/dxdydz
Mathematics
[Ans. C]
24.
[Ans. D]
o .
23.
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 112
Mathematics
Differential Equations
ME 2005
1.
If x
xy
n y
what is y
(A) e
(B) 1
then
(C)
(D)
2.
3.
The solution of
For
ME 2008
8.
It is given that
+ 2y + y = 0, y (0) = 0,
y(1) = 0. What is y (0.5)?
(A) 0
(C) 0.62
(B) 0.37
(D) 1.13
9.
ME 2009
10.
+ 3y =
, the particular
integral is:
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
5.
The solution of x
with the
(A) y
(C) y
(B) y
(D) y
ME 2010
11.
+
(A) (1+ x)
(C) (1 x)
(B) (1+ x)
(D) (1
, is a
2
dy
2xy ex with y (0) = 1 is:
dx
6.
(D) 2 x 2
(B) x 1
condition y
+4
ME 2006
4.
x)
)= 0 has
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 113
ME 2011
12. Consider
the
differential
x
,yt
x
,yt
equation
t n
(B) y
t n (
(C) y
t n ( )
(D) y
t n(
17.
18.
differential
y
equation
(B) s n ( )
(D)
partial
u
15.
19.
s n( )
differential
equation
is a
(D) u
y and
x
,y
x
+ ,y
x
+ ,y
y is
20.
with
t
__________
constant, is
(A) y s n x
(B) t n (
(C)
os (
(D) t n (
y with c as a
x
t
s
(A) 1
(B) 1
x t
x t
 t
(C) 0
(D)
ME 2014
16. The matrix form of the linear system
x
,yt
at x
where k is a constant,
x
+ ,y
(B) u
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
x
+ ,y
the
ME 2013
14. The
equation
ME 2012
13. Consider
x
t n
Mathematics
is
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
CE 2005
1.
Transformation to
substituting v = y
linear form by
of the equation
+ (1 n)pv = (1 n)q
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 114
2.
(B)
+ (1 n)pv = (1+n)q
(C)
+ (1+n)pv = (1 n)q
(D)
+ (1+n)pv = (1+n)q
CE 2007
6.
The degree of the differential equation
+ 2x = 0 is
(A) 0
(B) 1
in the range
(A)
(B)
y
x
( os x
( os x
(C)
( os x
(D)
( os x
( )
7.
is given by
x = 0 is
s n x)
(B) In(y) =
s n x)
s n x)
8.
xy
+4
(D) y =
CE 2008
9.
(C) In(y) =
(A) y =
s n x)
CE 2006
3.
A spherical naphthalene ball expanded to
the atmosphere losses volume at a rate
proportional to its instantaneous surface
area due to evaporation. If the initial
diameter of the ball is 2 cm and the
diameter reduces to 1 cm after 3 months,
the ball completely evaporates in
(A) 6 months
(C) 12 months
(B) 9 months
(D) Infinite time
+ y = 0 is
y = P cos x + Q sin x
y = P cos x
y = P sin x
y=Psn x
given that at x = 1,
10.
y = 0 is
5.
(C) 2
(D) 3
The solution of
y
4.
Mathematics
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
= 0.25 y is to be
solv us ng t b w r
mpl t Eul rs
method with the boundary condition y = 1 at
x = 0 and with a step size of 1. What would
be the value of y at x = 1?
(A) 1.33
(C) 2.00
(B) 1.67
(D) 2.33
Solution of
(A) x
(B) x
at x = 1 and y = is
y
y
(C) x
(D) x
y
y
CE 2009
11. Solution of the differential equation
3y
+ 2x = 0 represents a family of
(A) Ellipses
(B) Parabolas
(C) circles
(D) hyperbolas
CE 2010
12. The order and degree of the differential
equation
+ 4 ( )
respectively
(A) 3 and 2
(B) 2 and 3
th
th
= 0 are
(C) 3 and 3
(D) 3 and 1
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 115
13.
14.
y=
y=
y=
y=
d2y dy
4 y2 2 x
dt2
dt
(A) degree=2, order=1
(B) degree=1, order=2
(C) degree=4, order=3
(D) degree=2, order=3
6y = 0 is
+
+
+
+
2.
n q
Mathematics
ECE 2006
3.
z = px + qy
z = px + pq
z = px + qy + pq
z = qx + pq
sn
CE 2011
15. The solution of the differential equation
+ = x, with the condition that y = 1 at
x = 1, is
(A) y =
(D) y =
CE 2012
16. The solution of the ordinary differential
y=0 for the boundary
condition, y=5 at x = 1 is
(A) y
(C) y
(B) y
(D) y
CE 2014
17. The
os
m x
(C) y = +
(B) y = +
equation
d2y
k2y 0
2
dx
integrating
for
the
equation
(A)
(B)
ECE 2007
4.
The solution of the differential equation
d2y
y y 2 under the boundary
dx2
conditions
(i) y=y1 at x=0 and
(ii) y=y2 at x=, where k, y1 and y2 are
constants, is
(A) y
y
y
xp( x ) y
(B) y
y
y
xp x
y
(C) y
y
y s n x
y
(D) y
y
y
xp x
y
k2
differential
s
(C)
(D)
ECE 2005
1.
A solution of the following differential
equation is given by
d2y
dy
5 6y 0
dx
dx2
ECE 2008
5.
Which of the following is a solution to the
differential equation
2x
3x
(A) y e e
2x
3x
(C) y e e
2x
3x
(B) y e e
2x
3x
(D) y e e
(A)
t
(B) x t
th
th
x t
x t
(C) x t
(D) x t
th
t
t
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 116
ECE 2009
6.
The order of the differential equation
ECE 2011
10. The solution of the differential equation
d2y dy
y4 et is
dt 2 dt
(A) 1
(C) 3
(B) 2
(D) 4
7.
P.
dx x
dy
y
Q.
dx
x
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
3. Hyperbolas
dy
x
dx
y
y x
(C) y
(D) y
ECE\EE\IN 2012
11. With initial condition x(1) = 0.5, the
solution of the differential equation,
t
t is
(A) x
(C) xt
(B) x
(D) x
ECE\IN 2012
12. Consider the differential equation
y t
y t
y t
t
t
t
wt y t 
n

num r
l v lu o
(A)
(B)
y
s ng Eul rs rst or r m t o
with a step size of 0.1, the value of y
is
(A) 0.01
(C) 0.0631
(B) 0.031
(D) 0.1
A function n x satisfies the differential
equation
is
(A) x
(B) x
ECE 2010
8.
Consider a differential equation
9.
y y
2. Straight Lines
dy x
R.
dx y
S.
Mathematics
where L is a
y

t
(C)
(D) 1
ECE 2013
13. A system described by a linear, constant
coefficient,
ordinary,
first
order
differential equation has an exact solution
given by y t or t
when the forcing
function is x(t) and the initial condition is
y(0). If one wishes to modify the system
so that the solution becomes 2y(t) for
t > 0, we need to
(A) Change the initial condition to y(0)
and the forcing function to 2x(t)
(B) Change the initial condition to 2y(0)
and the forcing function to x(t)
(C) Change the initial condition to
j y(0) and the forcing function to
j x(t)
(D) Change the initial condition to
2y (0) and the forcing function to
2x(t)
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 117
ECE 2014
14. If the characteristic equation of the
differential equation
y
t
15.
n t v lu s o
(A) 1
(B) 0,0
r
(C) j
(D) 1/2
xy
(C)
(B)
xy
(D)
(B) x t
(C) x t
(D) x t
EE 2011
3.
With K as a constant, the possible solution
for the first order differential equation
is
Mathematics
xy
(C)
(D)
(A)
(B)
EE 2013
4.
A function y
x
x is defined over
an open interval x = (1,2). At least at one
point in this interval ,
16.
17.
18.
If z
xy ln xy then
(A) x
(C) x
(B) y
(D) y
(A) 20
(B) 25
tx
6.
x
x
(A) x t
, the solution is
(B) s n t
os t
(C) s n t
os t
(D) os t
Consider
the
EE 2005
1.
The solution of the first order differential
qu t on x t
3x(t), x (0) = x is
(A) x (t) = x
(C) x (t) = x
(B) x (t) = x
(D) x (t) = x
EE 2010
2.
For the differential equation
(C) 30
(D) 35
EE 2014
5.
The solution for the differential equation
x
x w t n t l on t ons x
t
x
n

s
t
(A) t
t
is exactly
differential
equation
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 118
2.
urv s or w
t
urv tur t
3
any point is equal to cos w r s t
angle made by the tangent at that point
with the positive direction of the xaxis,
r
gv n
, where y and y
d2y
dy
3 2y (t)
2
dt
dt
Where (t) is an impulse input. The
solut on s oun by Eul rs orw r difference method that uses an
integration step h. What is a suitable
value of h?
(A) 2.0
(C) 1.0
(B) 1.5
(D) 0.2
Mathematics
IN 2007
5.
The boundaryvalue problem y
y
y
y
w ll
v nonzero
solut on
n only t v lu s o r
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
IN 2008
6.
Consider the differential equation
= 1 + y2. Which one of the following
can be a particular solution of this
differential equation?
(A) y = tan (x + 3) (C) x = tan (y + 3)
(B) y = tan x + 3
(D) x = tan y + 3
IN 2010
7.
Consider
y
the
differential
equation
y(1) is
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
IN 2011
8.
Consider the differential equation
y
y y
with boundary conditions
y(0) = 1, y(1) = 0. The value of y(2) is
(A) 1
(C)
(B)
(D)
IN 2013
9.
The type of the partial differential
equation
is
(A) Parabolic
(B) Elliptic
10.
th
(C) Hyperbolic
(D) Nonlinear
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 119
Mathematics
IN 2014
11. The figure shows the plot of y as a
function of x
(C)
(D)
x
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 120
Mathematics
4.
[Ans. D]
x y
y
lnx
x
xy
x
lnx
x
omp r ng w g t
ow
y(I.F.) =
x y
olv ng bov
utt ng x
x
2.
3.
[Ans. B]
The given differential equation may be
written as
y
y
y
ux l ry qu t on s
lnx
x
x
x
n t v lu o
t n n t v lu o y t
5.
[Ans. B]
First order equation,
sy
dy
Py Q,
dx
Where P = 2x and Q =
Since P and Q are functions of x, then
Integrating factor,
[Ans. C]
Given equation is
y
p
qy
x
x
p
q y
p
q
ts solut on s
y
um o roots p
p
ro u t o roots q
q
[Ans. C]
Given equation is
y
y
p
q
x
x
p
q
ut p
n q
y
I.F. = e Pdx e x
Solution is
y
yex x c
,c=1
Since, y
x2
(1 + x) e
y
6.
[Ans. A]
Order: The order of a differential equation
is the order of the highest derivative
appears in the equation
Degree: The degree of a differential
equation is the degree of the highest
order differential coefficient or derivative,
when the differential coefficients are free
from radicals and fraction.
The general solution of differential
qu t on o or r n must nvolv n
arbitrary constant.
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 121
7.
y
( )y x
x
x
Standard form
y
y
x
Where P and Q function of x only and
solution is given by
[Ans. C]
y
x
v n
y
y
x
nt gr t ng
y
x
nx
olut on y x
x
and x
Given condition
y
m ns t x
r or yx
y
[Ans. D]
x
x
Auxiliary equation is
m2 + 3 = 0
i.e. m =
x
os t
sn t
x
os t
s n t
At t = 0
1=A
0=B
x = os t
x
11.
[Ans. B]
is third order (
is linear, since the product
) and it
is not
os t
[Ans. D]
y
x
y
y
t n
10.
y
9.
x x x
yx
[Ans. A]
y
y y
A.E is, D2+2D+1 =0
2=0
m 1
The C.F. is (C1+C2x)ex
P.I. = 0
ow y
n y
x
x
8.
Mathematics
[Ans. A]
Given differential equation is
y
x
y x
x
th
y
t n.
th
y x
x
x
x
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 122
13.
[Ans. A]
17.
y
y
x
x
y
x
x
y
n y
Choice (A) satisfies the initial condition as
well as equation as shown below
y x
y
n y
y
lso
x
x
y
x
18.
y
y
x
x
y
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
o y x is the solution to this equation with
given boundary conditions
14.
[Ans. D]
15.
[Ans. B]
m
m
u
u
At x=0,
At x=L,
(
[Ans. *] Range 34 to 36
y
x
y
x
y
x
tx
y
y
tx
x
y
x
tx
y
[Ans. D]
y
os x y
x
Let x y z
y
z
x
x
z
os z
x
z
os z
x
z
s
( ) z
x
z
os ( )
Integrating
z
t n( )
x
z
t n( )
x
x
t n(
)
n
19.
u x
Solving we get u = U(
16.
Mathematics
[Ans. A]
x
x
y
t
y
x
y
t
So by observation it is understood that,
x
x
,y *
+ ,yt
y
)
[Ans. A]
Since the determinant of wronskian
matrix is constant values for, therefore it
is same for both t=0 and t=
t
20.
x t
x t
t
[Ans. B]
y
x x
y
y
ln ( )
x
y
x t
t
x t
ln y
ln
v ny
n
th
y
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 123
CE
1.
y
tx
x
[Ans. A]
Given
+ p(t)y = q(t) y
n
y
3.
Multiplying by (1 n) y we get
v
p t
n y
q t
t
Now since y
= v we get
v
n pv
n q
t
Where p is p (t) and q is q(t)
t
Where, V =
4 r
sn x
os
x
sn
x
os x
sn x
os x
r )
t
utt ng r
r
t
dr = kdt
Integration we get
r = kt + C
At t = 0, r = 1
1= k0+C
C=1
r = kt + 1
Now at t = 3 months r = 0.5 cm
0.5 = k 3 + 1
r
r
t
t
Substituting in (i) we get
os x
sn x)
y
(
( os x
[Ans. A]
[Ans. A]
y
y
y
x
x
y
y
( )
x
This is a linear differential equation
Given, v = y
v
y
n y
t
t
y
v
t
n y
t
Substitution in the differential equation
we get
2.
Mathematics
n solv ng g v s
t
sn x
t = 6 months
y
os
sn
4.
sn x
os x
[Ans. A]
Given
y
x
xy x
x
y
x
xy x
x
Dividing by x
os x
sn x
sn x
os x
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 124
y
x
( )y (
)
x
x
x
Which is a linear first order differential of
the form
y
y
x
Integrating factor = I.F =
=
y I.F = .(I.F)dx
x
yx
(
)x x
x
Now at x = 1, y = 0
7.
[Ans. D]
y
x y
x
This is variable separable form
= x dx
y
y
tx
log y
C
x y
5.
x
x
[Ans. B]
=
0C
=
Now at t = 30 minutes
y =2
6.
ln = kt +
C.
C.
Given = 250C
Now t t
60 = 25 + C.e0
C = 35
At t
m nut s
40 = 25 + 35
y +1=0
t
=
y
y
y
0.25hy
y
+y =0
Putting k = 0 in above equation
0.25h y
y +y =0
Since, y = 1 and h = 1
0.25 y
[Ans. C]
y
y y
tx
x
h=1
Iterative equation for backward (implicit)
Euler methods for above equation would
be
y
y
x
8.
y
log y
i.e. 0
Mathematics
= 25 + 35 (
= 25 + 35 ( ) (s n
[Ans. B]
Degree of a differential equation is the
power of its highest order derivative after
the differential equation is made free of
radicals and fractions if any, in derivative
power.
= 31.
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 125
9.
12.
[Ans. A]
+y=0
10.
13.
x x
C=2
Solution is
y
x
[Ans. D]
y y
x n y
x x
This is a linear differential equation of the
form
y
y
wt
n
x
x
x
IF = Integrations factor
x x
y
x
( )
( )
x
(
x x
Solution is
y (IF) =
x
y. x = xx x
yx = x x
y
)
15.
x
x
y
[Ans. C]
y
y
x
x
Auxiliary equation is
+D6=0
(D 2) = 0
D = 3 or D = 2
Solution is y =
[Ans. C]
Z = ax + by + ab
z
p
x
z
q
b
y
Substituting a and b in (i) in terms of p
and q we get z = px + qy + pq
[Ans. A]
y y
y
y
/
0( )
y 1
x
x
The order is 3 since highest differential
14.
x +y =4
y
x
y y
is
3y
y
)
x
At x = 1, y =
11.
[Ans. D]
y
x
x
y
y dy = x dx
y y
[Ans. A]
y
x
+1=0
E sm
m
General solution is
y=
[ cos (1 x) + sin (1 x)]
= cosx + sinx
= P cosx + Q sinx
Where P and Q are some constants
Mathematics
yx =
th
th
+C
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 126
y=
sin ka=0
m x
Now y(1) = 1
ot
solut on s y
17.
m x
[Ans. D]
k2D2y= y
y2
y2
2 1
D k2 y k2
1
m1 =
k
x/k
x/k
C.F. = C1e C2 e
[Ans. D]
x/k
x/k
y2
y= C1e C2 e
At y=y1, x=0
y1 = C1+ C2+y2
At y=y2 , x= Hence C1 must be zero
y1 = C2+y2
C2 =y1  y2
[Ans. B]
d2y
dy
5 6y 0
dx
dx2
A.E. is D2 5D 6 0
D=2,3
2x
3x
Hence, solution is y e e
2.
sn
[Ans. D]
y
y
x
y
y
y
x
4.
16.
Mathematics
x
y=(y1 y2) exp + y2
k
5.
[Ans. B]
x t
x t
t
(D +3) x(t) = 0
[Ans. B]
3
d2y dy
4 y2 2 x
dt2
dt
Order of highest derivative=2
Hence, most appropriate answer is (B)
3
3.
[Ans. A]
Given, Differential equation,
d2y
k2y 0
dx2
Auxilary equation is
y
Let y
os x
sn x
At x=0, y = 0 A=0
y
sn x
At x=a, y=0 B sin ka=0
B0 otherwise y=0 always
So, x t ke3t ,
Hence x t 2e3t is one solution (for
some boundary / initial condition)
6.
[Ans. B]
The order of a differential equation is the
order of the highest derivative involving
in equation, so answer is 2.
The degree of a differential equation is
the degree of the highest derivative
involving in equation, so answer is 1.
7.
[Ans. A]
P.
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 127
Q.
log y
y
log x
y y
y
8.
yp rbol
x x
9.
t
t t
xt
xt
12.
[Ans. D]
Approach 1:
y t
y t
y t
t
t
t
Converting to sdomain
s y s
sy
y
sy s
y s
s
s
y s
s
s
y s
s
s
n nv rs
pl
tr ns orm
y t
t
u t
y t
t
t
y t

t
[Ans. D]
Approach 2:
y t
y t
y t
t
t
t
Applying Laplace Transform on both
sides
y
s y s
sy

t
(sy s
y
) y s
s y s
s
sy s
y s
s
s
y s
s
s
s
s
n x
m
Auxiliary equation m
olut on n x
Since, n
Since, n
must be zero)
Therefore
(hence
r l
y
old y +0.1 ( ) new
x
y
x y
0 0
0+0
0+0.10=0
=0
0. 0
0.1+0
0+0.10.1=0.01
1 =0.1
0. 0.0 0.2+0.01 0.01+0.210.1
2 =0.21
1
=0.031
The value of y at x= 0.3 is 0.031.
x
x=1
ypr bol
Equ t on o
[Ans. B]
y x
y x
x
x y
ol s xt
qu t on o
y y
x
x x
S.
[Ans. C]
t
log
qu t on o
R.
11.
Mathematics
[Ans. C]
Given y
ln y
When
y
y
and
x
y t
y t
y t
t
t
t
t
t
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 128
z
y
x ln xy
ox
z
x
y t

t
13.
[Ans. D]
Let the differential equation be
y t
y t
x t
t
Apply Laplace transform on both sides
y t
{x t }
2
y t 3
t
sy s
y
y s
x s
s
y s
x s
y
x s
y
y s
s
s
Taking inverse Laplace on both sides
x s
{y s }
2
3 y
{
}
s
s
y t
x t
y
So if we want
y t as a solution both
x(t) and y(0) has to be multiplied by
.
Hence change x(t) by
x t and y(0) by
y
14.
[Ans. A]
y
y
y
x
x
The auxiliary equation is
m
m
then either
m
or m
i.e., roots of the equation are equal to
or
z
y
18.
EE
1.
xy ln xy
xy
[Ans. C]
z xy ln xy
z
y ln xy
x
y ln xy
x (t)
x
t
x
lnx =
t
x
Putting
x
Now putting initial condition x(0) = x
x
x
Solution is x = x
i.e. x(t) = x
xy
omog n ous
xy
xy
equation (homogeneous)
r non l n r qu t ons
16.
xy
s ng y
y
n
gv s
n b
y
x
tx
y
[Ans. A]
v n x t
equation non
x ln xy
[Ans. B]
x
x
x
t
t
Pre auxiliary equation is
m
m
Pre roots of AE are m
Repeated roots are present.
So, most general solution in
n t
bt
[Ans. A]
xy
xy
z
y
i.e.
15.
xy
xy ln xy
z
x
ox
17.
Mathematics
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 129
2.
[Ans. B]
x
x
x
t
t
Auxiliary equation m
m
m
m
(m+4)(m+2)=0
m= 2, 4
x(t) =
6.
[Ans. C]
x y
xy
y
y
x
nx
IN
1.
x(
s ts
[Ans. C]
y
and
x(t)= 2
3.
(1)
y
y
x
w subst tut y
n
x(0) = 1 1=
Mathematics
[Ans. A]
y
y
4.
5.
[Ans. B]
v n
os
y
n
y
now y t n
[Ans. B]
y
x
x
p n nt rv l
x
y
x
x
y
x
x
Value is in between 20 and 30
So it is 25
[Ans. C]
x
x
gv n
t
x
os t
sn t
x
n
x
sn t
os t
t
x

t
x
os t
y= .x
Which is equation of a parabola.
3.
[Ans. A]
A.E.
D= 1+ 10i
C.F =
(A cos10 x + B sin 10 x)
x
4.
[Ans. C]
5.
[Ans. C]
sn t
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 130
6.
[Ans. A]
Given
Hyperbolic if
El ps
Compare the given differential equation
with standard from A = 1, B = 0, C = 0
= 1 + y2
Integrating
= x
Or t n y = x + c
Or y = t n x
7.
Parabolic
[Ans. C]
y
y
x
Auxiliary equation, m + 1 = 0
m= 1
C.F =
10.
[Ans. C]
s nx
s nx
os x
So, y
os x s n x
or m x m
y
s nx
os x
s nx
os x
x
y
os x s n x
y
or x
m xm
y m x
os
sn
11.
[Ans. A]
Given partial differential equation is
x
os x
y
y
9.
[Ans. D]
y t
y t
y
y
y=
8.
Mathematics
[Ans. D]
By back tracking, from option (D)
y
x x or x
x
= x or x
Integrating
y
x x or x
x
x x or x
x
t
We know that
y
(x y
or
x
or x
is said to be
Parabolic if
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 131
Mathematics
Complex Variables
ME 2007
1.
If
x y and (x, y) are functions with
continuous second derivatives, then
x y + i (x, y)
can be expressed as an analytic function
of x + i (i = ), when
(A)
ME 2014
6.
7.
+
(D)
(A) 2i
(B) 4i
9.
ME 2009
3.
An analytic function of a complex variable
z = x + iy is expressed as
f(z) = u(x, y) +iv(x, y) where i = 1 .
If u = xy, the expression of v should be
y
2
y
(C)
(D)
x2
2
x y 2 k
2
ME 2010
4.
The modulus of the complex number
(B)
) is
(A) 5
(B)
(C) 1/
(D) 1/5
traversed in
8.
(C) 2i
(D) 0
x y 2 k
is evaluate
(A) 0
4
4
ME 2008
2.
The integral z z evaluated around
the unit circle on the complex plane for
z
is
x y
(C)
(B)
The integral y x
(B)
(A)
, is
10.
(D)
(A)
i
(B)
0.511+1.57i
(C)
i
(D) 0.511+1.57i
ME 2011
5.
The product of two complex numbers
1 + i and 2 5i is
(A) 7 3i
(C) 3 4i
(B) 3 4i
(D) 7 + 3i
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 132
CE 2005
1.
Which one of the following is NOT true for
complex number and ?
(A)
(B) 
(C) 
(D) 
2.
=
 + 
   
 +

2  + 2 
+
+
CE 2011
6.
For an analytic function,
f(x + iy) = u(x, y)+iv(x, y), u is given by
u = 3x 3y . The expression for v
considering K to be a constant is
(C) 6x 6y+k
(A) 3y
3x + k
(D) 6xy +k
(B) 6y 6x + k
CE 2014
z z
7.
i
i
ECE 2006
1.
The value
of
2.
dz is
(A)
4i
(C)
(B)
(D) 1
(C)
(D)
the
contour
i
i
integral
z in positive sense is
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
(C) I
CE 2006
3.
Using Cauchys is integral theorem, the
value of the integral (integration being
taken in counter clockwise direction)
can be expressed as
(A)
(B)
Mathematics
ECE 2007
3.
If the semicircular contour D of radius 2
is as shown in the figure, then the value of
the integral
is
CE 2009
4.
5.
has
j2
(C) 1 and i
(D) i and i
j2
dz
(A) j
(B) j
th
(C)
(D)
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 133
ECE 2008
4.
The residue of the function
f z
5.
z 2 z 22
2
(A)
(B)
at z=2 is
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
(C)
(D) 2
) z is
(A) 4
(B) 4
12.
+ j2
j2
(C) 4
(D) 4
+ j2
j2
EE 2007
If f(z) =
is given by
(A) 2
(B) 2 +
, then
(C) 2j
(D) 2j
z
and 1
and
(C)
(D)
The value of
(A)
1.
where C is the
contour zi/2 = 1 is
(A) 2i
(C) t n z
(B)
(D) i t n z
ECE 2010
7.
The residues of a complex function
(B)
ECE 2014
11. C is a closed path in the zplane given by
z=3. The value of the integral
ECE 2009
6.
Mathematics
EE 2011
2.
A point z has been plotted in the complex
plane, as shown in figure below.
nit ir l
and
z
and
ECE 2011
8.
ECE\EE\IN 2012
9.
If x =
then the value of x is
(C) x
(A)
(D) 1
(B)
10.
Given f (z)
nit ir l
lm
lm
nit ir l
lm
nit ir l
y
y
lmlm
. If C is a
nit ir l
z z is
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 134
EE 2013
3.
the circle z
(A) 4
(B)
4.
i
2 where i
(C) 2 +
(D) 2 +2i
os (
) + i sin (
, is
, are
IN 2005
1.
Consider the circle 
 2 in the
complex plane (x, y) with z = x + iy. The
minimum distant form the origin to the
circle is
(C) 4
(A) 2 2
(B) 4
(D) 2
2.
Let
, where z is a complex number
not equal to zero. The z is a solution of
(C) z
(A) z
(D) z
(B) z
os ( ) + i sin ( )
(C)
os ( ) + i sin ( )
os ( ) + i sin ( )
(D) os ( ) + i sin (
os (
) + i sin ( )
EE 2014
5.
Let S be the set of points in the complex
plane corresponding to the unit circle.
{z: z
} . Consider the
(That is,
function f(z)=zz* where z* denotes the
complex conjugate of z. The f(z) maps S to
which one of the following in the complex
plane
(A) unit circle
(B) horizontal axis line segment from
origin to (1, 0)
(C) the point (1, 0)
(D) the entire horizontal axis
IN 2006
3.
The value of the integral of the complex
function
3s 4
f(s)
(s 1)(s 2)
Along the path s 3is
(A) 2j
(B) 4j
7.
(C) 6j
(D) 8j
IN 2007
4.
of a complex variable
6.
Mathematics
Let j =
(A) j
(B) 1
is
(D)
IN 2008
6.
A complex variable
x+j
has its
real part x varying in the range
to + . Which one of the following is
the locus (shown in thick lines) of 1/Z in
the complex plane?
direction, around z 1 = 1, is
(A) i
(C) i
(B)
(D) 2i
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 135
l xis
(Note:
j
m gin ry
xis
m gin ry
xis
l xis
IN 2009
The value of
9.
(A) j
(C)
j
+j
(D)
pl n
l xis
(B)
z is.
l xis
7.
Mathematics
IN 2010
10. The contour C in the adjoining figure is
described by x + y
. The value of
m gin ry
xis
m gin ry
xis
(A) 2j
(B) 2j
(C) 4j
(D) 4j
IN 2011
11. The contour integral /
with C as
the counterclockwise unit circle in the zplane is equal to
(A) 0
(C) 2
(B) 2
(D)
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 136
Mathematics
2.
4.
[Ans. B]
By definition CR equation holds
[Ans. A]
f(z)=
Residue of f(z) at z = 0
lim
z z
lim
os z
z z 2i (residue at z = 0)
2i
2i
3.
[Ans. B]
+ 4i
+ 2i
2i
+ 2i
+ i + 4i
+4
Modulus =
[Ans. C]
Given u=xy
For analytic function
u v
x y
and
[Ans. A]
+i
2
2
i + 2i
6.
dw u v
i
dz x x
7.
y x
8.
+ 2i + i
i
r os
x
r sin
r sin
r os
[Ans. C]
u
v
x
y
v
2y
y
2y
+ x
v
2
y + x
v
u
v
y
x
2x
x
2x
+
x
2
x
x
z2
C
2
Where C is a constant,
z
v
m0 i + 1
2
Integrating, w i
(x2 y2 2ixy)
mi
or v
x y
y = r sin x
y r os
dw
y ix
dz
Where, z = x + iy
dw = izdz
[Ans. C]
u u
i
x y
dw
0 iz
dz
[Ans. C]
+i
+i
i
i
+i
2i
i
+ i
2
+i
rg (
) t n ( )
i
u
v
y
x
or
5.
+ 2i
y 2 x2
2
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 137
y
y
9.
10.
[Ans. B]
z
ln z
z
[Ans. B]
s
z
os z
The poles are at z = n + /2
=
/2 /2 + /2
None of these poles lie inside the unit
circle z =1
Hence, sum of residues at poles = 0
Singularities set = and
2i [sum o r si u s o t z t th
poles]
2 i
[Ans. C]
iv n u x
y
v
v
v
x+
y
x
y
v
u v
u
y
x x
y
u
u
v
x+
y
y
x
2y x + 2x y
rm ont ing y t rms only llow
v 2 xy +
3.
z z
ln i
ln
ln + ln i
ln
ln
z
os
z i
z
i
ln i ln z
i
(
2
ln
+ ln i
+ i sin
i sin /2
=
z=
pplying
z
z
2i
Now,
ln
i.e.
[Ans. C]
(A) is true since
[Ans. A]
u hys int gr l th or m is
f(a) =
CE
1.
2.
x
x + onst nt
Mathematics
i
.2i 0( )
1/
i
.2i 0( )
1/
4i
And 
2 = ( + )
4.
4i
[Ans. D]
z
z
z
z + z
z i z+i
The singularities are at z = i and i
5.
[Ans. C]
= ( + ) (z z )
= z + z
z + z
ii
Adding (i) and (ii) we get
 + 2 + 
2 = 2 z + 2 z
= 2  + 2 
os 2z
2z
z
*
th
th
+
*z
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 138
in
los
urv
w
n us
integral theorem and say that
7.
[Ans. B]
2
i
z
+i
Multiplying by conjugates
2
i
i
+i
i
2i + i
2 +
+ i
2
+
i
u hys
os 2z
[2i ( )] wh r z
2
2
z
[Notice that f(z) is analytic on all points
inside z
]
2
[2i
os 2
/2
)
Mathematics
2i
6.
[Ans. D]
f = u + iv
u = 3x2 3y2
For f to be analysis, we have CauchyRiemann conditions,
u
v
i
x
y
u
v
ii
y
x
From (i) we have
u
v
x
x
y
v
ECE
1.
Given ,
2.
x +
z +4
j 2
z
2j
2j 2j 2
[Ans. B]
iv n
log
1
y
u iv loge x iy log x2 y2 i tan1
2
x
Since, u is constant, therefore
x
v
+ x
2
i.e. v = 3x2 + f(x) iii
Now applying equation (iii) we get
u
v
y
x
[ x+
1
1
z 4 z 2jz 2j
2
x y
[Ans. D]
1
log x2 y2 c
2
x +y
Which is represented set
of concentric circles.
3.
[Ans. A]
s
y
x
x
By integrating,
f(x) = 6yx 3x2 + K
Substitute in equation (iii)
v= 3x2 + 6yx 3x2 + K
v
yx + K
2j sum o r si u
lims 1
S1
th
th
1
1
S 1 2
th
2j ( )
2
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 139
4.
[Ans. A]
Residue of z=2 is
Mathematics
d
2
z 2 f z
z2 dz
d 1
2
1
lim
lim
2
3
z2 dz
z
z 2 32
z 2
z+
lim
5.
(z
+
F(z
2j
7.
[Ans. C]
X(z) =
[Ans. D]
sin z
2i
Residue at Z =1 is lim
2 i
Residue z =2 is lim
2 i
(
2 i
ut m
m
8.
[Ans. A]
z+4
z + 4z +
2 im
2 i
m
2 i
iz
log
2
2 i + i
2
2 i
9.
log i + log(
iz log + i (
2n)
2
+log
iz i (
2n) + log
2
z (
2n) ilog(
2
[Ans. D]
f(z) = +
+ z
z
z
log y
i log i
i i
2
x log x
i log
10.
z+
z
F z
2 j r si u o
Residue at z = 0 ( 2 order )
[Ans. C]
z z
2j
z+
z+
where f (z) =1
11.
+
z
log y
z
+
ty
log y
(
2
infinite number of complex solutions
sin z
has infinite no. of complex
solutions
6.
z + 4z +
z+2 +
2 j will be outside the unit circle
o th t int gr tion v lu is z ro
[Ans. A]
iz
[Ans. C]
s z
lim
2j
z + 2j
4+ j
2j[ 4 + j
th
th
th
+ 2j
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 140
12.
EE
1.
[Ans. B]
Suppose that z
u x y + iv x y is
analytic then, u and v satisfy the Cauchy
Riemann equation
u
v
u
v
n
x
y
y
x
r u xy
os x
u
v
sin x
x
y
u
v
os x
y
x
v
sin x
z +
2 i
2.
+
o / is outside the unit circle is IV
quadrant
3.
[Ans. A]
z
4
z +4
z i 2
z +4
z
4
z
2i
For z
2i
Residue at z +2i
4 4
+2i
z + 2i
+4i
t z 2i li insi
tz
2i li outsi
z
4
o
2i sum o r si u
z +4
2i 2i
4
4.
[Ans. B]
Let + i
i
Squaring both sides we get
+2 i
i
Equating real and imaginary parts
[Ans. B]
Pole (z=i) lies inside the circle. zi/2=1.
Hence
z+i z
2 i i , wh r
z
z
2i
[Ans. D]
Let
+ i
Since Z is shown inside the unit circle in I
quadrant, a and B are both +ve and
+
ow
+ i
i
+
Since
Mathematics
wh n
i
2
wh n
+
o
+i
in
qu
r nt
wh n
 
in
) +(
2
2
i
i
+i ( )
2
2
i
i
i
2
2
2
i
i
i
+i
+ i( )
+
2
2
2 2
i
+( )
2
2
os ( ) + i sin ( )
4
4
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 141
or
os ( ) + i sin ( )
4
4
5.
[Ans. C]
z
zz
}
n s {z: z
z
All point of s will be mapped on the
point (1, 0)
6.
[Ans. B]
z
log z i log
z
r l n Nonnegative
7.
[Ans. C]
x x
lim z
IN
1.
2.
int gr tion
2i
z+
2
2
o z 
king
z z
z
z
uis o th ir l
y
4
[Ans. C]
z
z
Multiply both the side by z, we get
z
z z
z
z
z
z wh r is ngl o z
z
since
is a real quantity so in order to
satisfy above equation
has to be real
quantity = 1 and
, (where n =
+2 )
z
z
r
+
2 x
z
lim
z+
quir
2i r s (f(a)) where a is a
singularity in contour c
z

r
n
pol s o z
z
nly z
li s insi z
s(
y
x
x
z
Mathematics
/2
z
3.
[Ans. C]
X X
2 1
Cx y y
(Cx (
3
[Ans. A]

+ i  2
Radius of the circle is 2 and centre is at
+ i
3
Cx
y(n) n n
y(n)
)y(n))
3s
4
1
2
C3 =
F(s)
C3
.
CC3
(sC 1)(s 2) s 1 s 2
y(n) 3 3
y(n)
dz y(n)
2
+ i
By Formula,
y y
( (
Since, both
n n
contour,
) )
xy
z a 2j
therefore
Value of integral=2j + 2 2j
For distance to be min. The point P will be
on the line passes through origin and
centre of the circle.
Slope of line OP = Slope of line OC
4.
[Ans. B]
Expand by Laurent series
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 142
5.
[Ans. D]
10.
tx
log
log
2j
11.
2j
[sum o r si
2
o pol
4j
x +
x +
( + +
+
+ ) z
z 2z
z
The only pole of z is at z
, which lies
within z
z z 2i (residue)
Note: Residue of z at z
is coefficient
of z i.e. 1, here.
x j
x +
x
j
j
x +
lim {
x +
j
ption
z
j
j 2[ j
[Ans. C]
z
x+j
[Ans. B]
x+j
7.
log (
j
2
j j
2
log
6.
log (
z=
Pole z
j
Residue at z
log x
[Ans. D]
Mathematics
s tis y th
ov
on itions
[Ans. A]
u hys int gr l ormul is
8.
[Ans. D]
z x + iy
p  = 
= 
9.

=
=
[Ans. B]
Given x3 = j = e+j/2
x
os
+ j sin
+j
2
2
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 143
Mathematics
Laplace Transform
ME 2007
1.
If F (s) is the Laplace transform of
function f (t), then Laplace transform of
t
f (t) dt is
0
(A)
F (s)
(B)
F (s) f (0)
(D)
CE 2009
1.
Laplace transfrm of the function
f(x) = cosh(ax) is
(A)
(C)
ME 2009
2.
1
s s
2
(B)
(C) 1
(D)
ME 2010
3.
The Laplace transform of a function
. The function
is
is
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
ME 2012
4.
The inverse Laplace transform of the
function F(s)
is given by
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
(D)
ECE  2005
1.
In what range should Re(s) remain so
that the Laplace transform of the function
exists.
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
ECE 2006
2.
A solution for the differential equation
x(t)+2x(t)= (t) with initial condition
x( )=0 is
(C)
(A)
(D)
(B)
ECE 2008
ME 2013
5.
The function
equation
3.
value of eP is
conditions,
+ . The
(A) *
(B) [
. The
Laplace transform of
is given by
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
ME 2014
6.
Laplace transform of
The Laplace transform of
(C) [
(D) [
is
ECE  2010
4.
The trigonometric Fourier series for the
waveform f(t) shown below contains
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 144
Mathematics
ECE 2013
9.
A system is described by the differential
equation
Given
[
10.
If
(A) 1
(C)
(B) 2
(D)
ECE 2014
11. The unilateral Laplace transform of
. Which one of the following
is the unilateral Laplace transform of
?
ECE/EE/IN 2012
7.
The unilateral Laplace transform of f(t) is
. The unilateral Laplace transform
8.
of t f(t) is
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
EE 2005
12. For the equation
(t) + 3 (t) + 2x(t) = 5, the solution
x(t) approaches which of the following
values as t
?
(A) 0
(C) 5
(D) 10
(B)
EE 2014
is
13.
(C)
(D)
Let
be
the
th
th
Laplace
is
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 145
14.
Mathematics
[
Let g: [
be a function
[ ] where [x]
defined by g(x)
represents the integer part of x. (That is,
it is the largest integer which is less than
or equal to x). The value of the constant
term in the Fourier series expansion of
g(x) is_______
5.
[Ans. C]
[Ans. A]
From definition,
We know
2.
[Ans. C]
1
1
1
1
(s s) s(s 1) s (s 1)
2
3.
( )
)
(
[Ans. A]
[
6.
4.
s and constant
[Ans. B]
It is the standard result that
L (cosh at) =
ECE
1.
[Ans. A]
[
[Ans. D]
{
[Ans. D]
CE
1.
Matching coefficient of
in numerator we get,
}
2.
{
[Ans. A]
(t) + 2x (t) = (t)
Taking Laplace transform of both sides ,
we get
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 146
[Ans. D ]
eP=
[
Mathematics
[Ans. D]
]
[
0 1
and P=
2 3
s 1
Where
=
2 s+3
s 3 1
1
s 1s 2 2 s
s 3
s 1 s 2
=
1
s 2
1
s
s
s 1s 2
6.
[Ans. B]
eP
2
1
s 1 s 2
2 2
s 1 s 2
1
1
s 1 s 2
2
1
s 2 s 1
=[
]
=2
4.
[Ans. C]
Since f(t) is an even function, its
trigonometric Fourier series contains
only cosine terms
7.
[Ans. D]
+
t
)]
8.
[Ans. D]
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 147
11.
Mathematics
[Ans. D]
]
[
]
12.
9.
[Ans. B]
=5
By taking Laplace transform
[Ans. B]
Writing in terms of Laplace transform
X(s) =
(
)
13.
[Ans. B]
(
(
10.
[Ans. D]
14.
[Ans. 0.5]
For t =
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 148
Network Theory
4.
60 V
12 A
Z2(s)
Z1(s)
(j )
(A) R
Re
(B) R
 (j )
(C) R
(D) R
ECE  2010
5.
In the circuit shown, the power supplied
by the voltage source is
(j )
(j )
ECE  2007
2.
For the circuit shown in the figure, the
Thevenin voltage and resistance looking
into X Y are
1
1
10V
1
i
2i 1
(A) 4/3 V 2
(B) 4V 2/3
ECE  2009
3.
In the circuit shown, what value of RL
maximizes the power delivered to RL?
V
4
4
V
(A) 0 W
(B) 5 W
(C) 10 W
(D) 100 W
ECE  2011
6.
In the circuit shown below, the value of
R such that the power transferred to R
is maximum is
10
10
10
V
100V
(A) 2.4
(B) 83
5V
(C) 4
(D) 6
2V
(A) 5
(B) 10
th
th
(C) 15
(D) 20
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 149
7.
11.
VB =6 V, then VC
R
j4
j4
If VA
Network Theory
VD is
R
14 0 V
R
V
5V
(C) 2.8 0 A
(D) 3.2 0 A
25
ECE/IN  2012
9.
The average power delivered to an
impedance (4 j3) by a current
5cos (100t+100) A is
(A) 44.2 W
(C) 62.5 W
(B) 50 W
(D) 125 W
RC
RB
RA
(C) 1/k
(A) k
(B) k
13.
ECE/EE/IN  2012
10. The impedance looking into nodes 1 and
2 in the given circuit is
i
9k
Rc
Rb
(C) 10 + j0
(D) 16 + j0
99i
1k
(C) 3 V
(D) 6 V
Ra
j50
15
ECE/EE/IN  2013
12. Consider a delta connection of resistors
and its equivalent star connection as
shown. If all elements of the delta
connection are scaled by a factor k, k>0,
the elements of the corresponding star
equivalent will be scaled by a factor of
j30
16 0
(A) 5 V
(B) 2 V
(A) 1.4 0 A
(B) 2.0 0 A
8.
10V
(D) k
1
100
2
(A) 50
(B) 100
C1
(C) 5 k
(D) 10.1 k
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 150
ECE  2014
14. For maximum power transfer between
two cascaded sections of an electrical
network, the relationship between the
output impedance of the first section to
the input impedance
of the second
section is
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
18.
15.
19.
Network Theory
5V
10
i
i
V
4
R R
17.
j6
j3
16.
4 0
(A) 22 + j 2 V
(B) 2 + j 22 V
20.
(C) 22 j 2 V
(D) 2 j 22 V
1F
b
10 cos t
(volts)
0.5
21.
3
7.5
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 151
22.
10 m
2k
23.
2m
4k
3k
(C) 3L
(D) Very high
EE  2007
2.
A 3V dc supply with an internal resistance
of 2 supplies a passive nonlinear
resistance characterized by the relation
VNL = . The power dissipated in the
nonlinear resistance is
(A) 1.0 W
(C) 2.5 W
(B) 1.5 W
(D) 3.0 W
EE  2008
3.
In the circuit shown in the figure, the
value of the current i will be given by
1
1
Network Theory
5V
a
+ V
1
1
3
1
4V
1
1
4.
(C) 1.75 A
(D) 2.5 A
+
1A
Vab
5V
(A) 3 V
(B) 0 V
(C) 3 V
(D) 5 V
EE  2009
Statements for Linked Answer Questions 5
& 6:
2k
5V
3VAB
A
2k
1k
B
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 152
5.
the
the
Network Theory
EE  2010
10. If the 12 resistor draws a current of 1A
as shown in the figure, the value of
resistance R is
1
6.
7.
8.
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
Is = 5A
4V
11.
1k
6V
(A) 0mA
(B) 1mA
(C) 2mA
(D) 6mA
6V
(C) 8
(D) 18
(A) 25A
(B) 50A
(C) 100A
(D) 200A
EE  2011
12. In the circuit given below, the value of R
required for the transfer of maximum
power to the load having a resistance of
3 is
R
10 V
12
(A) 4
(B) 6
9.
(A) Zero
(B) 6
oad
(C) 3
(D) Inifnity
EC/EE/IN  2012
13. Assuming both the voltage sources are in
phase the value of R for which maximum
power is transferred from circuit A to
circuit B is
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 153
16.
j1
10V
Circuit
3V
Circuit
(A) 0.8
(B) 1.4
Network Theory
300V
(C) 2
(D) 2.8
EC/IN/EE  2013
14. The following arrangement consists of an
ideal transformer and an attenuator
which attenuates by a factor of 0.8. An ac
voltage V
100V is applied across
WX to get an open circuit voltage V
across YZ. Next , an ac voltage
V = 100V is applied across YZ to get an
open circuit voltage V
across WX.
Then,V /V
V
/V are
respectively.
W
17.
18.
ac source
oad
200V
1:1.25
19.
20.
2.5V
2.5
100V
80V
5
15V
5V
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 154
21.
3.
1V
I2
1V
Network Theory
5V
I5
I6
22.
IN  2006
1.
The root mean square value of a
voltage waveform consisting of a
superimposition of 2V dc and a 4V peak
to peak square wave is
(A) 2 V
(C) 8 V
(B) 6 V
(D) 12 V
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
4.
1V
5.
1A
(C) 1A
(D) 2A
(C) 2.5W
(D) 3.0W
10
10 m
i(t)
(A) 0W
(B) 1.0W
(A) 0A
(B) 0.5A
3
3
0
0
0
0
IN  2008
2.
The power supplied by the dc voltage
source in the circuit shown below is
3V
I4
I7
(A) 250 W
(B) 500 W
th
th
(C) 1000 W
(D) 2000 W
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 155
IN  2009
6.
The source network S is connected to the
load network L as shown by dashed lines.
RL
+
10 V
3V
Source Network S
Network Theory
IN  2014
9.
The circuit shown in the figure contains a
dependent current source between A and
terminals. The Thevenins equivalent
resistance in k between the terminals C
and D is ___________.
5k
5k
C
10 V
10 V
Load Network L
IN  2010
7.
A 100 , 1W resistor and a 800 , 2W
resistor are connected in series. The
maximum dc voltage that can be applied
continuously to the series circuit without
exceeding the power limit of any of the
resistors is
(A) 90V
(C) 45 V
(B) 50 V
(D) 40V
IN  2011
8.
The current I shown in the circuit given
below is equal to
10
10 V
(A) 3 A
(B) 3.67 A
10
10
10
(C) 6 A
(D) 9 A
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 156
Network Theory
4.
[Ans. A]
(s) =
(s)
(S)
R ( (s))
60V
V
x
2i
i
1
For V
Apply nodal analysis,
V
V
2i
2 V
0 V
i
2
1
V
V
2 2V
2i 0
2
2
2
V
V
4V
Similarly,
2
V
V
4V R
2
3.
[Ans. C]
For maximum power transfer, R
V
4
5.
12 A
[Ans. A]
3
1
1
1
(
3)
3
10V
2)
2
(
2)
1
Fig .1
V
100V
100V
100 (100 V )
8
4
Also V
50V
12.5 12.5 25
V
R
4 R
12 A
[Ans. D]
1
(12 I)A
0
R
20 V
12 A
(R
m( (s)) R
For (s)to be +ve & real,
Re ( (s))
R
Re( (s))
2.
[Ans. A]
6.
[Ans. C]
10
10
10
15
4
Fig. 2
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 157
R
R
R
Thevenins resistance seen across
the terminals of R into the rest of the
network. The relevant circuit is shown in
Fig.2, where the independent current
source is open circuited and the voltage
sources are short circuited.
R
10 (10 10)
R
R
15
7.
Network Theory
8.
[Ans. A]
The Norton equivalent current is
25
16 0
(40 30)
3
8
tan ( ) 8
36.86
4
(6.4 j4.8)
9.
[Ans. B]
The load consists of a resistance and a
capacitance of this, only R is passive and
consumes power
So P
=
R
[Ans. B]
To find the current I in the given circuit in
Fig. (1), the delta network with 6 each is
converted to a star as shown in Fig. (2)
=( )
14 0 V
j4
j4
10.
50
cos t
+.
[Ans. A]
i
6
Fig. 1
99i
1k
6
2
9k
100
6
6
2
99i )
Fig. 2
14 0
2
2
2
Fig. 3
5
14 0
14 0
100
99i
j4
j4
10k
100 [
50
V
100 (
50
200
)]
50
Fig. 4
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 158
11.
[Ans. A]
R
14.
[Ans. C]
For maximum power transfer
Load impedance = complex conjugate of
source impedance
15.
[Ans. A]
R
R
Network Theory
10V
1
R
V
5V
13.
[Ans. B]
Consider R
k R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
k
k R
k
3k
6V
R R
5F
5V
(Safe voltage)
V
C
5V
10V
k.
2F
(Safe voltage)
(Safe voltage)
2
4
1
KC at node
i
i
i
KCL at node B
i
i
i
KCL at node C
i
i
i
Put the value of i and i in equation
2 ( 1) i
i
1
Put i and i in equation
1 ( 4) i
i
3
Put the value of i and i in equation
3 i
2
i
5
2V
10F
[Ans. C]
C
i
i
i
16.
10
11
R
29.09
R
32
32
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 159
17.
[Ans. D]
Nortons theorem: Here for a complex
network, after isolating the element, we
short circuit the two ends and find the
current
.
is the current of the
independent current source with the
equivalent resistance in parallel
10 0 V
V1
4 0
20.
10
5V
3j
1F
Voltage
source
shorted
5
0.25 mp
20
For current
5
In
0.5
doiman
1
j
j
(10.5j )
1
5
20
0.5j
1 0.5j
0.5j (1 0.5j ) j
1 0.25
0.5j (1 0.5j ) j(1 0.25 )
(1 0.25 )
Equating the imaginary part to zero, we
get
0.5
1 0.25
0
0.25
1
2rad/sec
10
0.25 mp
(0.25 0.25)
0.50 mp
19.
6j
V2
4
18.
Network Theory
[Ans. D]
Using super node concept, we can treat
nodes 1 and 2 to gather as a super node
as shown in the figure by the dotted lines
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 160
21.
R
R
[Ans. *] Range 9 to 11
R
24.
Network Theory
2.618
[Ans. C ]
7.5
22.
7.5 3 7.5
7.5
7.5 2 5 3
10
7.5
EE
1.
20V
[Ans. A]
The inductance of all three coils are
and they are connected to same line
carrying the same current and set up the
flux in the same direction
8V
2 2
by KV 20
28
10k
23.
10k
3k
8 0
2.8 m
All these fluxes linked with each other
and they will balance each other. So net
flux will reduce drastically. Thus net L
will be very low
2.
[Ans. A]
1.618R
(1
2
3V
5)R
2
+
I
3 2
1
Power delivered by source = 31=3W.
2.618R
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 161
6.
Network Theory
[Ans. D]
2k
3V
1k
[Ans. B]
5 1
V
2
Also, 4 V
Also, V
V
2.5V
4i
V
2
4i . (1)
1.25 V
4i (From (1))
3V
3V
2k
2k
2k
1k
[Ans. B]
Thevenins resistance is calculated using
the circuit shown in fig. (1) and (2),
where independent voltage source is
short circuited
1k
3V
5
V
2
1k
I
A
2k
1k
B
Fig. 1
Fig. 1
3 V
10 )
I
V
10
1k
1k
5.
[Ans. A]
V
2i
V)
4(V
4V
4(2.5 1.25)
i 1.25
4.
2k
5V
3.
Fig. 2
7.
[Ans. D]
For a lamp, P KV
For 200 220V lamp, K 200
220
Consider n lamps connected in series,
Total power consumed n K 110
100
th
th
110
th
100
n 2
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 162
8.
[Ans. B]
The relevant circuit is shown in fig.
As the voltage across 2 4V
4
2
2
In order to double the current through 2
resistance, V is to be doubled (Put
V
8V) ]
Note that the 5 A source has no effect on
the answer. However it gives 3A current
through the voltage source as shown in
fig.
4V
R
6R
6 R
6
3
R
13.
Network Theory
[Ans. A]
2
j1
10V
Circuit
[Ans. A]
As the ABCD bridge is balanced,
[Ans. B]
Current through R =1A
By KVL, 1.R +6=12
R=6
[Ans. B]
V i 100 and V i .1(by ohms law)
2i 100 i 50
[Ans. B]
To calculated
circuited
R
5V
10
2.5
4
So in our circuit
10V
12.
Circuit
2
10V
11.
3V
5V
Fig.
10.
9.
2.5
5V
3V
pply KV in loop
5 2.5R 3 0
2
[R
0.8]
2.5
[Ans. B]
W
1:1.25
100 V
125 V
Y
V
R
X
V
6R
R
6R
6 R
According to maximum power transfer
theorem
100
V
0.8
when V
th
th
turns ratio
125
V
100V
100V
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 163
18.
200
R
(2) (1)
Power dissipated
4 10R
1000
996
R
10
400
R
400 99.6
17.33
100V
0.8
Network Theory
19.
10
[Ans. C]
C
120
120
15.
16.
[Ans. 330]
Power absorbed by battery 100V = 100
10 1000
Power supplied by battery
80V 80 8 640
Current through 15V battery
10 8
2
Power supplied by battery
15V 15 2 30
Total power absorbed
1000 640 30
330 att
120
lags voltage A by 90
V
90
3 10
Angle 90 with respect to A
Hence
V
20.
3 10 ( 90
103
75
[Ans. 2]
2.5V
[Ans. 10]
300
(25
600
(50
10
15)
2.5
2
)
)
i
5
5
5V
17.
[Ans. 35]
Total flux linkage =
total
Terminal x y shorted
Applying superposition
i due to 5V
(5)
5
(5
) 7.5
380m
240m
4
140m
35
5
20
7.5
i due to 2.5V
th
th
5
10
th
0.5
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 164
2.5
1
0.5
(2.5 2.5) 2
Total i 0.5 0.5 1 (NOTE: Option
not matching with IIT website)
21.
2.
Network Theory
[Ans. D]
The given circuit in Fig. 1 is simplified as
shown in Fig. 2 and Fig.3
[Ans. 3]
V1=3
V
1V
V1
Fig.1
1
1V
3.
Power delivered by current source
Applying nodal at V
(
)
( )
[Ans. D]
The circuit is shown in Fig. marking the
nodes: P,Q,R and S
Apply KCL at nodes,
3
3
v
2
Power delivered
2v
22.
I1
I2
I5
I3
I6
I4
I7
At node, P
. (1)
At nodeQ ,
. . (2)
At nodeR ,
. (3)
At nodeS ,
. (4)
From (3) and (4)
0
4.
[Ans. A]
I
P
I1
[Ans. C]
For d.c voltage of 2 V, M.S.V = 4
For square wave voltage with peak to
peak value of 4 V or amplitude = 2V,
M.S.V = 4 + 4 = 8
R. . S. V
5V
40
R
(240)
R
40
R R (1
T)
R is resistance of room temperature
(240)
120(1 4.5 10
T)
40
11 4.5 10
T
11 1000
T T
4.5
11 1000
T 26
2470.44
4.5
IN
1.
Fig.3
Fig.2
2
O
( )
V1
1V
1A
8 V
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 165
I+1= I1,
or I+1=1 ,
0
5.
I
+
Source Network S
10
3V +
Load Network L
7
2 R
Power supplied by the 10V source,
10 m
P
Power dissipated in 2 resistance,
98
P
2
(2 R )
Power transferred to the network,
Phasor of i(t)
R j
102
10 j10
10 10
10 j 10
The Thevenin equivalent circuit is shown
in Fig. 2
P (R )
P would be maximum, if
70
2
98
0
(2 R )
(2 R )
196
196 98
70 2 R
2 R
70
35
98
28
R
2
0.8
35
35
V
7.
[Ans. C]
Resistor 1 : 100 1
Resistor 2 : 800 , 2 W
Maximum current that
withstand
Fig. 2
10 j 10
V
102
102(10 j 10)
200 e
For maximum power transfer to load,
10 j 10 R
10
10 e
20
i (t) 10 sin(
45 )
10
(rms)
10
2
Power transferred to load,
100
(rms) R
P
10 500
2
6.
+
10 V
10
i(t)
RL
[Ans. B]
The circuit is shown in Fig. 1
i(t)
Network Theory
1
100
resistor can
1
10
Similarly,
2
800
1
20
800
[Ans. C]
The circuit is shown in Fig.
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 166
8.
(100 800)
1
(900) 45Volts
20
9.
[Ans. 20]
5k
[Ans. A]
The given circuit is Fig. 1
Convert the (10 V, 10 ) voltage source
across A, B to the left into a current
source, (1 A, 10 ). The resultant circuit is
shown in Fig. 2
5k
10 V
10 V
For R calculation
Independent
voltage source should be short circuited
So
10
10 V
10
10
10
5k
Fig. 1
Network Theory
10
10
5K
10
10 V
1V( ssume)
so V
1
10
R
So *R
Fig. 2
10
10
Fig. 3
10
Fig. 4
5
15
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 167
Network Theory
ECE  2006
1.
In the figure shown, assume that all the
capacitors are initially uncharged.
If Vi(t) =10u(t) Volts, then V0(t) is given
by
Q2 P2
+
S2
(t)
F
1K
+
+
Vi(t)
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
4 F
4K
1F
Vo(t)
8e
Volts
8(
e
) Volts
8 u(t) Volts
8 Volts
ECE  2007
2.
In the circuit shown, Vc is 0 volts at t = 0
sec. For t>0, the capacitor current iC (t),
where t is in seconds, is given by
20k
1H
20k
10V
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
0.50 exp (
0.25 exp (
0.50 exp (
0.25 exp (
+
4 F

VC
25t)mA
25t)mA
12.5 t)mA
6.25 t)mA
ECE  2008
3.
The circuit shown in the figure is used to
charge the capacitor C alternately from
two current sources as indicated. The
switches S1 and S2 are mechanically
coupled and connected as follows
For 2nT t< (2n+ )T,
(n = 0, , 2) S to P and S2 to P2
For (2n+ )T t< (2n+2)T,
(n = 0, , 2) S to Q and S2 to Q2
(t)
4.
+
1F
5.
(e
VC(t)
(t) is
te
e
e
cos (
t)
t)
sin (
(e
(B) e
(C)
(D)
th
th
*cos (
)
)
sin (
cos (
th
sin (
)+
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 168
6.
Network Theory
0
1.5A
(0 ) is given by
15mH
i(t)
(A) 0
(C)
(B)
(D)
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
Rs
ECE  2009
7.
The time domain behavior of an RL circuit
is represented by
L + Ri =
t=0
0
IS
S
i(t)
( + e
i(t) = 0
i(t) =
i(t) = 0
i(t) = 0
ECE  2011
10. In the circuit shown below, the initial
charge on the capacitor is 2.5 mC, with
the voltage polarity as indicated. The
switch is closed at time t = 0. The current
i(t) at a time t after the switch is closed is
i(t)
sint) u(t)
0 2 e
0 2 e
0 e
e
, the
00
0 F
(A) i(t)
(B) i(t)
8.
(C) i(t)
(1+B)
(D) i(t)
(1+B)
b
i(t)
100 V
0.2 F
0.2e
20e
0.2e
20e
i(t) =
exp( 2
0 t)
i(t) = exp( 2
0 t)
i(t) = 0 exp( 2
0 t)
i(t) =
exp( 2
0 t)
ECE/EE/IN  2012
11. In the following figure, C1 and C2 are ideal
capacitors.
has been charged to 12 V
before the ideal switch S is closed at t = 0.
The current i(t) for all t is.
S
t=0
0.3 F
0.5 F
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
u(t)m
u(t)m
u(t)m
u(t)m
i(t)
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
ECE  2010
9.
In the circuit shown, the switch S is open
for a long time and is closed at t = 0. The
current i(t) for t 0 is
th
Zero
a step function
an exponentially decaying function
an impulse function
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 169
Network Theory
ECE  2013
Common Data for Questions 12 and 13:
Consider the following figure
R
k
+
1
10V
13.
), =
), =
( ) (t) = (
), =
msec
( ) (t) = (
2
), =
msec
( ) (t) =
17.
ECE  2014
14. In the figure shown, the ideal switch has
been open for a long time. If it is closed at
t = 0, then the magnitude of the current
(in m ) through the 4 k resistor at
t = 0 is _______.
k
4k
( ) (t) =
2A
12.
2k
Is
Vs
msec
msec
()
0
15.
16.
+
0 F
mH
( )
i(t)
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 170
Network Theory
( )
R
R
L1
i(t)
+
I
(A) 1,4
(B) 5,1
(C) 5,2
(D) 5,4
( )
2.
i(t)
18.
0u(t)
2H
2i
+
(t)
EE  2007
3.
In the circuit shown in figure switch
is initially CLOSED and Sw is OPEN. The
inductor L carries a current of 10 A and
the capacitor is charged to 10 V with
polarities as indicated. Sw is initially
caps at t = 0 and Sw is OPENED at t = 0.
The current through C and the voltage
across L at t = 0 + is
SW2
R2 0
EE  2006
1.
In the circuit shown in the figure, the
current source I = 1A, voltage source
V = 5V, R = R = R = 1,
= =
= 1H, = = 1F.
The currents (in A) through R3 and the
voltage source V respectively will be
R1= 0
SW1
L 10A
(A) 55 A, 4.5 V
(B) 5.5 A, 45 V
4.
+
_10V
(C) 45 A, 5.5 V
(D) 4.5 A, 55 V
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 171
Network Theory
1F
+
1F
0 H
1F
3A
02
s
4 s
(A)
(B)
(A)
= 1.4 Vx 3.75I1 + V
(B)
= +1.4 Vx 3.75I1
(C)
= 1.4 Vx + 3.75I1 + V
(D)
= 1.4 Vx + 3.75I1
EE  2008
Statement for Linked Answer Questions 5
and 6
The current i(t) sketched in the figure
flows through an initially uncharged
0.3 nF capacitor.
(C) 4 s
(D) 9s
EE  2009
8.
In the figure shown, all elements used are
ideal. For time t<0, S remained closed
and S open. At t = 0, S is opened and S
is closed. If the voltage Vc2 across the
capacitor
at t = 0 is zero, the
voltage
across
the
capacitor
combination at t=0+ will be
S1
S2
3V
C1
1F
C2
2F
6
i(t) mA5
4
3
2
1
(A) 1V
(B) 2 V
0 1
9
5.
5 6
t ( s)
7 8
(C) 1.5 V
(D) 3 V
EE  2010
Linked Answer Questions 9 and 10
The LC circuit shown in the figure has an
inductance L = 1mH and a capacitance
C = 10F.
L
i
6.
7.
t=0
9.
100 V
100+V
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 172
10.
EE/IN  2012
Statement for Linked answer question 14
and 15:
In the circuit shown, the three voltmeter
reading = 220V, = 122 V, =136 V
R
R
L
I
C
t=0
100V
(A)
(B)
11.
t =0
1F
(A) 0A
(B) 1A
14.
15.
20
(C)
2 s
(D) 26 s
5V
oad
100V
5A
2 s
6 s
Network Theory
(C) 1.25A
(D) 5A
EE  2014
16. The switch SW shown in the circuit is
kept at position for a long duration t
t = 0 the switch is moved to position 2
Assuming
, the voltage (t)
across the capacitor is
R
EE  2011
Common Data For Q.No 12 & Q.No 13
An RLC circuit with relevant data is given
below
=
= 2
= 2
12.
13.
4
4
17.
(D) +j2A
th
(A)
(t) =
(B)
(t) =
)+
(C)
(t) =
(D)
(t) =
)(
)(
)+
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 173
20 sin 0t
(B) P = 0 and Q = 3/
(t)
Network Theory
(C) P = 5 and Q = 6/
(D) P = 5 and Q = 3
0 sin t
IN  2006
1.
In the circuit shown in the following
figure, the input voltage vi(t) is constant
at 2V for time t
s and then it changes
to 1 V. The output voltage, v0(t), 2 s after
the change will be
IN  2008
Statement for Linked Answer Question 3
and 4:
In the circuit shown below the steadystate is reached with the switch K open
subsequently the switch is closed at time
t=0.
t=0
Vi(t)
+
+
3.
1
t
1F
Vi(t)
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
4.
At time t =0 , is
(A)
(B)
Vo(t)
5A / s
( 0 )
is
(C) 0A / s
(D) 5A / s
IN  2010
5.
In the dc circuit shown in the adjoining
figure, the node voltage V2 at steady state
is
exp ( 2) V
1 + exp ( 2) V
exp ( 2) V
1 exp ( 2) V
2k
IN  2007
2.
In the circuit shown in the figure, the
input signal is ( ) = + cos
+
(t)
20 F
(A) 0V
(B) 1V
(t)
Fig.
0 F
(C) 2V
(D) 3V
IN  2011
6.
In the circuit shown below, the switch,
initially at position 1 for a long time, is
changed to position 2 at t = 0.
(A) P = 0 and Q = 6/
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 174
1H
4A
10.
2 t=0
10V
Network Theory
2k
i (t)
t =0
4 F
2k
IN  2012
7.
In the circuit shown below, the current
through the inductor is
11.
j
0
0
~+
+ ~
0
j
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D) 0 A
IN  2014
8.
The circuit shown in figure was at steady
state for t < 0 with the switch at position
The switch is thrown to position at
time = 0, . The voltage V (volts) across
the 0 resistor at time
t = 0 is _________________
2
t=0
analog
interface
P
Sense harge
control
If T = kT
12.
+
0
In
the
microprocessor
controlled
measurement scheme shown in the
figure, R is the unknown resistance to be
measured, while R and
known.
is charged from voltage
to
(by
a constant DC voltage source ), once
through R in T
seconds and then
discharged to . It is again charged from
voltage to
through R in T seconds.
Sense
ischarge
then
(A) R = kR
(B) R = kR
ln ( )
(C) R = kR
(D) R = R
9.
th
60
0 Hz
0 Hz
0 Hz
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 175
lnk
Network Theory
Vc(t)
[Ans. D]
The transform circuit is shown below
(s)
+
(s)
( )
( )
(S) =
( )
( )
Where, R = 4
(S) =
In mathematical form,
(t) = tu(t) 2(t T)u(t 2T) +
2(t 2T)u(t 2T)
( )
( )
v (S) =
2.
4.
( )
( )
(t) = (t)
(S) =
(S + 2) + ( )
(t) =
=(
(S) =
5.
Sin (
[Ans. B]
(S) = R (S) =
(t) = e
6.
( S
(S)
=S
=0 m
( )=0
Time constant of the circuit = R
= 4 F 20 k 20
= 40 ms
Using direct formula
(t) = ( )
( )
(0)]e
(t) = 0 (0 0 )e
(t) = 0 e
m
3.
nT)
[Ans. D]
[Ans. A]
At t = 0 Capacitor is short circuit and at t
=
apacitor is open circuit
So (0 ) =
nT)u(t
) (t
= tu(t) + 2 (
Where, R =
,
=4 F
R
=R
= 0
4
0 sec
=4
0 sec
For t 0u(t) = s = 0 (for dc signal)
( )
1
(s)
(s)
2
T
t)
(s))
(S) =
S
(S + S + )
)
( )
os (
t)
[Ans. B]
In the circuit shown,
R
=0
=
R
(R + R )
Sin (
= (R + R )
T = R
[Ans. C]
The waveform of voltage Vc(t) is shown
below.
= (R + R )
R
(R + R )
= =
=
T
(R + R )
di

dt
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 176
t)
7.
Network Theory
0
[Ans. A]
Take L.T of given differential equation
with i(0)=
sin(t) u(t)
e
+ Ri =
( + e
(0 ) =
t t = , the status of the circuit is shown
in Fig. 3
sin t) u(t)
,
(s + ) +
i(0 )
s +
sin(t) u(t)
()
i (0 )
] + R (s) =
r ( s + R) (s) = +
0.5 A
+
(s + ) +
+
+
(
0.5 A
0.5 A
1.5 A
i ( )
S
0
i( )
0
(s) = [
]
(
i( ) = 0
The given circuit is a first order circuit
8.
s (s)] =
R= 0+( 0
=
mH =
[Ans. B]
hen S is in position a, (0 ) = 00
fter S is moved to b, (for t 0)
= 00
=0 R=
0
02
=
=0 6 F
(t) = 00 e
(t)
i(t) =
= 20e
9.
0.75 A
i(t) =
=0
10.
1.5 A
0
0
15mH
i (0 ) = 0
, i(0 ) = 0
S is closed for 0 t <
At t = 0 , i (0 ) = i (0 ) = 0
The status of the circuit is shown in Fig. 2
)(
+(
)(
2
0 2 e
[Ans. A]
Q(0 ) =
e ),t
e
,t
11.
th
)
0
2 m
(
For t 0, =
0
= 00
= R
= 0 m sec
(t) = ( 00
)u(t)
0e
d
i (t) =
dt
= 0
0
0 2000 e
= e
u(t)
i (0 )
i(0 )
+ (F
(0 ) =
0.75 A
S
= 0 sec, = 0 sec
i(t) =
[Ans. A]
S is open for
< 0
At t = 0 the status of the circuit is shown
in Fig. 1
0.75 A
General formula:
= 00e
u(t)m
0) = 0 +
0 H
u(t)
[Ans. D]
When the switch in closed at t = 0
Capacitor C1 will discharge and C2 will get
charge since both C1 and C2 are ideal and
there is noresistance in the circuit
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 177
15.
Network Theory
12.
[Ans. D]
R=
= H
= amp
= F
the value at
resonance
0
+
10V
+
v
= 0
=0
0+2=
as
=0
+ +4
=
2
= 0 4 rad/sec
(omitting the negative value)
= 0
4k
16.
0
urrent after long time =
= m
0k
At t = 0 the voltage across the capacitor
is 10
Where,
=
= 0
=
Now at t= 0
i
i(t)
i
F
2k
= 2000i(t)
dv
di
i =c
= 0 002
dt
dt
di
i
= [0 002 + i(t)] amp
dt
di
= 2 + 000i(t)
dt
+ =
di
2 + 000i(t) + 2000i(t) =
dt
s
di
2 + 000i(t) + 2000i(t) =
dt
s
000
2 [s (s) +
(s)] =
2
s
4k
The current is m =
4
[Ans. A]
mH
0 F
+(
) =
13A
[Ans. C]
x )
2=
R + (x
2= +(
current through
14.
0
2 =
2A
20
2 m
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 178
000
]=
2
s
2 (s) [s +
(s) =
2s(s +
= [
2 s
=
600 s
= [
i(t) =
17.
00
s+
s+
e
+i =0
0+
00)
s+
Network Theory
00
= 0
00
00
i =
(t) = i =
] amp
EE
1.
]m
= *
+ where is in m sec
= [
], =
[Ans. D]
At steady state, inductor acts as short
circuit & capacitor acts open circuit
2
+i =0
msec
_+ 5V
[Ans. A]
= Ri(t) + i(u)du
=R +
=
S
=
aplace transform ]
2.
where
depends on
S k
=
=
s(RS + ) R (s +
i(t) =
[Ans. B]
The relevant circuit is shown in fig.
+
(t)
k
e
R
Fig.
()
It is a standard LC circuit.
With v (t) = cos( t)
or
sin( t + 0 )
3.
18.
[Ans. D]
Equivalent circuit at t = 0 is,
i
+
0u(t)
2H
2i
I
0
10A
10V
(t)
By nodal analysis,
0+
Since we have to evaluate (t) in steady
state the inductor will behave as a short
circuit and hence
= i
th
th
=0
=
th
2
(
0 = 00
)
= 4
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 179
4.
[Ans. A]
8.
V3( +
[Ans. A]
The status of the circuit at t = 0
shown in fig. 1.
= 0 (1)
= 0.2
+02
Network Theory
= 0 (2)
+
3V
3V
Fig. 1
The status of the circuit at t = 0
shown in Fig. 2.
S
S
A
2
A1
0 )
(4
0
0
= [4 +
6
2
0 ) + (4 + 2)
2
(
2)
=
=
9.
(0 )
00
=
s
s
1/s
C
I(s
)
(s) =
cos
06
7.
sL
(s +
00
(
s +
[Ans. C]
= F;R
= 6
T=R
Fig. 2
[Ans. D]
Initial current through the inductor is
zero and capacitor voltage is charged
upto to voltage
(0 ) = 00
As current through inductor and voltage
across cannot change abrupty.
So, after closing the switch
i (0 ) = i (0 ) = 0
And (0 ) = (0 ) = 00
The circuit is s domain
[Ans. D]
apacitor charged upto
s, so total
charge stored in capacitor = Q = 13nC
Voltage across the capacitor before
connecting to indictor
Q
0
= =
=4
0
0
Voltage across the capacitor at time t
(t)at t =
s
(t)
=
cos t]
= 2.357 rad =
(t)
=4
is
+
V
+
3V
3V
A2
2 s
t=
2F
1F
B
[Ans. C]
i(t)
mA
4
6.
is
= 00 (
= 4sec
s + (
th
th
th
)
)
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 180
= 2
13.
= 00 sin
=
00
sin (
t)
14.
[Ans. A]
i
iT
Network Theory
VC(t)
[Ans. D]
Using KCL,
+
+
=
= 2
=0
2
=2 0
=+ 2
[Ans. A]
Pharor diagram
= 220
= 122 V
= 136V
= +
20
100V
5A
[Ans. B]
(0 ) = 4
i (0 ) =
12.
(0 ) = 4
)
P
16.
= A
[Ans. B]
Power supplied by the source =
cos
Where = angle between
= 4 inductor and capacitor do not
consume power.
Therefore, power dissipated in R = Power
supplied by the source
P =
cos
=
cos
[Ans. B]
:R =
= cos = 136 x 0.45 [From Q 4]
= 61.2V
=
= 749W = 750W
[Ans. D]
At t = 0
Voltage across capacitor =
tt 0
+i R+i R+ =0
d
+ 2c
R+ =0
dt
Taking Laplace
s
s
+ (2Rc) s
+ 2Rcs
(0)] +
2R
( + 2Rcs) = 2R
th
=0
s
th
=0
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 181
2R
+ 2Rcs S( + 2Rcs)
2R
2Rc
(s) =
+
+ 2Rcs
+ 2Rcs
s
1F
(s) =
(t)
+
(e) =
* (t) =
17.
)(
Network Theory
Vi(t)
Vo(t)
)+
=
=
So (0 ) = 2
Laplace Equivalent circuit after the change
2/s
1/sc
[Ans. A]
Applying superposition theorem
Resolving 0 sin t source
(t) =
sin ( 0t + tan
( )
0)
( )
1/s
I(s)
(s) =
R+
2 s
(s) =
Rsc +
c
(s) =
= ce
+s
Now voltage across Resister at t = 2s
(t) = (t) R
ce R
( ) =
= Rc e
e
]
( ) =
+ j
( )
= 0 sin( t)
= 0 sin( t)
0
+2
(t) =
+ j
sin t
tan ( )]
2.
20
00 +
( 0 tan
+
IN
1.
[Ans. A]
The circuit is shown in Fig.
sin( 0t
0
+2
tan
)
))
+
sin( t
+
(t)
(t)
Fig.
[Ans. A]
(t) = + cos( t)
Due to 5V d.c alone , C is open and no
current flows through R,
= 0 and
=0
ue to cos ( t) alone, with
Vi(t)
2
1
0
THE GATE ACADEMY tPVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 182
th
th
th
H( ) =
For
R+
j R
+j R
R=2
R
H( ) =
R
+
H( ) = 0
tan (2)
v (t) =
cos
t+ 0
I1(0 )
2k
V2
R2
20 F
Fig. 1
2k
C1
V1
V2
R1
I2
1k
9V
I1
5V
0 F
V1
1k
9V
Fig. 2(at t = 0 )
R1
10 V
(0 )
= (0 ) =
[Ans. B]
The given circuit is shown in Fig. 1
t steady state i e , as t , capacitor
behaves as open circuit. The circuit at
steady state is shown in Fig.2
I2(0 )
I1(0 )
5.
10 V
I=0
10 V
[Ans. B]
From Fig. 3: Write the Outer loop
equation:
d (t)
(t)
]+
+ 0=
dt
At t = 0
d
(0 ) =
(0 ) =
+
dt
=
/sec
0
= v (0 )
4.
1H
1F
i (0 ) = 0
Fig. 4
I1
2
5V
I2
I=0
I(0 ) I2(0 ) = 0
5V
[Ans. A]
For t < 0, the circuit is shown in Fig. 1
1
tan(2)]
3.
Network Theory
C2
1H
Fig. 2
1
F
Fig. 3(t >0)
10 V
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 183
7.
[Ans. C]
(
0
0
10 V
=0
=
8.
=
10
0
+
0
[Ans. D]
For t < 0, the status of the circuit is
shown in Fig. 1 inductor behaves as short
circuit after a long time.
i(0 ) =
)
j
Network Theory
[Ans.
tt=0
1H
Fig. 1
6
=
2
At t= 0
T =
, = 20
+
0
10
10
(0 )
10
4A
(inductor
in steady
state)
+
0
1H
0 ]
Fig. 2
i(t) =
+ (F
for t 0
= + (2
=2 e
)(
)(
( )
9.
[Ans. 32]
Load impedance =
= (4
Ideal current source
i(t) = 4 sin ( t + 20 )
Average real power = i
=( )
Power =
th
th
6
2
j2)
4= 2
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 184
10.
11.
[Ans. C]
Time constant of RC Circuit is = R
In case I
Time constant T = R
In case II
Time constant (T ) = R
Given T = k T
So R
=k R
R =k R ]
12.
2k
2k
( ) = 2k
4k
Network Theory
( )
=2
We know that
(t) =
(0 ) v ( )]e
= 0 2 ]e
+2
( )
60
= (2k
2k
= k 4 =
0
4
0
=4
0 s
000
=
=2 0
4
(t) = 2 e
+2
(t) = 2
2 e
we know that
dv (t)
i (t) =
dt
d
i (t) = c
2
2 e
]
dt
= 2 c( 2 0)e
=4 F
i (t) = +2
4
0
2 0e
i (t)
= 2
0 e
(t)
]
i
=
m
0 Hz
0 Hz
H
0
0 Hz
f =
=4
f =
+(
R=4 ,
f= 0H
+
( )
=
=
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 185
Network Theory
C
+
ECE  2008
4.
The Thevenin equivalent impedance ZTh
between the nodes P and Q in the
following circuit is
1
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
a lowpass filter
a highpass filter
a bandpass filter
a bandreject filter
(A) 1
(C) 2 + s +
(B) 1 + s+
2.
3.
(D)
ECE  2009
5.
An AC source of RMS voltage 20V with
internal impedance Zs (1 2j) feeds a
load of impedance ZL (7 4j) in the
figure below. The reactive power
consumed by the load is
(1
2j)
53
j3
(A) 0
(B) 53
(7
(C) 12.53
(D) 173
(A) 8VAR
(B) 16 VAR
j3
4j)
(C) 28 VAR
(D) 32 VAR
ECE  2010
6.
The current I in the circuit shown is
2 m
1
1
(C) 0 A
(D) 20 A
(A) j1 A
(B) j1 A
th
th
rad s
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 186
7.
ECE/EE  2013
8.
A source v (t)
cos 1
t has an
internal impedance of (4 + j3) . If a
purely resistive load connected to this
source has to extract the maximum power
out of the source , its value in should be
(A) 3
(C) 5
(B) 4
(D) 7
ECE/EE/IN  2013
9.
In the circuit shown below, if the source
voltage Vs= 10053.130 V then the
Thevenins equivalent voltage in volts as
seen by the load resistance RL is
3
j4
(A) 100900
(B) 80000
10.
j6
j4
Network Theory
ECE  2014
11. A 230 V rms source supplies power to
two loads connected in parallel. The first
load draws 10 kW at 0.8 leading power
factor and the second one draws 10 kVA
at 0.8 lagging power factor. The complex
power delivered by the source is
(A) (18 j 1.5) k
(B) (18 j 1.5) k
(C) (2
j 1.5) k
(D) (2
j 1.5) k
12.
t
T 2
13.
T 2
5
i(t)
RL= 10
(C) 800900
(D) 100600
14.
15.
th
(116)
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 187
Network Theory
( )). If the
y(t) = A( )sin( t
amplitude  ( ) 0.25, then the
frequency is
y(t)
sin t
~
( )
( )
( )
3
2
( )
(A)
EE  2006
1.
In the figure the current source is 1 0 A,
R = 1, the impedances are Zc =
j ,
and ZL = 2j. The Thevenin equivalent
looking into the circuit across XY is
(B)
(C)
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
20 V, (1 + 2j)
2 450 V, (1 2j)
2 450 V, (1 + j)
2450 V, (1 + j)
(D)
2.
3.
EE  2007
4.
In the figure transformer T1 has two
secondaries, all three windings having the
same number of turns and with polarities
as indicated. One secondary is shorted by
a 1 resistor , and the other by a 15m
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 188
T1
R
B
+
+
Vp
Im
(A) 25 V, 0.0A
(B) Very large voltage, very large
current
(C) 5.0 V, 0.5 A
(D) 5.0 V, 0.5 A
5.
(A)
25V
IR
SW
Network Theory
Re
(B)
Im
Re
(C)
C
XY
Im
O
2V
(A) 0
(C)
2V
0
VYX
VYX
Locus of VYX
Re
Locus of VYX
(D)
Im
(B)
Locus of VYX
(D)
Locus of VYX
VYX
0
VYX
2V
2V
Re
6.
EE  2008
7.
The Thevenin's equivalent of a circuit
operating at = 5rad/s, has
= 3.71 15.90 V and
ZO =2.38 j 0.667. At this frequency,
the minimal realization of the Thevenin's
impedance will have a
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 189
Network Theory
EE  2011
10. The r.m.s value of the current i(t) in the
circuit shown below is
1
1
1
8.
i(t)
0.1H
~
(1. sin t)
(C) 1
(D) 2
(A)
(B)
1
(C) 3 rad /s
(D) 4 rad /s
EE  2010
9.
If the electrical circuit of figure (b) is an
equivalent of the coupled tank system of
figure (a), then
v
1 2 sin(1
t)
The input drawn by the converter is
i
11.
)
t
22 sin(5
t
The input power of the converter is
(A) 0.31
(C) 0.5
(B) 0.44
(D) 0.71
)
6)
and C, D
EE  2012
13. A twophase load draws the following
phase currents:
),
i (t)
sin( t
i (t)
cos( t
).
These currents are balanced if 1 is equal
to
)
(A)
(C) ( 2
)
(B)
(D) ( 2
and B, D
14.
D
C
52 sin(3
12.
(1 2 sin (1
and C, D
and B, D
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 190
EE  2014
15. A combination of 1 F capacitor with an
initial voltage ( )
2 in series with
a 100 resistor is connected to a 20 mA
ideal dc current source by operating both
switches at t = 0s as shown. Which of the
following graphs shown in the options
approximates the voltage
across the
current source over the next few seconds?
Network Theory
16.
17.
t
t
( )
t
2
IN  2006
1.
Consider the AC bridge shown below. If
( )
RC = 1 and
V
C
<0.01, then ratio 0 is
C
Vs
approximately equal to
( )
( )
(C)
(A) 1
(D)
(B)
t
2
IN  2007
2.
In the circuit shown in the following
figure, the current through the 1
resistor is
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 191
(B)
j
j
L=1H
C = 0.25F
V = 1V
3.
I = (5cos2t)A
if
(B)
if
(C)
if
(D)
j (
j (
j
)
)
(D)
j (
j (
j (
)
)
)
1 2 sin (1
t)
1 2 cos (3
t)
1 mH
(A) 50 W
(B) 1050 W
(C) 5000 W
(D) 10100 W
6.
j1
(10+j0)V
j1
ig a
7.
cos(1000t)V
ig b
V(t)= 52
4.
(C)
IN  2008
5.
In the circuit below the average power
consumed by the 1 resistor is
sin t
(A)
Network Theory
th
1mH
th
th
1000 F
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 192
Network Theory
(A) 0A
(B) 52 cos (1000t)A
(C) 52 cos (1
(D) 52A
IN  2010
Statement for Linked Answer Questions: 8
&9
A coil having an inductance (L) of 10mH
and resistance R is connected in series
with an ideal 100 F capacitor (C). When
excited by a voltage source of value
102 cos (1000t)V, the series RLC circuit
draws 20W of power.
8.
9.
IN  2011
Common Data for Question 10 & 11
Consider the circuit shown below:
2 sin(5t)
cos(5t)
.1
i(t)
10.
11.
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 193
Network Theory
6.
[Ans. A]
[Ans. C]
(  1 )
( )
( )
J ,
1)
(J )
(J )
,
,
J
1
3
3J
Filter is bandpass filter.
1
2.
power
, (J )
[Ans. D]
For
maximum
J
(L = 20 mH, C = 50 )
Nodal analysis at node A
2
j
1 1 j
(J )
s
s
( )
( )
ut
(  1 ))
j1
j
[
1
2
j1
transfer,
2
2
j1
1
j
]
2
j1
1
3.
[Ans. D]
current
53
5 3
4.
j1
impedance
((5 3J)(5
34
173
1
3J))
[Ans. A]
Replace 10V by short circuit and 1A by
open circuit
(
1). (1 1 )
1
1
2
7.
[Ans. D]
This is standard concept of parallel
resonant circuit
8.
[Ans. C]

9.
[Ans. B]
The RMS current in the load is given by
tan ( )
2
tan
j4
53 13
553 13
j4 2
4
2
8 9
8 9
j4
( )
2 , reactive power
4 4
16
Also note that the active power consumed
by the load
4 7 28
[Ans. C]
1
j4
5.
10.
[Ans. C]
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 194
1
2
)
1
11.
[Ans. B]
Total ower (s)
1
cos
.8
.8
18 1.5j
1
cos
.8
4
c
.8
1
2
1 4
c
12.
Network Theory
14.
(T2 , 1)
1
2
4
4
4
t
T 2
iven
T 2
Equation of line
1
(t
T 2
2t
T
1
*
T
15.
4
3
[Ans. B]
2t
( ) dt
T
y(t)
sin t
+
( ) sin[ t
( )]
y(t)
 ( )
.25
By nodal analysis
x 1
x
x
1 cj
2 cj
1
cj
1
x[
cj
]
2
2 3 cj
1
x[
]
x
2
x
1
y
2 2 3 cj
1
1
 ( )
4 4 9
9
12
2
1
8
6
.4 8
[Ans. *] Range 9.99 to 10.01
4
13.
1 4t
*
+
T 3T
.56
.56 4
2.5 4
1
x dt
T
1 m
i(t)
2
3 cj
3 c
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 195
EE
1.
[Ans. D]
To calculate Thevenins impedance,
current source is open circuited
x
R=1
200
V
2
T/2
Zth
ZL=2j
ZC= j
z
z
1 2j j
= 1 j
Open circuit voltage at terminals X Y
z
(1 j)
1
1
*
T
1
15
dt+
1
2
dt ( 2
T
[ {
2
2
1
k
23
1.739 k
245 volts
[Ans. B]
Assuming resistance of the heater = R
(i) When heater connected to 230 V.
50 Hz source, energy consumed by
the heater = 2.3 units or 2.3 kWh in
1 hour
Power consumed by the heater
1
f
2.
Network Theory
3.
) dt
}]
[Ans. A]
2.3k h
1 hour
2.3 k
rms value of the input voltage
23
j(
At resonance,
2.3
23
so
Therefore, input impedance is purely
resistive, is minimum and the input
voltage and output current are in phase
23
j(
)]
phase
with
but
Therefore,
is
in
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 196
5.
Network Theory
[Ans. A]
j
l
So,
lags the current by 9 . The phasor
diagram on the basis of above analysis
y
C
4.
[Ans. D]
R
T1
using
IR
,.
s1
Vs
s2
P1
25V
VP
)
)
C
P2
T1
T2
VT
Method 1
when
when
Method2
18
(18
(
2 tan
(
(
( ))
Magnitude of
So, option (c) and (d) can not be correct,
as magnitude is 2V in these two options.
th
Angle of
1 8
When
18
18
when
2tan ( )
2 9
36
th
th
2 tan
( )
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 197
Network Theory
18
2 tan ( ) 18
On the basic of above analysis, the locus
of
is drawn below:
2V
O
when
Ref
when
R=0
6.
[Ans. B]
Admittance of the series connected RLC
(
7.
[Ans. B]
Thevenins mpedance
2.38 j .667
as real part is not zero , so has resistor
m[ ]
j .667
Case I
Z0 has capacitor (as Im[Z0]is negative )
Case II
Z0 has both capacitor and inductor, but
inductive
reactance
capacitive
reactances
at = 5 rad / sec
For minimal realization case (i) is
considered
Therefore, Z0 will have a resistor and a
capacitor.
8.
[Ans. C]
Input impedance
1
z j
*By rationlization}
Separating, real and imaginary part of
admittance.
e[ ]
(
e[ ]
(maximum value)
(
( )
(
(
)
(
At
(resonance)
j
0.1H
1F
j .1
j .1
Therefore, [ ]
On the basis of above analysis, the
admittance locus is
1
j ( .1
)
1
1
At resonance, imaginary part must be
zero.
.1
th
1
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 198
.1
11.
1
1
1
9
3 rad/sec
9.
C=
10.
[Ans. B]
rms value of input voltage
1 2
1
2
rms value of current
1 2
52
22
(
)
(
)
(
)
2
2
2
11.358
Let input power factor cos
l
cos =active power drawn by
the converter
1
11.358 cos
5
cos
.44
[Ans. D]
In such system, volumetric flow rate C is
analogous to current and pressure is
analogous to voltage.
The hydraulic capacitance due to storage
in gravity field is defined as
Where A = Area of the tank
Network Theory
12.
[Ans. B]
1
i
2 sin(1
t)
1 2 sin (1
52 sin (3
)
4
22sin(5
t
4)
Fundamental component of input voltage
( )
1 2 sin(1
t)
1
( )
(i )
1
2
Fundamental component of current
(i )
1 2 sin(1
t
3)
[Ans. B]
1 sint
sin t
1 and
1 rad sec
Impedance of the branch containing
inductor & capacitor
j(
)
1
j(
)
1
1
j (1 1
)
1 1
So, this branch is short circuit and the
whole current flow through it
1. sin t
i(t)
1. sint
1
rms values of the current
1
1 2
2
Phase difference
components
1
between
these
two
, cos
cos
.5
3
3
Active power due to fundamental
components
( ),
(i ) ,
cos
1
1
.5 5
Since, 3rd & 5th harmonics are absent in
input voltage, there is no active power due
to the these components.
Hence, active power drawn by the converter
=Active power due to fundamental
components = 500 W
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 199
13.
[Ans. D]
i
sin( t
i
cos( t
17.
[Ans. B]
)
)
j(
sin (
t
)
2
As these two currents are balanced.
i
i
sin
sin
2. sin (
)
sin( t
2 sin ( t
14.
1k rad s
1
. 331
1
. 331
j(
)
j (1
)
t
1
1
2
(2
IN
1.
1
and
25
)
)
d
dt
1
dt
(
At t = 0,
k
2
t
t
16.
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
2
[Ans. D]
[Ans. C]
tt
On solving equation
5 ,
1 m ,
[Ans. B]
Z = 4 j3 = RL jXc; RL=4;
5cos(1
t 1 )
mcos(cot
5
2
1
. 331
)
1 c
2k rad s
j (2
)
)
) . cos (
t
P=
15.
sin (
1
cos (
2 2
1
(
2 2
Network Theory
[Ans. C]
Magnitude of
  (using
transfer theorem)
1
1
2
maximum
1
2
power
th
th
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
2
1
2
2
1
2
( )
1
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 200
2 (2
i
3.
Network Theory
(1
5 cos 2t)
[Ans. D]
The A.C bridge is shown in Fig
. 1,
it can neglected in comparison to
2
[Ans. A]
The circuit is shown in the figure 1
Let
.25
(5 cos 2t)
Fig. 1
j ,
of the vridge is balanced if product
of the impedances of opposite arms is
same i.e.,
j
or
j
[Ans. A]
The coupled circuit is shown in Fig. 1
1
i
Fig. 2
From figure 2, i
1
Due to AC source (5 cos 2t) alone, the
circuit is shown in figure 3, where the
voltage source is short circuited (V = 0)
ig 1
1
.25
(5 cos 2t)
2.
Fig. 3
For
As
2,
2 1
.25
.5,
2
ig 2
under resonance
i
5 cos 2t
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 201
or
. (3)
For C = 1000
1
1
l
(
)
(
)
or
. (4)
omparig (1)with (3)and (2)with (4, )
j
,
j
,
j (
)
j
,
j (
)
5.
[Ans. D]
Let v (t)
v (t)
1 2 in (1
1 2 cos(7
j(
t)
)
MSV of v (t) 1
1
Similarly M.S.V of v (t) 1
Let v(t) = v (t) v (t)
. . of v(t) 1
1
1
1 1
1 ,1
Power is consumed or dissipated only in
1 . if it is ,
. . of v(t)
1 ,1
8.
= 10
circuit it under
( )
Q=
[Ans. B]
[Ans. D]
Circuit is under resonance
I=
[Ans. D]
= 1000 1
resonance
1
1
1
1
9.
6.
t) and
Network Theory
10.
100JV
[Ans. A]
The given circuit is shown in fig. 1
2
cos(1
52e
( )
2 sin(5t)
[Ans. A]
The circuit is shown in the figure
1m
Given:
.1
i(t)
i( )
cos(5t)
Fig. 1
1
R=2 ,
5 rad sec
.1 ,
hasor,
1e
for (t) 2 sin(5t) 2 cos(5t
hasor, 2 e
v(t)
7.
t)
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 202
Network Theory
9
j2
j2
Fig. 2
j2
Fig. 3
(1
j)
j2
Fig. 4
From Fig 4
(1 j)2
(1 j)
245
2 j2
1 j
2 45
19
1 9
j
i(t)
e[ e ]
e[1e
e ]
e[e (
sin(5t)
11.
cos(5t
[Ans. C]
Phasor current through 2
1
1
1
j
j
i (t) 1 cos(5 t)
Power is dissipated in the resistance, 2 .
Assuming that the source values are given
in RMS value
Power delivered by the 2 sources
= Power dissipated in the equivalent 2
of Fig. 4
(1)
2 2
Note: Assuming Peak value for the
sources,
Power delivered by the 2 sources
=( )
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 203
Network Theory
Laplace Transform
ECE  2006
1.
The first and the last critical frequencies
(singularities) of a driving point
impedance function of a passive network
having two kinds of elements, are a pole
and a zero respectively. The above
property will be satisfied by
(A) RL network only
(B) RC network only
(C) LC network only
(D) RC as well as RL networks
2.
ECE  2009
4.
If the transfer function of the following
network is
=
R
+
RL
Vi
V0
0.002
1mV
+
(A) 0.5 A
(B) 2.0A
(C) 1.0 A
(D) 0.0A
ECE  2007
3.
Two series resonant filters are as shown
in the figure. Let the 3dB bandwidth of
Filter 1 be B1 and that of Filter 2 be B2.
The Value of
C1
is
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
ECE/EE/IN  2013
6.
of the circuit
shown below is
L1
00F
+
Vi
+
R
Vo
10k
V1(s)
Filter 1
V2(s)
00F
+
Vi
+
R
Vo
Filter 2
(A) 4
(B) 1
(C)
(D)
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 204
Network Theory
EE 2014
1.
The driving point impedance Z(s) for the
circuit shown below is
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
[Ans. B]
2.
[Ans. A]
5.
[Ans. A]
Redrawing the circuit s domain
I(S)
+
( )
LS
V(S)
Li (0 )
3.
So here,
Now,
[Ans. D]
4.
Put ,
[Ans. C]
(
So,
))
I(s) =
Now ,
( )
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 205
Network Theory
In time domain,
( )
6.
[Ans. D]
100 F
0
100 F
EE
1.
Ans. A]
peda e f
du a e
peda e f apa
f F
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 206
Network Theory
TwoPort Networks
ECE  2006
1.
In the two port network shown in the
figure below, Z12 and Z21are, respectively
(A) r n
(B)
n
(C)
n r
(D) r n
4.
3.
+[
(C) *
(B) *
(D) *
(A) *
(C) *
(B) *
(D) *
Z(s)
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
ECE  2008
Statement for linked Answer Questions 3
and 4
A two port network shown below is
excited by external dc sources. The
voltages and currents are measured with
voltmeters
and ammeters
(All assumed to be ideal) as indicated.
Under following switch conditions, the
readings obtained are:
(i)
open ,
 closed
closed ,
(ii)
5.
2.
(A) *
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
L
H R
L
H R
L = 0.1H, R = 2
L
H R 2
F
F
0.1F
F
ECE  2010
6.
For the twoport network shown below,
the short circuit admittance parameter
matrix is
(A) *
open
(B) *
2
2
+S
(C) *
+S
(D) *
+S
2
2
+S
2
wo port
n twork
ECE  2011
7.
In the circuit shown below, the network N
is described by the following Y matrix:
*
th
th
+.
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 207
is
Network Theory
s s
s s
s
s s
s s
s s
s s
s
s s
s
s s
s
(A) 1/90
(B) 1/90
(C)
(D)
1/99
1/11
11.
ECE/EE/IN  2012
Common Data for questions 8 and 9
With 10 V dc connected at port A in the
linear nonreciprocal twoport network
shown below, the following were
observed:
(i) 1 connected at port B draws a
current of 3 A
(ii) 2.5 connected at port B draws a
current of 2 A
2
2
12.
8.
9.
called
N twork N
N twork N
network
has scattering
s
s
parameters given by [ ] *s
s + If
the port2 of the two port is short
circuited, the s
parameter for the
resultant oneport network is
th
of the cascaded
network is
(A)
(C) (
(B)
(D)
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 208
13.
I1
Network Theory
k
49i1
Input loop
F
F
(A) *
(B) *
2
2
(C) *
(D) *
2
2
(A) 2 F
(B)
F
+
+
EE  2006
1.
The parameters of the circuit shown in
the figure are R
M R = 10 ,
A =
V/V.If
= 1 V, then output
voltage, input impedance and output
impedance respectively are
R
R
+
(C) 2
F
(D)
Fs
EE  2010
4.
The twoport network P shown in the
figure has ports 1 and 2, denoted by
terminals (a, b) and (c, d), respectively. It
has an impedance matrix Z with
parameters denoted by . A 1 resistor
is connected in series with the network at
port 1 as shown in the figure. The
impedance matrix of the modified twoport network (shown as a dashed box) is
+
_
(A) 1V, , 10
(B) 1 V,0, 10
2.
(C) 1 V, 0,
(D) 10 V, ,10
(A) [
(B) [
(C) [
(D) [
IN  2007
(A) z parameters,*
(B) h parameters,*
(C) h parameters,*
1.
(D) z parameters,*
in the following
R
EE  2009
3.
The equivalent capacitance of the input
loop of the circuit shown is
th
(A) AV
(C) AV
(B) AV
(D) AV
th
th
+R
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 209
IN  2008
2.
For the circuit shown below the input
resistance R11 =
3I2
2V3
I2
V3
V1
+I
1
V1
IN  2013
3.
Considering the transformer to be ideal,
th tr nsmission p r m t r of th
2 port network shown in the figure
below is
is
+
Network Theory
1:2
I1
V2
(C)
(D)
I2
V2
2
(A) 1.3
(B) 1.4
(A)
(B) 2
(C) 0.5
(D) 2.0
3.
[Ans. C]
=
=
[Ans. B]

s (1)
open)
=0


2.
=0
s (2)

[Ans .D]
The ABCD parameter equations are given
by,
=*
4.
wh n th n twork is t rmin l
R
R
R
= 1.5
+
[Ans. A]
=h
h
=h
h
From giv n
p r m t rs
2
fig
R
R
= 1.5
H=*
RL
= 3
+
Fig. 1
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 210
5.
Network Theory
[Ans. D]
R
L
R L
(R L
Note:
R
R L
R L
is Independent of
L )
8.
[Ans. C]
As per the given conditions, we can draw
the following two figures.
RL
R L
R
L )
2
s 2
Comparing (1) and (2)
2
R
L
10
V
F
R
2A
B
A
6.
3A
10V
2.5
[Ans. A]



[ ]
7.
2
2
2
[Ans. D]
iv n
+
2
2
From the circuit shown in Fig. 1
R
2
Vth = 3Rth + 3
(1)
&
Vth = 2Rth + 5
(2)
Solving (1) & (2)
Rth 2
So, Vth = 3 x 2 + 3 = 9V
Now,
Fig
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 211
Network Theory
i=
9.
[Ans. B]
R
= 7V.
[Ans. B]
p r m t rs
ort
ort 2
Lo
2
For network B
s
s
s
Port 2 is short circuited
h n ws
2
2
From
s
s
[
s ]
s
s
s
From
s
s
[
s
s
11.
s ]
s s
[
s
s s
s s
s
s
s
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 212
EE
1.
Network Theory
[Ans. A]
= 1V
=
=
12.
2.
[Ans. C]
h
h
V1
(2R
s
)
R
s
[from
R]
R +
) (2R
s R
) (R
*(2R
s R
s
s
(2R
) (R
R s
Rs
2Rs
k
F
s
s
R s
o h p r m t rs
R
3.
}R
h
h
h
]
h
s
s
[Ans. A]
Assume a 1A current source at input
terminals,
= 1A
R s
sr
s R
R
V2
(2R
[(R
om ining
I2
s
s
(R
h
h
I1
R
s
13.
R = 10
[Ans. B]
F
F
[Ans. C]
Applying KVL
i
i [2
+
*
j
]
Input impedance
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 213
Network Theory
2
h r
put it in qu tion
2
2 F
4.
o[
[Ans. C]
The impedance matrix
of the modified
network is calculated from fig. given
below:
3.
[Ans. A]
2
1 I1
[ ][ ]
[ ]
V1
V2
2
[
[ ]
][ ]
[ ]
2
2
From qu tion
From qu tion
Fig.
2
IN
1.
From qu tion
2
n
[Ans. A]
V=
=
2.
[Ans. D]
2
2V3
+ I1
+ +
V1
3I2
I2
c
2
V3
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 214
Network Theory
Network Topology
ECE  2008
1.
In the following graph, the number of
trees (P) and the number of cutsets (Q)
are
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(A) P = 2, Q = 2
(B) P = 2, Q = 6
(C) P = 4, Q = 6
(D) P = 4, Q = 10
EE  2007
1.
The matrix A given below is the node
incidence matrix of a network. The
columns correspond to branches of the
network while the rows correspond to
nodes. Let V = [v1 v2 v6]T denote the
vector of branch voltages.
While I = [i1 i2 i6]T that of branch
currents. The vector E=[e1 e2 e3 e4]T
denotes the vector of node voltages
relative to a common ground.
[
EE  2008
2.
The number of chords in the graph of the
given circuit will be
(A) 3
(B) 4
(C) 5
(D) 6
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 215
Network Theory
[Ans. C]
Different trees (P) are shown below.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(5)
(6) (4)
So P = 4, Q = 6
2.
EE
1.
[Ans. A]
The graph of the given circuit is shown in
Fig.
Number of nodes = N = 4
Number of branches = B = 6
Number of tree branches = (N 1) = 3
Number of links = L = B (N 1) = 3
[Ans. B]
For the given node to branch
incidence matrix
[
]
1
5
III
II
Fig.
4
IV
Fig.
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 216
(D)
t t
t
t
rw s
t t
ECE  2007
2.
The 3dB bandwidth of the lowpass
signal
u t , where u(t) is the unit step
function, is given by
(C)
(A)
z
(D)
z
(B)
z
ECE  2009
3.
A function is given by f(t) = sin2t +cos2t .
Which of the following is true?
(A) f has frequency components at 0 and
/ z
(B) f has frequency components at 0 and
/ z
(C) f s fr qu cy c mp
ts t /
/ z
(D) f has frequency components at 0,
/
/ z
ECE  2011
4.
If the unit step response of a network is
, then its unit impulse response
is
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
r s
7.
8.
y is___________
EE  2006
1.
Which of the following is true:
(A) A finite signal is always bounded
(B) A bounded signal always possesses
finite energy
(C) A bounded signal is always zero
outside the interval [ t , t ] for
some t
(D) A bounded signal is always finite
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 217
EE  2007
2.
If u(t), r(t) denote unit the unit step and
unit ramp functions respectively and
u(t) * r(t) their convolution, then the
function u (t+1) * r(t 2) is given by
(A) (1/2) (t 1) (t+2)
(B) (1/2) (t 1) (t 2)
(C) (1/2) (t 1)2 u(t 1)
(D) none of the above
EE  2014
5.
The function shown in the figure can be
represented as
EE  2008
3.
Given a sequence x[n], to generate the
sequence y[n] = x[3 4n], which one of
the following procedures would be
correct?.
(A) First delay x[n] by 3 samples to
generate z [n], then pick every 4th
sample of z1[n] to generate z2[n], and
then finally time reverse z2[n] to
obtain y[n]
(B) First advance x[n] by 3 samples to
generate Z1[n], and then pick every
4th samples of z1[n] to generate z2 [n]
and then finally time reverse Z2[n] to
obtain y[n]
(C) First pick every fourth sample of x[n]
to generate v
timereverse
v
to obtain v
& finally
advance v
by 3 sample to obtain
y[n]
(D) First pick every fourth sample of x[n]
to generate V1[n], timereverse V1[n]
to obtain V2[n], and finally delay
V2[n] by 3 samples to obtain Y[n]
EE  2011
4.
A zero mean random signal is uniformly
distributed between limits
and its mean square value is equal to its
variance. Then the r. m. s. value of the
signal is
(A)
(C)
(D)
(B)
(A) u t
u t
u t
u t
(B) u t
(C) u t
u t
u t
u t
u t
u t
(D) u t
u t
u t
6.
An input signal x t
s
t is
sampled with a sampling frequency of
400 Hz and applied to the system whose
transfer function is represented by
z
z
(
)
z
Where, N represents the number of
samples per cycle. The output y(n) of the
system under steady state is
(A) 0
(C) 2
(B) 1
(D) 5
7.
IN  2007
1.
Consider the periodic signal
x t
c s t c s
t
where t is in seconds. Its fundamental
frequency, in Hz, is
(A) 20
(C) 100
(B) 40
(D) 200
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 218
IN  2008
2.
The fundamental period of the discretetime signal x[n] =
(A)
(B)
3.
The integral
is
(C) 6
(D) 12
) s
(t
IN  2009
4.
The fundamental period of
x(t) = 2sin2t +3sin3t , with t
expressed in seconds, is
(A) 1s
(C) 2s
(B) 0.67s
(D) 3s
5.
7.
t v u t t
(A) 6
(B) 3
(C) 1.5
(D) 0
IN  2011
8.
Consider a system with input x(t) and
output y(t) related as follows
y(t) =
x t }
(B)
to be an integer
(C)
to be a ratio of integers
y t
(D) none
. The system is
EC/IN  2013
10. If the Amatrix of the state space model of
a SISO linear time invariant system is
rank deficient, the transfer function of the
system must have
(A) A pole with a positive real part
(B) A pole with a negative real part
(C) A pole with a positive imaginary part
(D) A pole at the origin
11.
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 219
IN  2014
12. Time domain expressions for the
voltage
t
t r v
s
t
s
t
t =
c s
t
Which one of
the following statement is TRUE?
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
t
t
t
t
t y
t y
t y
t y
s
s
s
s
Every
after
s
[Ans. D]
s
trigonometric function repeats
t rv
S c s
y
teger, there is no
p ss
v u f f rw c c
an integer, thus nonperiodic
t
2.
[Ans. A]
f
m
tu
7.
s
t
fr qu
cy
[Ans. A]
y t
y t
I.F. =
y t
r
f
3.
u t
8.
c s t
c s t
Here x
[Ans. A]
t
6.
5.
u t , P = 5, Q = u t ,
y t
f t
4.
[Ans. B]
y t
[Ans. C ]
Cascade means convolution
[Ans. D]
Assume x
N)
x
x
EE
1.
[Ans. D]
If the amplitude of a signal have some
finite boundaries for all values of time
then it is called as bounded signal.
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 220
f t 
}f r t
r f t 
f tt
v v u
So a bounded signal may possess finite
energy or infinite energy.
For example u (t) is bounded signal but it
possess infinite energy because it is a
power signal.
It can be zero or nonzero outside a finite
interval ( t t
But it is always true that it will be always
finite for any value of time t.
i.e, z
z
x
Now reverse (time reverse) z
give y[n] = z
x
4.
will
[Ans. A]
Variance
[Ans. C]
u t
RMS value
r t
r
z t
5.
u t
[Ans. A]
Result graph
r p
r p
r p
r p
u
z t
u t
For (t
r p
z t
u t
r p
f r t
t
z t
For
z t
u t
For
z t
3.
u t
6.
[Ans. C]
x t
t
ft
[Ans. B]
Y[n] = x[3 4n] = x[ 4n+ 3]
So to obtain y[n] we first advance x[n] by
3 unit.
i.e, z
x
Now we will take every fourth sample of
z
m p r
s
t
t
f
fx t
ms
s mp
um
th
th
p r
r f s mp s
th
ms
c cyc
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 221
s mp
p r
r st
y st t
my
m
m
[
2.
z
y z
IN
1.
[Ans. D]
z x z
x
Fundamental period
z
t
t
3.
[Ans. D]
Step response s(t)
u t
zs
zc s
z
+
z
(Using L Hospital rule)
m*
z
z
zs
zc s
z
z
z
m*
7.
t
t
z
m
z
t
+
[Ans. 14]
r qu cy f s
t
z
r qu cy f s
t
z
r qu cy f s
t
z
By Nyquist theorem, sampling frequency
f
z
x mum fr qu cy f
z
u t
u t
4.
u t / t
t t
[Ans. C]
x t
S
t
S
P r
f S
t s
P r
t s
P r
of final original is LCM of
= LMC
/
= 2 sec.
5.
[Ans. D]
Given signal is
y t
[Ans. A]
X(t) = (1+0.5 cos t c s
t
c s
t
c s t c s
t
c s
t
c s
t
c s
t
x t
x t
x t
w r
x
c s
t
x
c s
t
x
c s
t
Now,
tm p r
fx t
[Ans. C]
x t
y t
s
Value of y t t depends on values of x for
times from
t t
As output is depending on future values
of input, the system is Non casual
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 222
y t
x t
[Ans. C]
If x(n) is periodic with period N, then the
condition to be satisfied is x(n) = x(n+N).
If x(n) = s
then the necessary
condition is
s
s
Or
N= m m 1, 2,
From (1),
y(tt
Let
From (3),
Or
y t
r t
Or
[Ans. D]
11.
[Ans. B]
Y(s)
(t
rs
(step response)
u t
) s
should be expressible as ( )
10.
[Ans. B]
Given signal is
x t
u t
u t
u t
t
(t
x t
{
) s
t
t
s w r
s
u t
u t
At t = 2 value is 1
12.
[Ans. C]
[Ans. A]
t
x t
x t }
x t
x t
x t ]
t
As y(t) is obtained from linear operation
on x(t), the system is linear .
As the input x(t) is multiplied by a time
varying function
, the system is
Time varying.
For a bounded input x(t) ,
x(t) is
bounded, y(t) is also bounded. Therefore
the system is stable.
th
v
t
t
t
c s
c s
c s
th
s
t
t
t
t y
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 223
as
(s
5.
and output y
)x
is
The
system is
(A) linear, stable and invertible
(B) nonlinear, stable and noninvertible
(C) linear, stable and noninvertible
(D) linear, unstable and invertible
ECE  2008
2.
A discrete time linear shiftinvariant
system has an impulse response h[n] with
, and zero
otherwise. The system is given an input
sequence x[n] with x[0] = x[2] =1, and
zero otherwise. The number of nonzero
samples in the output sequence y[n] and
the value of y[2] are, respectively
(A) 5, 2
(C) 6, 1
(B) 6, 2
(D) 5, 3
3.
4.
ECE  2009
6.
Consider a system whose input x and
output y are related by the equation :
y t
x t
H(t)
(t)
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 224
ECE  2010
7.
Two discrete time systems with impulse
responses
and
are connected in
cascade. The overall impulse response of
the cascaded system is
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
ECE  2013
12. The DFT of a vector
c is the vector
. Consider the product
c
c
pqrs
c [
].
c
c
The DFT of the vector p q r s is a scaled
version of
(A)
ECE  2011
8.
A system is defined by its impulse
response
u
. The system
is
(A) Stable and causal
(B) Causal but not stable
(C) Stable but not causal
(D) Unstable and noncausal
ECE  2014
13. The
value
of
the
s c t t is ________.
9.
An input
is applied
response
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
x t
xp
t u t
t
to an LTI system with impulse
t
u t The output is
xp
t u t
u t
xp
t u t
u t
xp
t u t
u t
xp
t u t
u t
(B) [ ]
(C)
(D)
14.
15.
16.
17.
integral
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 225
S2:
y [ 0 ] = 3, y[ 2 ] = 2 is the output of a
discrete time LTI system. The system
impulse response h [ n ] will be
(A) h [ n ] = 0; n < 0, n > 2, h[ 0 ] = 1,
h[1]=h[2]= 1
(B) h [ n ] = 0; n < 1, n > 1, h[ 1 ] = 1,
h[0]=h[1]=2
(C) h [ n ] = 0; n < 0, n > 3, h[ 0 ] = 1,
h [ 1 ] =2, h [ 2 ] = 1
(D) h [ n ] = 0; n < 2, n > 1,
h[ 2 ] = h [ 1 ] =h [ 1]
= h[0]=3
{
f
EE  2007
3.
X(z) = 1 z , Y(z)= 1+ z are
Z transforms of two signals x[n], y[n]
respectively. A linear time invariant
system has the impulse response h[n]
defined by these two signals as
h[n] = x[n 1] y[n] where
denotes
discrete time convolution. Then the
output of the syst m f r t
put
1]
(A) Has Ztransform
X(z) Y(z)
(B) qu s
2]
4]
5]
(C)
s
tr sf rm
z
z
z
(D) Does not satisfy any of the above
three.
EE  2008
4.
A signal
sin ( t) is the input to a
Linear Time Invariant system. Given K
and
are constants, the output of the
system will be of the form
sin
(vt
) where
(A)
t
qu t
; but equal
to
(B) v need not be equal to
ut
qu
to
(C)
qu t
and equal to
(D)
t
qual to and need
not be equal to
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 226
5.
6.
EE  2010
10. Given the finite length input x[n] and the
corresponding finite length output y[n] of
an LTI system as shown below, the
impulse response h[n] of the system is
h[n]
y[n] = {1, 0, 0, 0, 1}
x[n] = {1, 1}
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
11.
t
is
x
Linear and causal
Linear but not causal
Causal but not linear
Neither linear nor causal
EE  2011
12. The response h(t) of a linear time
v r t syst m t
mpu s
t
under initially relaxed condition is
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 227
13.
h(t) =
. The response of this
system for a unit step input u(t) is
(A) u(t) +
(B)
u t
(C)
u t
(D)
t
u t
Given two continuous time signals
x(t) =
and y(t) =
which exist for
t > 0 the convolution z(t) = x(t) * y(t) is
(A)
u t
(B)
u t
(C)
(D)
EE  2013
14. Which one of the following statement is
NOT TRUE for a continuous time causal
and stable LTI system?
(A) All the poles of the system must lie on
the left side of the j axis.
(B) Zeros of the system can lie anywhere
in the splane
(C) All the poles must lie within s
(D) All the root of the characteristic
equation must be located on the left
side of the j axis.
18.
19.
EE  2014
15. x(t) is nonzero only for
t
, and
similarly, y(t) is nonzero only for
t
. Let z(t) be convolution of x(t)
and y(t). Which one of the following
statements is TRUE?
(A) z(t) can be nonzero over an
unbounded interval.
(B) z(t) is nonzero for t
(C) z(t) is zero outside of
t
(D) z(t) is nonzero for t
.
16.
(A) 
(B) 
(C) 
(D) 





  
s mu t p m x m

  
c st t
s s
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 228
IN  2007
1.
The signals x(t) and h(t) shown in the
figures are convolved to yield y(t) .
3.
x(t)
1
1
1
1
h(t)
1
0
IN  2009
4.
A linear timeinvariant casual system has
frequency response given in polar form
as:
(A)
(B)
(B)
y(t)
(C)
1
4
(C)
(D)
y(t)
1
1
c st
c s (t
s t
s
(t
IN  2011
5.
Consider the signal
t
x(t) = {
t
Let X( ) denote the Fourier transform of
this signal. The integral
is
(D)
(A) 0
(B)
y t)
1
3
1
(C) 1
(D)
IN  2013
6.
The impulse response of a system is
h(t) = t u(t). for an input u(t 1), the
output is
(A)
IN  2008
2.
Which one of the following discretetime
systems is time invariant?
(A) y [n] = nx [n]
(C) y[n] = x[ n]
(B) y [n] = x [3n]
(D) y [n] = x[n 3]
u t
(B)
u t
(C)
u t
(D)
th
u t
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 229
IN  2014
7.
The impulse response of an LTI system is
given as :
{s
It represents an ideal
(A) noncausal, lowpass filter
(B) causal, lowpass filter
(C) noncausal, highpass filter
(D) causal, highpass filter
[Ans. C]
x
x[k]
[s
( )] x
and y
 x
2
1
0
1
h[k]
+1
2
[Ans. D]
y
x
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
3.
[Ans. D]
h(t) = u t
u t
For the system to be stable ,
t t
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 230
u t
u t
9.
syst m s
[Ans. D]
s
y(s) = X(s).H(s)
Therefore
Graph for
s s
y t
[Ans. C]
A system is casual if the output at any
time depends only on values of the input
at the present time and in the past.
5.
[Ans. A]
6.
[Ans. B]
y t
10.
x t
y t
c s
y t
f r
x t
c s
t
y
utput
c s
y t
8.
u t
[Ans. D]
y t
x
t
c s
P
p
[Ans. C]
H(z) =
u t
h(t)
7.
s
s
taking inverse
w
t
4.
t st
where
t
P t t
When
P
Also
P t
z =
[Ans. B]
u
For causal system h(n) = 0 for n < 0.
Hence given system is casual.
For stability:
y t
x P c s
s c y t
y t t
It is not time invariant for a bounded
input, x (t) = cos (3t) u(t)
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 231
x
y t
c s
{x
} { c um v ct r }
su
11.
{x
x
Designing the
sequence
x
x
x
x
c s
u
syst m s
st
t stable.
[Ans. A]
g(1)
g(0)
1[ k]
1/2
1/4
k
0 1 0 1
c
c
y
x
x
x
x
x
[ x
]
Now circular convolutions given by
x
x
x
c
c
[
]
c
c
Now circular convolution of
c with
it self
c
c
c
c
[
]0 1
c
c
c
Taking transpose both side
c
c
0 1 0 1
c
[
]
c
c
c
c
Let
( ) u
} { c um v ct r }
x
matrix using same
y
P
0 1 0 1
c
c
y
h[1 k] will be zero for k > 1 and g[k] will
be zero for k<0 as it is causal sequence.
P
13.
g [1] = 0
12.
[Ans. A]
Matrix method
 
th
th
f
r ct ( )
th
P rs v
st
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 232
r m
( tr ( ) f)
f
tr ( ) f
 
17.
[Ans. A]
t
14.
[Ans. *] Range 44 to 46
f r t
t
,
t rw s
t
u t
u t
s
y s
r st
s
y st t
s
S : Syst m s st
c us
t s ut y
t
S :
s
p
t
t
s
utput
m sy s
s
c s t f rm f % s
Hospital Rule?
pp y
18.
t ftm
t ftm
x t
t (a noncausal system)
[Ans. D]
t
y t
[Ans. A]
y
y
y z
y z z
y z
x z
z
t r
16.
u t
15.
x t
f
x f
f
y t
x t
19.
y t
t c v ut
f
f
[Ans. B]
s
s
s
s
s
For a stable causal LTI systems, all system
poles should lie on LHP of splane.
So to make H(s) causal, we need to cancel
out the pole at s = 2
So,
s
s
x
x z
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 233
EE
1.
2.
[Ans. D]
y(t) =   ,
x t  is always positive for positive as
well as negative values of x(t).
When x(t) is bounded, y (t) is bounded.
Even when x(t) is not bounded
i.e, x(t) = f r y t
Y(t) =
y t s u
v w
x t s t
bounded.
[Ans. A]
For finite duration convolution
x[n] have M terms
h[n] have N terms
then, y[n] should have terms (M+N 1)
Here, x[n] = { 1, 2}
y[n] = { 1, 3, 1, 2}
so option (A) is correct .
3.
[Ans. A]
If the input x(t) = s
t to a real Linear
Time Invariant system with frequency
response
, then the output
y(t) = s
t
If the input is a damped sinusoid
need not equal to alpha but frequency
v
5.
[Ans. D]
An LTI system is causal if the impulse
response , h(t) =0 for t< 0
The principle of superposition holds for a
linear system.
t st t m ts
r c rr ct
6.
[Ans. D]
y[n] = { 1, 3, 1, 2}
So, h[n] should have only 3 terms and
h[n] have value starting from origin of
[n=0] only because y[n] have start from
[n = 1]
s r pt
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Given y(t) =
[Ans. B]
For (x) = 1 3z
x(n)
delaying by 1
x
For Y(z) =
z
y
x
y
put x t
For x t
th
th
utput y t
x t
t
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 234
utput
x t
x t
t
10.
Where t
But y t
x t t
8.
[Ans. D]
Case 1: Y(s) = H(s). X(s)
Case 2: input = x(t
s
Impulse response = h(t
Output: Y(s) = X(s).
. H(s)
= X(s). H(s).
y(t 2
[Ans. A]
y[n] = x[n] *H[n]
y[z]=x[z] H[z]
y[z] = z
z
z
z
z
z
comparing with
y[n] = [1, 0, 0, 0,  1]
z
z
z
y
f r
Therefore it is not causal with finite
support
9.
no. of elements
[Ans. C]
x[n] = {1,1} , M=2
y[N] = { 1,0,0,0,  1} . N1 =5
z
z
[Ans. B]
Since in cascade overall impulse response
h(t) = h1(t)* h2(t)* h3(t)
h1(t), h2(t), h3(t) are impulse responses of
individual systems.
Since initial point where h(t) is nonzero is
t 0 and since in convolution initial point
t
t
t
Where t t t are initial points of
t
t
t respectively.
So for it to be greater than zero atleast
one of them
t t
t must be +ve
11.
[Ans. B]
Integrator is always a linear support
Since y(t) =
For t = 1
y t
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 235
12.
[Ans. C]
For given LTI system with input
response h(t) =
t
15.
t
[Ans. C]
,
x t
s t
y t
t t
f r t
s t
[Ans. B]
[Ans. A]
X(s) =
s
s s
s
s
of
u t
16.
13.
property
u t
17.
[Ans. C]
Since it is a stable system all poles should
lie in the left half of splane
S
s This implies one pole lie
in RHS
[Ans. B]
t
s
u t
s
y s
y s
s
x s
s
s
th
s
s
18.
s
s
u t
[Ans. C]
10 kHz even symmetric square wave have
frequency component present
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 236
19.
y(t)
[Ans. D]
1
h(t+1)
1
1
1
21
h(t 1)
Fig. 3
y(t)
1
2
2
1
Fig. 4
x(t) = 1 t
t
y t
t
* t
t
* t
using the properties of convolution:
t * t
t
t
* t
t
y t
t
t
The resultant of the triangles in Fig. 3 is
shown in Fig. 4
s
(
)(
(
(
(
su st tut
w
t
IN
1.
)(
)(
)(
)(
)(
)(
s

st
2.
[Ans. D]
y(n) =x(n 3) represents a time delay
system with delay = 3 secs.
It is a Time invariant system as can be
confirmed from the following Test.
Test for time invariance:
If y1(n) = y(nn0), then the system is time
invariant
rt
v syst m x
y
x 3)
[Ans. D]
y(t) = x(t) * h(t)
x(t) and h(t) are shown in Fig. 1 and Fig.2
x(t)
1
1
1
1
x
x
From (1) y
Fig. 1
y
x
x
h(t)
1
0
3.
[Ans. A]
z
z
y
Fig. 2
th
th
z
z
z
z
z
z
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 237
4.
[Ans. D]
T/F
x t
y t
Given,
Transfer function
y t
5.
[Ans. C]
Given x (t) =
t
t
x t
f
r pr p rty:
6.
f f
[Ans. C]
t
tu t
s
y s
y t
7.
x t 
s
s
*
u t
s
s
+
ut
[Ans. A]
For a system to be noncausal its impulse
response h(n) should depends upon
future value of n and if h(n) is
independent of the past value it never
means that system is noncausal
And it is the equation of LPF with cutoff
frequency
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 238
(A)
(B)
X( )
X( )
(C)
X( )
(D)
X( )
ECE  2012
6.
The Fourier transform of a signal h(t) is
H{j) = (2 cos) (sin 2 ) /. The value
of h(0) is
(A) 1/4
(C) 1
(B) 1/2
(D) 2
ECE 2013
ECE  2007
2.
A 5point sequence x[n] is given as
x[ 3]=1, x[ 2]=1, x[ 1]=0, x[0]=5,
x[1]=1. Let X(
denote the discretetime Fourier transform of x[n]. The value
of
( )
s
(A) 5
(B) 10
(C) 16
(D) 5+j10
ECE  2008
3.
The signal x(t) is described by
f r
t
x(t) =,
.
t rw s
Two of the angular frequencies at which
its Fourier transform becomes zero are
(A)
(C) 0,
(B)
(D)
ECE  2009
4.
The Fourier series of a real periodic
function has only
P. cosine terms if it is even
Q. sine terms if it is even
R. cosine terms if it odd
S. sine terms if it is odd
Which of the above statement are
correct?
(A) P and S
(C) Q and S
(B) P and R
(D) Q and R
ECE  2011
5.
The trigonometric Fourier series of an
even function does not have the
(A) dc term
(B) cosine terms
(C) sine terms
(D) odd harmonic terms
7.
Let g(t) =
and h(t) is a filter
matched to g(t). If g(t) is applied as input
to h(t) , then the Fourier transform of the
output is

(C)
(A)
(B)
(D)
ECE 2014
8.
For a function g(t), it is given that
t
value if
y(t) =
(A) 0
(B)
9.
y t t s
(C)
(D)
( ) Let
be the complex
( )
step
EE 2006
1.
x(t) is a real valued function of a real
variable with period T. Its trigonometric
Fourier Series expansion contains no
terms of frequency = 2 (2k) / T;
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 239
k = 1,
s
s
t rms r
present. Then x(t) satisfies the equation
(A) x(t) = x (t T)
(B) x(t) = x (T t) = x ( t)
(C) x(t) = x (T t) = x (t T / 2)
(D) x(t) = x (t T) = x(t T / 2)
EE 2008
4.
Let x(t) = rect(t
x t
5.
c s(
(C)
s (
(B)
c s(
(D)
s (
(A) sinc( )
(B) 2sinc ( )
EE 2009
6.
The Fourier Series coefficient, of a
periodic signal x(t), expressed as
x(t) =
are given by
=
j1;
= 0.5 + j0.2;
= j2;
=0.5 j0.2;
= 2 + j1; and = 0; for
 > 2.Which of the following is true?
(A) x(t) has finite energy because only
finitely many coefficients are nonzero
(B) x(t) has zero average value because
it is periodic
(C) The imaginary part of x(t) is constant
(D) The real part of x(t) is even
1 KHz
U
and
(A)
(A)
x t
{
Which among the following gives the
fundamental Fourier term of x(t)?
3.
EE 2007
2.
A single x(t) is given by
t
(B)
EE 2010
7.
x t is a positive rectangular pulse from
t
t t
with unit height as
shown in the figure. The value of

{ where
is the Fourier

(C)
(D)
transform of x t } is
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 240
(A) 2
(B)
8.
(C) 4
(D)
EE 2014
11. For a periodic square wave, which one of
the following statements is TRUE?
(A) The Fourier series coefficients do not
exist.
(B) The Fourier series coefficients exist
but the reconstruction converges at
no point.
(C) The Fourier series coefficients exist
and the reconstruction converges at
most points.
(D) The Fourier series coefficients exist
and the reconstruction converges at
every point.
12.
+1
0
T
T/2
f t
Define g(t) by
1
t
(A) 0
(B) 1
9.
(C) 2/
) is
(A) 0.4s
(B) 0.8s
(C) 1.25s
(D) 2.5s
EE 2011
10. The Fourier series expansion
f(t) =
c s t
s
t of
the periodic signal shown below will
contain the following nonzero terms
13.
f(t)
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
and ,
and ,
and
and ,
(D)
x(t) = 8 s (
+[
(D)
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 241
14.
2.
f t
/
f t
t
/
/
/
1
A signal is represented by
t
x t
{
t
The Fourier transform of the convolved
signal y t
x t x t is
4.
IN 2006
1.
The Fourier transform of a function g(t) is
s
(D)
(C)
3.
16.
(A) 1 + sin
(B) 1 + cos
s ( )s
s ( )
+1
(A)
x( )
(C)
x t
(B)
x t
(D)
x( )
IN 2007
5.
Consider the discretetime signal
x[n] =( )
, where u
=,
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 242
y
(A)
(B)
IN 2011
9.
Consider a periodic signal x(t) as shown
below
qu s
(C)
(D) 3
x(t)
1
6.
x t
where t
0 1
2 3
4 5 6
is an
It has a Fourier series representation
x t
IN 2010
8.
f(x), shown in the adjoining figure is
represented by
f x
The value of
c s x
x }
is
f x
(A) 0
(B)
(C)
(D)
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 243
6.
[Ans. C]
c s
[Ans. A]
x t
x [ (t
)]
c s s c
s c
[Ans. B]
( )
[Ans. A]
t
r ct ( )
{
t { t
t
{r c (
t }
}
t
)
r ct (
)}
1
+1
)
7.
[Ans. D]
The concept of matched filter assumes
that the input signal is of the same form
g(t) as the transmitted signal(except
difference in amplitude ). This requires
that the shape of the transmitted signal
not change on reflection.
h(t) = g( t f
(f)
G f
f
f sr
[Ans. A ]
P & S are correct
[Ans. C]
S xp s
f
have sine terms.
t
r ct ( )
3
5.
s c(
x t
4.
)
ys c
3.
Now r ct ( )
s c(
c s
g(t) =
(fourier transform)
y t
h(t)
g(t)
fu ct
g(t)
s t
y(t)= h(t) * g(t) [convolution]
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 244
8.
[Ans. B]
Given
9.
x(t T) = x( t+T)
but signal is periodic with period T.
therefore x(t T) = x(t)
therefore x(t) = x(T t
Now since signal contains only odd
harmonics i.e no terms of frequency
y t
y t t
y
i.e. no even harmonics. This means signal
contains half wave symmetry this implies
that
x(t) = x(t /
From (i) and (ii)
x(t) = x(T t)
= x(t T/2)
x
s * +
/
P r
S
fx
2.
[Ans. A]
The given signal x(t) is a periodic
waveform with period T0 =2 T and
satisfies half wave symmetry:
x(t) =
x (t
x t
as shown
in Fig.1
Comparing
We see m x
10.
x(t)
1
( )
( ) u
( )
( )
( )
0
1
u
u
Fig . 1
Fundamental frequency =
x t
( )
EE
1.
m is any integer
x (t
shown
/
= /
in
Fig.
( )
x t
( )
c st ( t)
[Ans. C]
Since trigonometric fourier series has no
sine terms and has only cosine terms
therefore this will be an even signal i.e. it
will satisfy
x(t) =x( t)
or we can write
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 245
4.
[Ans. C]
x t
r ct t
x t
t
= 0 otherwise
1
t
x t
x t
Fig. 2
)
As x(t)= x (t
Fundamental component of
x t
c s [ (t
)]
c s* t
+
3.
x t
f(in kHz)
Sampling interval ,
ms f
z
f
f . Therefore Aliasing or overlap of
the adjacent spectra in the sampled
spectrum because f
f .
The sampled spectrum ,
U*
f
f
f
f
as shown in Fig. 2.
The resultant spectrum, U*
is
c st t f r
f s s w
w c
is the same figure given in option(b)

x t
s c(
c s
5.
)c s( )
[Ans. B]
y t
x t t
x t t
Since y(t) is periodic with period T.
Therefore x t t
x t t will also
be periodic with period T.
fs
M
f
0
Fig. 3

f 
2
Fig. 1
+x
w r x t
0, otherwise
[Ans. B]
Highest frequency of the input signal,
fh = 1kHz as shown in its spectrum of
Fig. 1

 r f 
1 0 1
Fig. 2
f(in kHz)
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 246
i.e.
r
t
t
6.
I.
]x t t
[Ans. C]
A periodic signal x(t) has always
infinite energy
III.
x t t
x t t
]x t t
II.
x t x t t
x t 
x t 
8.
[Ans. A]
f(t) is odd no cosine terms and no dc.
Also, by inspection, half wave symmetry
no sine even harmonics no second
harmonics amplitude = 0.
9.
[Ans. D]
From the given signal x(t)
rad/sec
s c
10.
[Ans. D]
Observe the given periodic f(t) shown in
Fig. 1
f(t)
A
[Ans. D]
Fig. 1
(1) Its
t]
average
value
f t t
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 247
s
t rms r
s t f t
(3) The function f1(t) = [f(t)a0] has half
wave symmetry or odd harmonic
symmetry:
i.e., f t
f (
14.
[Ans. C]
Given function is odd
is imaginary and odd in
15.
[Ans. A]
x t
x t
f1(t)
12.
16.
*
*
S
P
s
s
sr
(x t ) t
f ur r tr
sf rm
ry
IN
1.
[Ans. A]
t
Given ,

s
( )s
[Ans. B]
x t v fu ct
+ putt
s
( )
[Ans. A]
Poles of the system are the roots of the

equation S
r
y t
f t ff t s v
t is proportional to f(t) if f(t) is even.
13.
( )
[Ans. B]
Since F( ) is FT of f(t) hence
[Ans. C]
Fourier series exists for periodic waves.
Since it is a square wave, convergence
occurs at most points
/ s
Fig. 2
11.
/
/
t
x( )
If t replaced by ( t),
(
is replaced by
u t
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 248
u t
t
So, y t


5.
In general, K
t
2.
t/
[Ans. C]

Given x(n) = ( ) u

[Ans. C]
From the given plot,
t
y
t
( )
( )
rst t rm
mm r t
f t
t
t
6.
[Ans. A]
{x t t }
c s
c s
4.
7.
[Ans. A]
f
z; f
z f
z
u
m t fr qu cy f x t
f0=0.2
Hz (HCF of are the frequency)
f
f
rm c f
f
harmonic
x t
 
[Ans. C]
The fourier transform of
u
t s
s >0
f
u t will exist
If
a<0
8.
[Ans. A]
The given function f(x) is periodic
function with period, T =
F(x) is shown over one period from 0 to
in Fig.
[Ans. D]
c s
3.
f x x
rf x
So for x ( )
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 249
f(x)
1.5
1.0
x
0
1.0
1.5
Fig.
9.
[Ans. B]
Clearly, period of the signal x(t) is 3.
So, T = 3
And
x t t
x t t
[Ans. A]
Given 6 point DFT of x[n] with
y symm try pr p rt s
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 250
ZTransform
ECE  2006
1.
If the region of convergence of
x [n] +x [n] is 1/3 < z<2/3, then the
region of convergence of x [n] x [n]
includes
ECE  2009
5.
The ROC of ZTransform of the discrete
time sequence ,
x[n] = ( ) u
(D)
z
ECE  2010
6.
Consider the ztransform
z
z
z
z
;
inverse ztransform x[n] is
(A) 5
(B) 5
(C) 5 u
u
u
(D) 5 u
u
u
7.
The
x z
x
S mp r
f
z
is
(C) z
(B) z
z
(A)
ECE  2007
2.
The ztransform x[z] of a sequence x[n] is
given by x[z] =
( ) u
tr
sf rm
ROC: z
S3: The system is neither stable nor causal
z
for ROC:
3.
4.
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
,  z  < e0.05

,  z  > e0.05
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 251
=
(C) y [ n ]
(D) y [ n ]
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
2.
(A)
 
(C)
 
(B)
 
(D)
 
of X(z) z
(A) an1
(B) an
3.
) u
+ z
z
+1
) u
(B) s z
)H(z)
is
the
entire
Zplane
(A) s z
at z = a for n 0 will be
(C) nan
(D) nan1
ECE  2014
(
 
Given X (z) =
(
tx
z
y (z)=
y (z)= z
EE  2008
ECE/EE/IN  2012
 
u
9.
If x
then the
region of convergence (ROC) of its Ztransform in the Zplane will be
10.
z
EE  2014
11.
12.
convergencez
EE  2007
1.
The discrete time signal
x[n]
X (Z) =
4.
Let
y[n]
Where
denotes a transform pair
relationship, is orthogonal to the signal
y (z)=
(B) y [ n ]
y (z)
be the Ztransform of a
IN  2011
2.
Consider the difference equation
z ,
(A) y [ n ]
x[n] = ( ) u
initial rest, th s ut
( ) z
(A) 3 ( )
th
th
f ry
( )
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 252
(B)
( )
( )
(C)
( )
( )
(D)
( )
( )
4.
(A)  <
(C)  >
(B)  <
(D)  <
IN  2014
3.
The system function of an LTI system is
given by
; where
is real.
z
z
The above system can have stable inverse if
the region of convergence of H(z)is defined
as
r
[Ans. D]
ROC {x
x }
{x
x }(if
are no polezero cancellation)
5.
2.
3.
[Ans. B]
ROC is z
x
0.5
[Ans. A]
Recall the z transform pairs:
For
the
Right
sided
sequence:
z  
u
[Ans. B]
s
r z
there
( ) u
z
z
z
( )
 
z
t
Therefore samples
z
6.
4.
[Ans. A]
For the given X(z) , note that the ROC is
the entire z plane except
z
z
Recall the z transform pair:
Recall the time shifting property:
If g(n) G(z)
z
z
[Ans. C]
z
z
z
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 253
z
For given X(z) ,
x(n)=5
7.
8.
[Ans. B]
y
x
Taking z transform of both sides
z
z
z
z
z
z
For cascaded system
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
9.
[Ans. C]
[Ans. C]
Given : H(z)=
Express H(z) in +ve powers of z and find
the zeros and poles.
z
z(
z)
(z
z (z
(z
) (z
)
)
 
(i)z
For a casual system h(n) =0, n< 0 and
h(n) is a Right sided sequence and ROC is
the region outside the circle passing
through the right most pole z =
syst m s us
For stability of LTI system unit circle
should be inside the ROC
syst m s st
S sv
st t m t
( )
( ) u
s y
z
 
x ( )
x ( )
(ii)z
x ( ) z
x ( z)
, z
( z)
,( z
z
( z
( z
 z
 z
z
z
z
 
( ) u
x
s z
rz
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 254
EE
1.
[Ans. B]
Two discrete time signals x(n) and y (n)
are said to be orthogonal, if
x
y
whose * denotes
complex conjugatio
Or
x
y
for real x(n) and
y
z
10.
[Ans. C]
v x
(
) u
r(
) u
s qu
xt r r f c rc
fr
us
z
[Ans. B]
x
x
x z
x z
12.
fx z s
 
z
z
y
is a zero of x(z)
x z
( ) u
y
For
s s z r
us v r
11.
z
) u
ts
x z
x z
[Ans. D]
For the given X(z) =
z
(
Let Y(z) = z
Residue of Y(z)=
z
z
with z>a
z 
z 
x
S x
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 255
z
z
z
 
2.
z
 
[Ans. A]
(1
z
z
put x
z
( ) u
(z
z
)
[Ans. B]
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
x z
x
x
) (z
(z
z
z
3.
( )
( ) +u
[Ans. C]
For a system to be stable, it should
contain Z=1 circle in its ROC
r
x
u
z
4.
( )
z
) (z
}
x
) (z
[Ans. A]
Given,
x[n] = u
x z
z
z
IN
1.
z
[Ans. B]
y
u
3.
 z
z
 
[Ans. C]
Only this option gives poles inside unit
circle.
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 256
Laplace Transform
ECE  2006
1.
Consider the function f(t) having Laplace
transform F(s) =
; Re[s]>0. The final
value of f(t) would be
(A) 0
(C)
(B) 1
(D)
1<f
<1
ECE  2007
2.
If the Laplace transform of a signal y(t) is
Y(s)=
(A) 1
(B) 0
ECE  2011
6.
If
(C) 1
(D) Unbounded
ECE  2009
3.
An LTI system having transfer function
and input x(t) = sin(t+1) is in
steady state. The output is sampled at a
rate
rad/s to obtain the final output
{y(k)}. Which of the following is true ?
(A)
s z r
f r
s mp
frequency
(B)
s
z r f r
s mp
frequency
(C)
s
z r f r
> 2 , but zero
for < 2
(D)
sz r f r
> 2 , but nonzero
for < 2
4.
(C)
(B)
ECE  2010
5.
A continuous
described by
y t
y t
t
t
time
y t
LTI
system
x t
t
f t
y t
x t .
(C)
(B)
(D)
EE 2006
1.
The running integrator, given by
y t
x t
is
x t
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 257
EE  2010
Common Data for Questions 2 and 3
Given f t and t as shown below:
f(t)
1
(A)
(B)
g(t)
1
0
3.
EE  2012
5.
Consider the differential equation
y t
y t
y t
t
t
t
y
wt y t 

t
um r c v u
2.
t can be expressed as
(A) t
f t
(B)
f(
(C)
f( t
(D)
f(
2
1
(C) 0
(D) 1
IN  2006
1. Given, x t x t
t xp
the function x(t) is
(A) xp
t u t
(B) xp t u t
(C) t xp t u t
(D)
xp t u t
t u t
)
IN  2010
2. u(t) represents the unit step function. The
Laplace transform of u(t is
)
)
t is
(A)
(B)
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
IN  2013
3. The
(C)
discretetime
transfer
function
is
(D)
EE  2011
4.
Let the Laplace transform of a function
f(t) which exists for t > 0 be
s and the
Laplace transform of its delayed version
f t
be
s . Let (s) be the complex
conjugate of
s with the Laplace
v r
s t s s
. If
G(s) =
transform of G(s) is
(A)
mpu s
t
(B)
y
mpu s
t
(C) an ideal step function u(t)
(D) an ideal delayed step function u(t
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
IN  2014
4. The transfer function of a system is given
by
/
s
s
The input to the system is ( )=sin100 t .
In periodic steady state the output of the
system s f u
t
y t
s
t
). The phase angle ( ) in degree is
___________.
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 258
[Ans. C]
s}
s
sF(s) has poles , which lie on the
imaginary axis.
v u t
r mc
t
pp
For the given F(s) , f(t) = s
t u t
f
2.
3.
s
s
t
[Ans. D]
poles of S.Y(s) lie on right half of Splane)
s = 1 is right s plane pole
Unbounded.
s
tx t
u t
s
s
s
s
Taking inverse Laplace transform on both
side
y t
u t
6.
[Ans. B]
s
f t
Initial value
[Ans. A]
For the given LTI system
mf t
H(s) =
mf t
ms s
s (
s (
s
s
t
For the input x(t) = sin (t +1) with

 s (t
y t
)
t
r /s c
Y(.) is zero for all sampling frequencies
sy t
4.
[Ans. B]
0 f
5.
7.
1
[Ans. B]
x t
u t
s
s
s s
s
u t
x s
s
s
Now taking Laplace transform
[Ans. B]
y t
y t
x t
y t
x t
t
t
t
Taking Laplace transform on both side
(assuming zero initial conditions).
s s
s s
s
s s
s
s y s
y s
y s
th
th
sy s
y s
s s
s s
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 259
s s
f(
f(
EE
1.
[Ans. B]
y t
x t
u t
3.
[Ans. C]
Form Fig. 3 in the above question,
g(t) = u(t 3) u(t 5)
Use L.T pair and property:
u t
u t
*
Fig. 3
s
f
s
*
f r
t s
4.
[Ans. B]
f t t
2.
[Ans. D]
Time scaling (Expansion by 2) and Time
shifting by 3 get g(t) from f(t)
f(t) , f(t/2) and g(t) = f (
f t
) are shown
1
t
5.
s
s 

s 
 s  ,
[Ans. D]
+
Fig.1
y t
Converting to s domain,
s2y(s) sy(0) y (0) + 2[sy(s) y(0)] +
y(s) = 1
[s2 + 2s + 1] y (s) + 2s + 4 = 1
f(t/2)
1

s
s
G(s)
t
t
)
The inverse LT of G(s) is a unit ideal
impulse delayed by .
f(t)
y(s) =
1
Fig. 2
= 2et + tet et

th
th
=21=1
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 260
IN
1.
[Ans. A]
Given,
x t x t
t xp
t u t
taking Laplace transform on both sides
we get,
s
s
Taking inverse Laplace transform of X(s)
is
x t
xp
t u t
2.
[Ans. C]
Laplace transform of u(t) =1/s
Use Time shifting property:
If the L.T of f(t) is F(s),
Then L.T of x(t) = f(t
s s
f u t
3.
[Ans. D]
Transfer function is
Clearly all the zeros are on the RHS of
imaginary axis so the system is nonminimum phase.
Also, the poles z = 0.5 is inside the unity
circle thus the system is stable.
4.
[Ans. *]Range 67 to 69
P s
s
t
(
)
c s
t
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 261
2.5
f x
4.
2.5
(u x
u x
(u y
(B) f y
(C) f y
ECE  2008
Statement for Linked Answer Questions 5
&6
The impulse response h(t) of a linear
timeinvariant continuous time system is
given by h(t) = exp( 2t) u(t), where u(t)
denotes the unit step function.
5.
fr qu cy r sp s
f t s
system in terms of angular frequency is
v
y
u y
(B)
(D)
(C)
c s t
(D)
c s t
7.
(D) f y
(C)
6.
y
y
(A)
y
/
y
(u y
u y
ECE  2007
3.
If
is the autocorrelation function of a
real, widesense stationary random
process, then which of the following is
NOT true?
(A)

(B) 
(C)
(D) The mean square value of the
process is R(O)
y[n]=
xrx
r is
(A) X [k]2
(B)
r x
(C)
x r x
(D) 0
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 262
8.
(B)
(B)
(C)
(D)
The
corresponding
cumulative
distribution function (CDF) has the form
(A)
CDF
1
(A)
ECE  2009
10. The 4 point discrete Fourier transform
(DFT) of a discrete time sequence
{ 1, 0 ,2, 3} is
(A) [ 0 , 2 +2j , 2 , 2 2j]
(B) [2, 2 +2j , 6,2, 2j]
(C) [ 6 , 1 3j , 2 , 1 + 3j]
(D) [ 6 , 1 +3j , 0 , 1 3j]
11.
12.
1 x
CDF
1
1
(C)
1 x
CDF
1
(D)
1 x
CDF
1

X(t)
10kHz
1 x
f 
Y(t)
10kHz
9.
x
x
P x
xp
xp
is
the probability density function for the
real random variable X, over the entire x
axis. M and N are both positive real
numbers. The Equation relating M and N
is
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 263
13.
(B)
t
(C)
(D)
ECE  2010
14. The Nyquist sampling rate for the signal
s t
is given by
(A) 400 Hz
(B) 600 Hz
15.
16.
(C) 1200 Hz
(D) 1400 Hz
ECE  2011
17. The first six points of the 8point DFT of a
real valued sequence are 5, 1 j3, 0, 3 j4,
0 and 3+j4. The last two points of the DFT
are respectively
(A) 0, 1 j3
(C) 1+j3, 5
(B) 0, 1+j3
(D) 1 j3, 5
ECE  2013
18. The impulse response of a system is
h(t)=tu(t). For an input u(t 1), the
output is
(A)
u t
(B)
u t
(C)
u t
(D)
u t
EC/EE/IN  2013
19. For a periodic signal
v(t)=30sin100t+10cos300t+6sin
(500t / , the fundamental frequency
in rad/s is
(A) 100
(C) 500
(B) 300
(D) 1500
s t
ECE  2014
20. Consider two real valued signals, x(t)
bandlimited to [ 500 Hz, 500 Hz] and
y(t) bandlimited to [ 1 kHz, 1 kHz]. For
z(t) = x(t).y(t), the Nyquist sampling
frequency (in kHz) is ______.
21.
The system is
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 264
t
t
If G(s) is the Laplace transform of g(t),
then the number of poles of G(s) is________
27.
t
Let
z
qz
z
z
r
z . The quantities p,
q, r are real numbers.
r
all .
If
(A)
(B)
w
m
r  (
)
for
, then b equals
(C) /
(D) /
25.
A
modulated
signal
is
y t
m t c s
t
where the
baseband signal m(t) has frequency
components less than 5 kHz only. The
minimum required rate (in kHz) at which
y(t) should be sampled to recover m(t) is
_____
26.
300
EE  2006
1.
A discrete real all pass system has a pole
at z = 2 300 it, therefore
. If the
pz
Consider P
EE  2007
Statement for Linked Answer Questions 2
& 3:
2.
A signal is processed by a causal filter
with transfer function G(s). For a
distortion free output signal waveform,
G(s) must
(A) Provide zero phase shift for all
frequency
(B) Provide constant phase shift for all
frequency
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 265
4.
G(z)
50 Hz interference from
the sampling frequency
signal should be
(A) 50 Hz
(C)
(B) 100 Hz
(D)
is a real
) is the input
2.
f(Hz)
100 0
100 150
350 400
(A) 1 ms
(B) 4 ms
3.
600
(C) 2 ms
(D) 8ms
EE  2011
6.
A lowpass filter with a cutoff frequency
of 30 Hz is cascaded with a highpass
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 266
IN  2010
8.
4point DFT of a real discretetime signal
x[n] of length 4 is given by X[k ], n= 0,1 2,
3, and k =0, 1, 2 ,3.It is given that
X[0] =5,X[1]=1+ j1, X[2]=0.5. X[3] and
x[0] respectively are
(A) 1 j, 1.875
(B) 1 j, 1.500
(C) 1+j, 1.875
(D) 0.1 j0.1, 1.500
9.
y[n 1].
10.
IN  2009
6.
An analog signal is sampled at 9kHz. The
sequence so obtained is filtered by an FIR
filter with transfer function
H[z]
z . One of the analog
frequencies for which the magnitude
response of the filter is zero is
(A) 0.75kHz
(C) 1.5kHz
(B) 1kHz
(D) 2kHz
7.
(C)
(D)
z
z
z
is implemented
IN  2008
5.
Consider a discretetime system for which
the input x[n] and the output y[n] are
related as y[n] = x[n]
IN  2011
11. The continuous time signal
x(t) = c s
t
s
t is
sampled at the rate 100 Hz to get the
signal x t
x
t
,
= sampling period
The signal x t is passed through an ideal
low pass filter with cutoff frequency 100
Hz. The output of the filter is proportional
to
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 267
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
12.
c s
c s
c s
s
t
t
t
t
s
s
t
t
Re
IN  2014
13. A discretetime signal x[] is obtained by
sampling an analog signal at 10 kHz. The
signal x is filtered by a system with
impulse response
[] = 0.5{ []+ [ 1]}. The 3dB cutoff
frequency of the filter is:
(A) 1.25 kHz
(C) 4 .00 kHz
(B) 2.50 kHz
(D) 5.00 kHz
[Ans. B]
m(f)
500
500
20kHz
500
2.
m(t)*g(t)=m(F) G(f)
G(f)
20kHz
500
[Ans. B]
Sample
of
random
variable
m f
space
3.
[Ans. C]
Autocorrelation function is an even
function
4.
[Ans. B]
PSD is always a positive quantity
500
500 20kHz
20kH
z pass filtering with f
After low
z
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 268
5.
[Ans. C]
9.
[Ans. A]
P
P x
u t H(s) =
h(t) =
x
xp
xp
x
P x x
6.
[Ans. D]
Input x(t) = 2cos(2t)
Frequency response
 
Output
} x
10.
x t t
 
r {
[Ans. D]
4point DFT of sequence {1,0,2,3} is given
as
[
][ ]
{
}
11.
c s t
[ c s t
c s t
[Ans. A]
8.
[Ans. A]
P
f x
t]
c s t
7.
12.
t
t
u t
u t
[Ans. A]
h[2] =1 and h[3]= 1
}
h [n] = {
[Ans. B]
PSD of white noise
/ z
PSD of output
 f 
f
f
 f 
utput
s p w r
tu t
f x x
f f
r
r
f  curv
f
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 269
17.
13.
[Ans. B]
PS
18.
[Ans. B]
For 8points DFT;
x
x
x
x
x
x
it is conjugate symmetric about x[4]
x
x
[Ans. C]
= FT
tu t
s
c s
s t
[c s
c s
t ]
[Ans. A]
t
[Ans. D]
(A), (B) and (C) are wrong
c s
t
]
are rational
20.
[Ans. C]
Impulse response h(t) of the filter
matched to the input pulse s(t) existing
from t =0 to t= T is given by
h(t) =s[(tT)]
the operation of time reversal and then
time delay of T should be performed on
s(t) , to get h(t). This is equivalent to the
following statement;
scan the sketch of s(t) backward from t =T
to t =0 and draw the sketch of h(t)
forward from t=0 to t =T.
s(t) & h(t) are shown below in Fig.
21.
fu
p r
fu
t fr qu
cy
p r
[Ans. C]
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
ut
s [
16.
c s
19.
15.
y t
y s
[Ans. C]
u t
s c fu ct
14.
and
th
and
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 270
22.

S

23.
Pz
(P
z
z
qz
z
rz
z
z
z sz
r
25.
26.
z
s
rz
(z
) (z
z*
z
)
r z
(z
) (z
s *
r
Since, this zero lies on unit circle z
z
z
S c
r
27.
r
r
s
s
+
s
s
[Ans. B]
x
s
s
s
s
x t
s
s
s
s
So number of poles G(s) = 1
z
w
Poles of H(z) is
z
r
p ss syst m w
(q
[Ans. *] Range
z


[Ans. B]
c s
c s
m rm c  
c s


P w r f
24.
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 271
] x
] x
z
z
z
z
S t syst m w
st
f ts ut r
most pole will lie inside the unit circle.
Location of poles
[Ans. C]
For causal system, if all poles are inside
the unit circle then system is stable, and
converse is true for anticausal system.
2
z
z
3.
4.
[Ans. C]
For distortion free output phase shift must
be linear function of frequency i.e.
proportional to frequency this is because
delay to all frequency component will be
equal.
sc
s s t sf
y pt
(A)
5.
[Ans. A]
x(t) = sinc( t
h(t) =s
t
x(t) = s t
[Ans. A]
For distortion free output phase shift must
be linear function of
as will as all the
frequency component must be amplified
by
same
amount
so
z
corresponds to frequency
. While
z
corresponds to frequency 3 .
In order to have same amplification of
frequency component at
,
s t
s t
1/
h(t)= s t
1/
[Ans. A]
Given
g(1) =g(2) =1. Otherwise 0
i.e. g[n] =
therefore
G(z) = z
z
Therefore overall transfer function of
closed loop system
z
z
z
if
y
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 272
or
[Ans. C]
Sinusoid x(t) frequency say f .Hz
s mp
Or Y(j
So
7.
if
y(t) = s t
c
y(t) = s
z utput
z u t frqu
IN
1.
[Ans. D]
The frequency response,
f of LPF with
cutoff frequency, 30 Hz is shown in Fig. 1.
The frequency response
f of HPF with
cutoff frequency, 20 Hz is shown in Fig. 2
If these two filters are cascaded, the
overall frequency response of the
resultant system H(f) = H1(f) H2(f), shown
in Fig. 3, represents a BPF with
Bandwidth, B = 10 Hz
H1(f)
0 10 20 30 40
2.
ms=4ms
[Ans. B]
Since output y depends on input, such as
no delay, delay by 1 unit, delay by 2 unit,
delay by 4 unit, so it will sum all the
sample after 4Ts (maximum delay), to get
one sample of y[n].
t
4.
20
30
s t
Fig. 2
H(f)
20
Ts=
20 30
cy tr
[Ans. B]
Let X(f) be the spectrum of the
bandlimited signal, x(t). let Xs(f) be the
spectrum of the sampled signal xs(t)
3.
20
[Ans. A]
In order to reject the 50 Hz interference,
sampling frequency must be as low as the
noise frequency (so that they are
separated in time domain and has less
interference)
So, f
z
Fig. 1
H2(f)
30
cy
y(t) = s
30
fr qu
ms c
[Ans. C]
x(t) band limited to FHz
i.e., fm = FHz
y(t) = x(0.5t) + x(t) x(2t) is
x(t) maximum frequency =
Fig. 3
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 273
z
z
z
z
= max (F,
Nyquist rate =
=2
5.
m x frequency
z
[Ans. A]
for
where M is the number of points filter
here,
Now,
Take z transform:
z [
H(z) =
For the given x(n) =
z
So,
: :
: :
This is only in option (a).
8.
[Ans. A]
As signal is real,
X[3] = 1 J and
z
) u
6.
[Ans. B]
z
( )
z
c s
 (
 (
)
7.
c s
9.
[Ans. B]
c s
Given H(z) =
)
so,  ( )
w r
, if
f r
[Ans. A]
z
Let, z
then,
z
z
z
z
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 274
10.
11.
12.
[Ans. B]
The discrete time system with rational
transfer function , H(z) is stable if the
poles of H(z) lie inside the unit circle in
the z plane.
r
z
ts v rs
/ z t
stable , both the poles and zeros of H(z)
must lie inside the unit circle in the z
plane.
[Ans. B]
Highest frequency component in x(t) is
150 Hz. So, the Nyquist sampling rate is
300 Hz.
But, x(t) is sampled at 100 Hz. While
cos(100 t) with frequency 50 Hz will be
recovered satisfactorily after passing
through the low pass and sin(300t) will
get aliased resulting in filter output sin
(100 t).
Cos (100 t
s t c tribute to aliasing.
)(
[z
[(z
[ z
(z
z
) z
[Ans. B]
Given that
( )
]
c s
 (
)
cut ff
th
th
c s( )

s mp
r
c s
c s
c s
c s
) z
c s
z
z
]
[Ans. D]
From the given pole zero plot of the
digital filter, the system function
(
r
z
s mp
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 275
Control Systems
ECE  2010
2.
The transfer function Y(s)/R(s) of the
system shown is
(s)
(s)
s
1 1
1/s
u
s
1/s
1
1/s
(A) 0
(C)
(B)
The set of equations that correspond to
this signal flow graph is
x
x
(A) (x ) = [
] (x ) +
x
x
[
x
] (x )
x
tr ns r un t on
( )
+
4.
x
] (x )
x
(s)
( )
x
x
]( )
x
(s)
(s)
u
] .u /
x
[x ]
x
(D)
(s)
u
] .u /
x
x
( )
x
(C)
ECE  2014
3.
For the following system,
u
] .u /
x
(x )
x
(B)
(D)
( )
( )
s
s(s
s
( )
s(s
( )
s
s
)
)
(s)
u
] .u /
(A)
(s)
s
(s)
(C)
(B)
(D)
tr ns r un t on
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 276
EE  2007
1.
The system shown in figure below.
c0
b0
b1
1/s
EE  2010
3.
As shown in the figure, a negative
feedback system has an amplifier of gain
100 with 10% tolerance in the forward
path, and an attenuator of value 9/100 in
the feedback path. The overall system
gain is approximately:
C1
1/s
Control Systems
(A) 10 1%
(B) 10 2%
(C) 10 5%
(D) 10 10%
With
(A) X = s
EE  2014
4.
The closedloop transfer function of a
Y= (s
(B) X = 1, Y =
)
)
(s
s
( s
(C) X =
(D) X
s
(s
)
(s
The steady
( s
s
s
(s)
system is
)
s
(s)
EE  2008
2.
A function y(t) satisfies the following
differential equation,
()
(s)
Assuming
n
the inputoutput transfer
+ y(t) = (t),
( )
(s)
where
(t) is the delta function.
Assuming zero initial condition and
denoting the unit step function by u(t),
y(t) can be of the form
(A)
(C) u(t)
(B)
(D)
u(t)
( )
( )
(s)
( )
(s)
( )
(s)
( )
th
(s)
th
,
function
s
s
s
s
s
s
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 277
6.
(s)
(s)
IN  2009
3.
A filter is represented by the signal flow
graph shown in the figure. Its input x(t)
and output is y(t).
The transfer function of the filter is
Control Systems
X(s)
then G(s) is
( )
(A) 1
(B) s
Y(s)
(C) 1/s
(D)
1/s
1/s
(A)
1
s
(B)
s 1
s(s2 2)
s(s2 1)
s2 2
(A)
(B)
(D)
(C)
(C)
(D)
)
)
IN  2007
2.
A feedback control system with high K, is
shown in the figure below:
R(s) +
Y(s)
(C)
2
IN  2011
4.
The signal flow graph of a system is given
below.
R
1/s
(B)
(A)
IN  2006
1.
The signal flow graph representation of a
control system is shown below. The
Y(s)
transfer function
is computed as
R(s)
R(s)
1/S
G(s)
C(s)
(D)
)
(
)
(
)
(
IN  2012
5.
The transfer function of a ZeroorderHold system with sampling interval T is
H(s)
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
IN  2013
6.
The complex function tanh(s) is analytic
over a region of the imaginary axis of the
complex s plane if the following is TRUE
everywhere in the region for all integers n
(A) Re(s) =0
(C) Im(s)
(
(B) Im (s) n
th
th
(D) Im(s)
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 278
7.
( )
( )
for
Control Systems
IN  2014
8.
A plant has an openloop transfer
function,
(s)
(s)
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
(s
)(s
)(s
)
The approximate model obtained by
retaining only one of the above poles,
which is closest to the frequency response
of the original transfer function at low
frequency is
(s)
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
2.
[Ans. B]
(s)
(s)
x
(s)
x
s
x
(s)
x
x
(s)
(s) [
s
(s)
(s)
o (s)
x
x
x
u
x
x
x
u
x
x
x
x
x
u
x
x
[ ] [
][ ] [
] 0u 1
x
x
One can denote any state by any name
So, that answer is
x
x
u
[x ] = [
] (x ) + [
] .u /
x
x
(s)
r or
3.
(s)
(s)
s
(s)
(s)
[Ans. D]
When x (s)
(s)
(s)
s
s
s
y(s)
x (s)
th
th
s
s(s
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 279
4.
[Ans. C]
Control Systems
(s)
(s)
(s)
(s)
s
s
s
s
s
All the loops touch forward paths
(
(s)
(s)
(s)
(s)
s
s
s
s
s ng M sons g n ormul
(s)
(s)
s
(s)
(s)
(s)
(s)
(s)
(s)
EE
1.
)s (
s) (s
s) (s
(
(
)
s
)
s
()
(s)
[Ans. D]
(s)
(s)
xy
(s)
yz
Comparing eg. (I) and (ii), we get
s
xy
s
s
s
yz
s
s
Hence option (D) is correct
s
s
s
( )
2.
[Ans. D]
Take LT on both sides,
( )
s.Y(s)+Y(s) =1 Y(s) = (
y(t) =
u(t)
[Ans. A]
T.F =
th
th
=10
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 280
6.
Also,
Control Systems
[Ans. B]
(s)
(s)
= 1%
(s)
1%
4.
[Ans. 0]
(s)
(s)
s
( or un t st p)
(s)
s(s
y(t)
y st t
s(s
( )
( )
( )
( )
So put G(s) = s
( )
( )
( )
IN
1.
Loops:
(
(s)
(s)
n
( )
( ( )
( )
)
s
num
( )1
[Ans. A]
( )
( )
( )
s
1 C(s)
rror
G(s)
1/s
[Ans. C]
Using Masons gain formula
Paths:
R(s)
l m sy(s)
t
5.
( )( )(
s s
) ( )( )(
s s
(s)
(s)
)( )(
s
s
(s)
(s)
(
.
2.
(
[Ans. C]
In this case, open loop gain sensitivity is
measured with respect to KG. Because
here open loop gain = KG
s
s
s
s
th
th
th
)(
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 281
)( ) (
s ount)
6.
Control Systems
[Ans. D]
t n (s)
)(
( or l rg
s
os
sn
os
sn
os
( n
)
s n (s)
os (s)
7.
[Ans. A]
u(s)
3.
y(s)
forward path =
. /;
(
( )
( )
4.
[Ans. A]
(
(
)
)
Loop =
[Ans. C]
(s)
=1 (
)
8.
(
(
5.
[Ans. A]
Writing the given open loop transfer in
)
)
form of
[Ans. A]
The transfer function of a ZeroorderHold system having a sampling interval T
is
g t
/.
/.
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 282
Control Systems
x(t)
(A)
(B)
2.
3.
y(t)
sin .t
(C)
sin .t
ECE  2008
6.
Step responses of a set of three secondorders underdamped systems all have the
same percentage overshoot. Which of the
following diagrams represents the poles
of three systems?
(A)
j
sin t
(B)
j
or t
. The transfer
function of the system is
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
(C)
j
ECE  2007
4.
The frequency response of a linear, timeinvariant system is given by H(f)=
5.
(D)
)u(t)
(B) 5 (1
)u(t)
)u(t)
(D)
(1
)(
The
secondorder
(
(
)(
)(
)
)
(C)
(D)
(
(
7.
A
linear,
timeinvariant,
causal
continuous time system has a rational
transfer function with simple poles at
s
and s
, and one simple zero
at s
. A unit step u(t) is applied at
the input of the system. At steady state,
)
)
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 283
Control Systems
4.
y(t)
1
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
9.
s
s
s
Group II
1.
at
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
ECE  2009
10. The unit step response of an underdamped second order system has steady
state value of 2. Which one of the
following transfer function has these
properties?
y(t)
2.
y(t)
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
ECE  2010
11. A system with the transfer function
( )
has an output
( )
3.
y(t)
1
t
y(t)
os . t
x(t)
p os . t
p r m t r p s
(A)
(C) 1
(B)
(D)
ECE  2011
12. The differential equation
y
x(t)
describes
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 284
Control Systems
(s)
(s)
(A)
y(t)
(B)
t
(D)
15.
16.
The input
u(t) where u(t) is the
unit step function, is applied to a system
(B)
y(t)
(C)
y(t)
. If the initial
v lu o t output s
t n t v lu
of the output at steady state is _______.
t
17.
(D)
y(t)
(s)
(s)
(t)
(t)
t
s
ECE  2012
13. A system with transfer function
)
(s
)(s
(s)
(s
)(s
)(s
)
is excited
y s n( t). The steadystate
output of the system is zero at
(A)
r
s
(C)
r
s
(B)
r
s
(D)
r
s
ECE  2014
14. For the
(s)
following
)(
feedback
18.
(s)
(s)
s(s
(A) 16
(B) 4
system
(C) 2
(D) 1
EE  2007
1.
Consider the feedback control system
shown below which is subjected to a unit
step input. The system is stable and has
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 285
s
+
5.
KP
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
Control Systems
EE  2009
6.
The unitstep response
feedback system with
of a unity
open loop
)(
is
0.75
0.5
0.25
0
0
2.
3.
EE  2008
4.
The transfer function of a linear time
invariant system is given as
G(s) =
2
Time
(A) 0.5
(B) 2
(C) 4
(D) 6
EE  2010
7.
, the approximate
1s
(A) 0
(B) 0.1
th
th
(C) 1
(D) 10
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 286
IN  2007
Common Data for Questions 1 & 2
The following figure represents a
proportional control scheme of a first
order system with transportation lag.
R(s)
(s
1.
2.
5.
The value of p is
(A) 6
(B) 12
C(s)
Control Systems
IN  2009
6.
is
IN  2008
3.
If a first order system and its time
response to a unit step input are as
shown below, the gain K is
y(t)
r(t)
(C) 14
(D) 16
(s)
r(t)
d(t)
+
1
1
S(S+1)
y(t)
0.8
7.
(D)
(B)
(A) 0.25
(B) 0.8
(C) 1
(D) 4
Let (s)
ontroll r I (t) s n t
the amplitude of the frequency component of
y(t) due to d(t) is
8.
.The time
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 287
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
IN  2011
11. The unitstep response of a negative unity
feedback system with the openloop
transfer function G(s) =
(A)
(B)
IN  2010
9.
A unity feedback system has an open loop
transfer function (s)
(s)
(
(A) 0
(B) 0.5
(C)
(D)
ECE/EE/IN  2013
12. Assuming zero initial condition, the
response y(t) of the system given below
to a unit step input u(t) is
(A) u(t)
(B) t u(t)
(s)
Y(s)
U(s)
is
.The value
Control Systems
(C)
u(t)
(D)
u(t)
(C) 1
(D) 2
(s
[Ans. A]
y(t) x(t)
(s)
(s)
(
x(t)
utput
s s
(
)u(t)
When t =
at steady state
output = 1
s n(t)u(t)
y(t)
2.
s
s
(t)
(s)
s n .t
3.
[Ans. B]
,st p r spons s
[Ans. C]
(t)
(s)
(s)
s
s
4.
[Ans. B]
()
(s) (s)
output
s(s
(s
)s
( )
s
th
th
.s
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 288
t p r spons
.s
ns
s .s
s
s
s
(t) (
)u(t)
Which is also the required impulse
response of the system.
/
(s
8.
When s =
[Ans. D]
Comparing the given transfer functions
with
(s)
5.
y(t)
u(t)
s
)(s
ln
s
Therefore P is undamped
[Ans. D]
In dominant pole concept the factor that
has to be eliminated should be in time
constant form
(s
Control Systems
s ov r
/ (s
.
s
mp
s rt
6.
[Ans. C]
ov rs oot
p n s on s
r
os
Where is the angle made by pole from
negative real axis.
To make M same, should be the same.
7.
[Ans. C]
Transfer functions
(s
)
(s)
(s
)(s
)
mp
9.
[Ans. A]
10.
[Ans. B]
Steady state value = 2
Denominator
underdamped
11.
[Ans. B]
(s)
or
(s)
s un
s
(s) (s)
Output, (s)
v n l m s (s)
s (s
)
(s
)(s
)
mp
Input (s)
or l m
lly
1=
P=
(s
)
(s
)(s
)
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 289
12.
[Ans. A]
y
y
y x(t)
t
t
Taking Laplace Transform of both sides
(s)
s (s)
s (s)
(s)
(s)
( s
)
(s)
s
s
ol s r
ts
[Ans. C]
(s)
x(s)
15.
(s
(s
)(s
)
)(s
)(s
)
Where
damped natural frequency
undamped natural frequency
damping ratio
y(s)
14.
16.
[Ans. C]
(s
s
s
pt on
o
(s)
(s)
y( )
17.
(s)
u(t)
(s)
s ttl ng t m
pt on
(s
)(s
)
.
/
(s
)(s
)(s
)
s
For applying final value theorem system
must be stable, mean all poles should lie
in left half plane
) (s
So (s
)
r
s
s)
(s
)(s
)
(s+1)(s+2)+0.15+5s=0
s
s
s
s
(s)
pt on
(s
)
(s) (s)
o
(s
)
(s
)(s
)
(s
)(s
)
(s
)
s
s
s
Hence Option C is correct
As poles are on the right hand side of splane so given system is unstable system.
Only option (A) represents unstable
system.
13.
Control Systems
(s)
s
l m s y(s)
lm
s
s
(s)
(s)
s
( )
s
(s) (s)
)(s
)(s
s
s
(s)
(s)
(s)
(s) (s)
(s)
(s) (s)
(s) (s)
(s) *
+
(s) (s)
(s)
(s)
(s) (s)
(s)
th
th
(s) (s)
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 290
Control Systems
(s)
(s)
r
(s)
s
s
s
s
2.
[Ans. C]
m
l m s (s)
l ms
s
s s
s
s
+
18.
[Ans. C]
r ns r un t on
or
or
r un t
t
t
Taking Laplace transform
syst m
(s)
[Ans. A]
Step input
s
t
(s)
(s)
(s)
(s)
(s)
(s)
t (s)
(s)
(s)
(s)
)(
s
Overshoot
/.
Comparing with
s
s
s
.
(s)
(s)
s
Steady state value of Z
t s (s)
t
(s)
s
.s
(s)
(s)
I(s)
Characteristic eq.
n (s)
(s)
(s)
(s)
(s)
(s) (s)
(s)
(s)
(s)
(s)
(s)
(s) [
]
(s)
(s)
(s)
(s) *
+
(s)
(s)
(s)
) I(s)
(s)
I(s)
EE
1.
= 0.163 or 16.3%
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 291
3.
[Ans. C]
5.
Control Systems
[Ans. C]
M(s)
s
s
Comparing with standard form
M(s)
Setting time (t )
Square Wave
[Ans. D]
t
y st t v lu o r spons
Input is unit step
So steady state error
ms
For
(s)
(s)
w
t
z
ms
(s
(s)
(s) (s)
ppl
(s)
s (s)
(s) (s)
s
t
(
[Ans. A]
r(t) un t mplus
(t
)
R(s) = 1[r(t)] =
(s)
(s)
(s) s
)(s
s
Steady state error using final value
theorem
t s (s)
z
ms
(s)
(s) (s)
(s)
rror
greater than t
For
z
4.
ms
For
)(
tt
s
7.
[Ans. C]
s
s
Steady state value of output, using final
value theorem
t s (s)
s
t
s
s
] ( s s rst or
s
.c Gain=2, T=1 sec
For 98%
t
s
th
th
th
r syst m)
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 292
8.
[Ans. A]
R(s)
Control Systems
Given
C(s)
+
G(s)
,
4.
[Ans. B]
(s)
n t
s (s)

(s)
x(t)
,u(t)
x(s)
s
(
u(t
s
)
)

(s)
5.
[Ans. B]
6.
[Ans. A]
( )
( )
IN
1.
t n ( )
t n ( )
r
s 
d(t)= (t)
(s)
s
or r(t)
u(t)
os t on l rror onst nt
t (s)
8.
(s
]
)
( )
s(s
(
+
)
)
(s)
, (s)
(s)
y(s)
ontroll r
So
s
s
s
(s) *
y(s) *
+
+
)
s(s
)
s(s
y(s)
s
(
)
(s)
s s
t
t (s)
[Ans. D]
lm
(s)
(s) wor s s
s
s
s(s
)
(
[Ans. B]
s
(s)
y(s)
OR
(s)
(s)
(
)
(t)
s nt *
(s)
3.
(t) [
[Ans. B]
or
)
(
( )
s
s
[Ans. D]
Output due to
7.
(
)
/
)
s
m
( )
Phase lag
It satisfy ,
(s)
/.
[Ans. D]
(s)
2.
y(s)


x(s)
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 293
9.
[Ans. D]
T(s) =
and
or
10.
Control Systems
or
K = 9.
[Ans. B]
(s)
s(s
)
For unit Ramp input, r(t)
t u(t)
lo ty rror onst nt
(s)
t
11.
[Ans. D]
(s)
(s) s
The unit step response is given by
(s)
(t)
12.
s(s
(
) u(t)
[Ans. B]
H(s)
u(s)
Y(s)
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, Keshava Krupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 294
Control Systems
(s
s
)
s
C(s)
)
4.
is
(A) 0
(B) 1
(C) 2
(D) 3
ECE  2012
5.
The Feedback system shown below
oscillates at 2 rad/s when
(s)
(s
s
(s
(A) 1, 0.75
(B) 2, 0.75
(C) 1, 1
(D) 2, 2
ECE  2007
2.
If the closedloop transfer function of a
control system is given as,
(s)
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
)(
, then it is
an unstable system
an uncontrollable system
a minimum phase system
a nonminimum phase system
, where
is a parameter.
ECE  2014
6.
The forward path transfer function of a
unity negative feedback system is given
by
(s)
(s
)(s
)
The value of K which will place both the
poles of the closedloop system at the
same location, is _______.
7.
with p a positive
G(s)
(s)
ECE  2008
3.
A certain system has transfer function
G(s) =
)
s
EE  2007
1.
The system shown in the figure is
U1 +
s
s
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
th
U2
+
stable
unstable
conditionally stable
stable for input u1, but unstable for
input u2
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 295
2.
)
)
oscillation then
(A) The frequency of this oscillation
must be
rad/s.
6.
must be 4 or
rad/s
s(s
)(s
EE  2009
4.
The first two rows of Routh's tabulation
of a third order equation are as follows.
s3
2
2
2
s
4
4.
This means there are
(A) two roots at s= j and one root in
right half splane
(B) two roots at s = j2 and one root in
left half splane
(C) two roots at s= j2 and one root in
right half splane
(D) two roots at s = j and one root in
left half splane
Control Systems
EE  2014
7.
In the formation of RouthHurwitz array
for a polynomial, all the elements of a row
have zero values. This premature
termination of the array indicates the
presence of
(A) only one root at the origin
(B) imaginary roots
(C) only positive real roots
(D) only negative real roots
8.
(s
s
)s
(s)
)
(
)s
EE  2011
5.
An open loop system represented by the
transfer function G(s) = (
)
)(
is
9.
(s)
th
s(s
th
)(s
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 296
IN  2006
1.
The range of the controller gains (Kp, Ki)
that makes the closed loop control system
(shown in the following figure) stable is
given as
(s)
(s)
s
(s
Ki
20
12
K
(B) Ki < 0 and Kp i 20
12
(C) Ki 0 and Kp 0
(D) Ki 0 and Kp
Ki
20
12
)(s
Control Systems
IN  2008
2.
A closed loop control system is shown
below. The range of the controller gain KC
which will make the real parts of all the
closed loop poles more negative than 1 is
+
s(s
(s) _
(A) KC> 4
(B) KC> 0
( )
(C) KC> 2
(D) KC< 2
IN  2010
3.
The open loop transfer function of a unity
gain feedback system is given by:
G(s) =
(
(
)
)(
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 297
Control Systems
(
,
(s
(
(s
s
From Routh array, s
k =2 & a = 0.75
)
)
[Ans. D]
System is stable, controllable and nonminimum phase system.
3.
[Ans. C]
losed loop gain is
( )
(s) s
s
s
Characteristic equation
(s) s
(
)s
los loop system is stable only for
r or or ll pos t v o
the closed loop system is stable.
[Ans. C]
Perform Routh analysis to the polynomial
in denominator of G(S).
1
3
5
s
2
6
3
s
()
s
(
s
1
a
)(s
)
(s
)(s
)
s
s
(s)
,
7.
[Ans. A]
Characteristic equation is 1+G(S)H(S)= 0
(
= k + 1;
3
Number of sign changes =2
1+
6.
)
(
(1+k)
(
)
s
s
s =
+ (k + 1) = 0; a
4a = k + 1;
From options, k = 2, a = 0.75
))
2.
5.
(s)
4.
o m x mum v lu o
EE
1.
[Ans. D]
u ( )
s
s
+ s (k + 2) + (k + 1) = 0
k+2
k+2
y ( )
s
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 298
( )
(s
(s
(
)
)
5.
[Ans. B]
For G(s), poles are at 2 and 3
Stable
Also, zeroes are to the right of Splane
nonminimum phase type
6.
[Ans. A]
At gain across over frequency (
magnitude of ( ) is 1.
 (
)
y ( )
s
s
s
( )
(
Phase of (
)s
)p
s o
log
log
7.
[Ans. B]
It is a special case under RH stability
criteria. Imaginary roots are calculated
using auxiliary polynomial
8.
64+3k
s
64+3k
(or)
For K = 16,
[Ans. C]
(s)
( (
)(
)
Characteristics equation
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
(
)s
rt r
1
[Ans. D]
s
s
(s
s
)(s
1
(
1
)
s
(
(
(
)
)(
)
( ) t
m gn tu o
 (
)
Gain margin=
),
)
(
[Ans. B]
T(s) =
(s
)(s
)
Hence unstable as it has pole at right
hand side of Splane
3.
Phase of margin =
2.
Control Systems
S=
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 299
Control Systems
[Ans. 5]
Characteristic equation
)(s
)
s(s
s
(s
)
s)(s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
IN
1.
s
s
s
s
1
4
5
6
4
K
s
2.
[Ans. C]
)
s(s
s
s
k
0
[Ans. A]
Characteristic equation of system
(s) (s)
G(s) H(s) =
For system to be stable all the zeroes of
G(s) H(s) should lie in left of (
) plane
So for (s) (s)
The system will be always stable.
or
12
M n mum v lu
9.
3.
[Ans. D]
1 + G(s) H(s) = 0
(s + 1) (s + 2) + k(s+3) = 0
System is stable, for all positive K.(from
Routh Hurwitz criterion)
(or)
4.
[Ans. D]
3
4
S
0(
1
4
[Ans. D]
Characteristic equation is
s(s+2)(s+10)+(
)
s
s
s
3
4
)
s
)(
S=
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 300
Control Systems
are shown
(A)
(s) (s)
(B)
(s) (s)
(C)
(s) (s)
)(
(
(
)(
(
(s) (s)
(D)
)
)(
)
(
)
)(
)
)
ECE  2014
4.
Consider the feedback system shown in
the figure. The Nyquist plot of G(s) is also
shown. Which one of the following
conclusions is correct?
(s)
Im (
+
+
G(s)
Im(s)
Re(s)
P
(A) and 00
(B) and 450
(C) and 00
(D) and 450
5.
ECE  2011
3.
The root locus plot for a system is given
below. The open loop transfer function
corresponding to this plot is given by
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 301
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
6.
)(
)(
)(
(
(
)(
)(
)(
)
)(
(C)
)(
Control Systems
)
)
+1
(D)
+2
+1
+2
nt rs ts t root lo us t po nt
The distance from the origin to point A is
given as 0.5. The value of K at point A
is__________
EE  2006
1.
A Closed loop system has the
characteristic function
(s
)(s
) + K (s
) = 0. Its root
locus plot against K is
j
(A)
(B)
EE  2010
2.
The characteristic equation of a closedloop system is
)(s
)
(s
)
s(s
.
Which of the following statements is true?
(A) Its roots are always real
(B) It cannot have a breakaway point in
,s 0
the range
(C) Two of its roots tend to infinity along
the asymptotes Re, (D) It may have complex roots in the
right half plane.
EE  2011
3.
The open loop transfer function G(s) of a
unity feedback control system is given as,
G(s) =
+1
+2
+1
+2
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 302
EE  2014
4.
The root locus of a unity feedback system
is shown in the figure
Control Systems
2.
(B)
3.
The closed
system is
(s)
( )
(s)
(s)
( )
(s)
(s)
( )
(s)
(s)
( )
(s)
)(s
(s
)(s
(s
)(s
(s
)(s
)(
)(
(
(
)
)(
IN  2009
5.
A unity feedback system has the transfer
1.5+j1.5
(A) 11.3
(B) 21.2
(D)
X
4
)(
IN  2008
4.
The open loop transfer function of a unity
IN  2006
1.
The root locus of a plant is given in the
following figure. The root locus crosses
X
8
)(
(s
function
)
)
(C) 41.25
(D) 61.2
IN  2007
Statement for Linked Answer Questions 2
and 3
A transfer function with unity DC gain has
three poles at
and
and no
finite zeros. A plant with this transfer
function is connected with a proportional
(
(
IN  2011
6.
Consider the secondorder system with
the characteristic equation
)
(s
)
s(s
. Based on the
properties of the root loci, it can be shown
that the complex portion of the root loci
of the given system for
is
described by a circle, and the two
breakaway points on the real axis are
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 303
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
IN  2012
7.
The open loop transfer function of a unity
gain negative feedback control system is
given by G(s) =
)(
ngl
Control Systems
IN  2014
8.
A loop transfer function is given by :
(s
)
(s) (s)
(
)
The point of intersection of the
asymptotes of G(s)H(s) on the real axis in
the splane is at ___________.
t n
. /
t n
. /
(B)
(C)
t n
. /
(D)
t n
. /
[Ans. D]
ro u t o p sor r wn rom op n loop pol s to t t po nt
pro u t o p sor r wn rom op n loop z ro to t t po nt
2.
[Ans. B]
(
(
5.
)
)
[Ans. B]
Angle of departure is
Where
z
z
3.
4.
[Ans. B]
From plot we can observe that one pole
terminates at one zero at position
and
three poles terminates to
. It means
there are four poles and 1 zero. Pole at
goes on both sides. It means there are two
poles at
[Ans. D]
For larger values of K, it will encircle the
critical point (
) which makes
closedloop system unstable.
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 304
(s
po nt w
r t
(s
)(s
)
Zero of OLTF s = 1: z = 1
Poles of OLTF s =
symptot s m t
The picture
forms to this
For option C, centroid is at 0 which is
wrong
Hence Option B is correct.
6.
Control Systems
l n
Angles of asymptotes
(
)
(
( )
or
( )
[Ans. B]
Characteristic function
(s
)(s
)
(s
)
(s
)
(s) (s)
(s
)(s
)
Open loop transfer function
(s) (s)
( )
1
Option (B) is correct on the basis of above
analysis.
( )
EE
1.
2.
[Ans. C]
Characteristic equation
)(s
)
(s
)
s(s
(s
)
s(s
)(s
)
Comparing with 1 + G(s) H(s) = 0
G(s)H(s) = openloop transfer function
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 305
(s
)(s
)
s(s
Number of zeros = Z = 1, zero at
Number of poles = P = 3
Poles at 0,
&
Number of branches terminating at
infinity =
Angle of asymptotes
(
)
(
Control Systems
[Ans. C]
n
pol s
ntr o
z ros
)
X
Im g n ry
G(s) H(s) =
[Ans. A]
(s)
(s
s (s
(s)
(s)
IN
1.
)(
(s)
s)
)
(s
)(s
s(s
(s)
)(s
(s)
(s)
Angle of asymptotes
(s)
(s) (s)
[Ans. C]
ntro
(s)
(s)
s s
ts
( Z 1)
so Rool locus is
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 306
3.
(s
s )
(s
)
We need to find the breakaway point.
o
[Ans. B]
With unity DC gain, poles at
s
n
and no finite zeros
l nt
(s
)(s
)(s
s
)( s
s) (s
s )
s
s
s s
s
(
)s
s
s
ow s
is not the breakaway point
(
)s
o s
For all the three root loci to meet at a
single point, we need that this equation
has equal roots.
)
o(
(s
s
( )
(
( )
s
s
s
s
)(
)(
)
(
(
)
row has zero elements if 6k = 60 or
k = 10 then 2 roots lie on the imaginary axis
given by s
s
. If k > 10,
the root at s t to
o s pl n
4.
so
)
(
) (
(
)
or
st
r qu r
.(
)(
6.
[Ans. C]
K=
)
) (
(
7.
s
s(s
)(s
(s (
s(s
(s)
[Ans. B]
(s
)
s (s
)
For unity feedback,
equation is 1+ G(s) = 0
s
s
s
[Ans. D]
(s)
5.
) /
S=
v lu
=0
s
s
S=
RL exists at 3.41
(
)
(
)
)(
[Ans. C]
(s)
or
[Ans. C]
T(s)=
Control Systems
)
))(s (
)(s
)
))
(s)
characteristic
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 307
Control Systems
. /1
t nt
[
* [
( )
t n
t nt
t n
8.
( )]
( )]+
( )
[Ans.
]
Int r s t on o symptot s
sum o pol s sum o z ros
num r o pol s num r o z ro
(
) ( )
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 308
Control Systems
)(
. The gain
Consider
two
(s)
and
transfer
(s)
G(s)
4.
5.
functions,
. The
3.
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
ECE  2011
Common Data Question 6 and 7:
The input output transfer function of a
( )
plant
(s)
y
s(s
l nt
ECE  2009
Common Data for Question 4 and 5
The Nyquist plot of a stable transfer
function G(s) is shown in the figure. We
are interested in the stability of the closed
loop system in the feedback configuration
shown
6.
1/s
1/s
1/s
100 y
Im
(B)
1/s
1/s
1/s
100
Re
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 309
Control Systems
(D)
(C)
1/s
1/s
1/s
100
(D)
1/s
1/s
7.
1/s
100
EE  2006
1.
Consider the following Nyquist plots of
loop transfer functions over = 0 to
= . Which of these plots represents a
stable closed loop system?
(1)
Im
R
=
8.
Re
1
Im
(2)
Re
(B)
(3)
Im
j5
=
Re
(C)
(4)
Im
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
th
Re
(1) only
all, except (1)
all, except (3)
(1) and (2) only
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 310
EE  2007
2.
If x = Re G(j ), and y = Im G(j ) then for
, the Nyquist plot for
G(s) = 1 / s(s+1) (s+2) becomes
asymptotic to the line
(A) x = 0
(C) x = y
(B) x =
Control Systems
(A)
Im
3/4
Re
(D) d = y /
EE  2009
3.
The polar plot of an open loop stable
system is shown below. The closed loop
system is
=0
=0
(B)
Im
Imaginary
Real
Re
3/4
(C)
=0
Im
Re
1/6
Im
(D)
EE  2010
5.
The frequency response of
(s)
)(s
) plotted in the
,s(s
complex ( ) plane (for
) is
Re
=0
1/6
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 311
EE  2011
6.
A twoloop position control system is
shown below.
Motor
s(s
IN  2009
4.
A unity feedback control loop with an
open transfer function of the form
(s)
(s)
s
Tachogenerator
by G(s) = (
5.
G(s) =
2.
3.
)(
6.
(C) 125
(D) 125
v lu o
or t
mp ng r t o to
be 0.5, corresponding to the dominant
closedloop complex conjugate pole pair
is
(A) 250
(C) 75
(B) 125
(D) 50
IN  2012
7.
The open loop transfer function of a unity
negative feedback control system is given
by
G(s) =
is inserted
(A) 250
(B) 250
(s)
(C)
(D)
IN  2011
Common Data for Questions 5 and 6
The openloop transfer function of a unity
negative feedback control system is given
IN  2008
1.
For the closed loop system shown below
to be stable, the value of time delay TD (in
seconds) should be less than
(A)
(B)
(s)
Control Systems
)(
system is
(A) 10.8 dB
(B) 22.3dB
(C) 34.1dB
(D) 45.6dB
IN  2014
8.
The loop transfer function of a feedback
control system is given by
(s) (s)
)( s
)
s(s
Its phase crossover frequency (in rad/s),
approximated to two decimal places, is __.
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 312
Control Systems
6.
[Ans. D]
or option (D).
[Ans. D]
( )
(s)
(s
)(s
or g n m rg n
t n ( )
t n
( )
t n
. /
7.
[Ans. C]
(s) (s)
)
s(s
(
)
t n
phase
crossover
=0
o (s)
For
[ ]
Gain margin =
log
t n (
0 1
r
) (
) (
3.
= 0 axis only
0 1
8.
[Ans. D]
At
(
GM = 20 log
4.
[Ans. B]
5.
[Ans. C]
(
At
log
) (
(
) (
log
[Ans. A]
Assuming no.of open loop poles in the
RHS of s plane = P = 0
Complete nyquist plots
Im
) (
GM = 20

(
At
EE
1.
[Ans. A]
( )
=5
So ( ) is a straight line parallel to
axis.
) (
M n
[Ans. C]
BW depends only on denominator and is
equal to (
So gain margin =
frequency,
ut s
(
2.
(s)
s not tr ns r un t on o
) (
PM =
No.of encirclements = N = 0
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 313
N=PZ=0
Control Systems
2.
[Ans. B]
Imj
) (
(
(
)(
symptot to x =
3.
)
)(
[Ans. D]
2 clockwise encirclement of 1 + j0
= 0; N = 2
=2
Z = number of closed loop ploes in RHS
Hence system is unstable
4.
[Ans. D]
Open loop transfer function, G(s) =
Put s =
 s lw ys
(
Im
or ny v lu o
)
n t
(p
ross r qu n y)
 (
)
) )
((
log
5.
[Ans. A]
(
As
(
((
G(
)
)
))
s
( ) 0 +
Option (A) satisfies above
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 314
6.
[Ans. A]
T(s) =
2.
(
M is dependent on K
(A) is correct
is independent of K
(B) is not
correct
T(J ) = (
[Ans. C]
( )
t n ( )
( )
Control Systems
3.
[Ans. A]
( )
4.
[Ans. A]
M o (s)
t n
( )
( )
( ) n ( ) r p rt lly orr t
(
[Ans. C]
(s) =
s
(s)
t low r qu n s
t g r qu n s
IN
1.
t n (
)
t n (
(
(
PM of
y(s)
5.
t n
)
)
(s) =
[Ans. B]
PM = 45= 180
t n
(s)
. /)
t n
. /
rad/sec
( )
y(s)
. /
(
G(s) =
For system to be stable G(s) should lie in
the left of ( 1, 0)
For finding the critical/ marginal value
apply phase condition
w
6.
[Ans. A]
r t r st
(s
)
s
s
s (
The dominant poles are given by
)
s
s (
or (s)
(s)
w
qu t on
s

So w
or
7.
[Ans. C]
= 15 r/s
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 315
G.M in dB =
8.
log 0
Control Systems
s(s
)( s
or
(s) (s)
t n
t n ( )
t n (
As t n
So
=1
r s
r s
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 316
Control Systems
ECE  2010
4.
For the asymptotic Bode magnitude plot
shown below, the system transfer
function can be
M gn tu
( )
1.
2.
(C) 0.84
(D) 0.74
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
ECE  2014
5.
The phase
( )
margin
)(
)(
in
)
degrees
calculated
of
using
6.
7.
)(dB)
60
20 dB/decade
40
40 dB/decade
20
0.1
10
2
0
(
(
100
)
)
60 dB/decade
(A)
(B)
)(
(
)(
(C)
)
)
(D)
(r
(
)(
)(
s) n log s l
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 317
EE  2006
1.
The Bode magnitude plot of
(
)(
H (j ) = (
(
(A)
)
)
Control Systems
EE  2008
2.
The asymptotic Bode magnitude plot of a
minimum phase transfer function is
shown in the figure.
is
(
40
40 dB/ decade
(dB)
20
20
20 dB/ decade
(r
s)
(log scale)
0.1
0
+1
+3
+2
Log ( )
20
0 dB/ decade
(B)
)
40
20
+1
+2
+3
Log ( )
EE  2009
3.
The asymptotic approximation of the
logmagnitude vs frequency plot of a
system containing only real poles and
zeros is shown. Its transfer function is
40 dB / dec
(C)
60 dB / dec
80 dB
40
20
+1
+2
+3
Log ( )
0.1
(A)
(D)
(
)(
(B)
(
2 5
)
(
)(
(C)
)
)
(
)(
(
(D)
25
)
)
)
)(
)
40
EE  2014
4.
The Bode magnitude plot of the transfer
20
function (s)
0
+1
+2
+3
(
.
)(
/(
)
).
is shown
below:
Note that 6 dB/octave = 20 dB/decade.
The value of is_______
Log ( )
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 318
t v
t v
Control Systems
t v
t v
t v
t v
(r
s )
IN  2008
2.
The Bode asymptotic plot of a transfer
function is given below. In the frequency
range shown, the transfer function has
dB
5.
6.
+ 20dB / decade
20dB / decade
0dB / decade
log
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
)
lop
log
IN  2010
3.
The asymptotic Bode magnitude plot of a
lead network with its pole and zero on the
left half of the splane is shown in the
adjoining figure. The frequency at which
the phase angle of the network is
maximum (in rad/s) is
r
s
(log scale)
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
IN  2013
4.
The Bode plot of a transfer function G(s)
is shown in the figure below.
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 319
Control Systems
Gain (dB)
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
20
5.
0
1
10
8
(r
s)
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
100
4.
[Ans. A]
[Ans. C]
 ( )
M
w r
G(s) =
(
(
t n (
5.
[Ans. *] Range 42 to 48
(
M
t n (
2.
= 0.84
[Ans. C]
(s)
g(t)
u(t)
t u(t)
3.
[Ans. D]
(s)
o
s(s
)(
plot s (
r ts typ
log
)
) orm
syst m so
(
)(
)(
)
From the plot frequency at which gain is 0
dB is
r
s
( )
M
At t = 1, g(t)
6.
[Ans. A]
In a transfer function if all are poles if we
plot the BODE diagram, then an each and
every corner frequency we have to
introduce a line of slope
and hence on the 4th frequency the slope
of line will become 80 dB/sec and will
continue upto infinity

K = 100
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 320
7.
2.
[Ans. C]
Initial slope is 40 dB/decade, it means
there are double pole at origin. Slope
changes from
dB/decade to
dB/decade. It means there is a zero.
Slope changes from
dB/decade to 0
dB/decade at some other frequency. It
means there is one more zero. Therefore
transfer function has two poles and zeros.
20 log  
3.
[Ans. B]
log
(
(
In s domain,
(
(s)
(
(
)
)
l m s (s)
(
log
s)
s)
(s
s(s
(s
lm
s
)
)
)
)
)
[Ans. A]
(
/.
(s
)(s
s (s
(
)(
log )
s .
(
.
4.
(
s )
s )(
s )
s (
So,
EE
1.
Control Systems
log
( )
log
(
( )(
)
Corner frequencies are 1, 10 & 100
rad/sec
( )
(
)
log
log
.
(s)
.
log
/.
/.
/.
log
(
5.
[Ans. A]
(s)
(s
)(s
s(s
(
log
)(
s(
log
log
log
log
log
log
)
s
s
)
s) .
n m x mum r qu n y
th
th
th
r s
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 321
6.
Control Systems
[Ans. C]
(s)
3.
t n
[Ans. B]
This condition is only for phase lead N/W
t n
=
(
4.
[Ans. B]
32 dB
10
t n
. /
g n
to
Is 1 dec are change & change is (G) is
40dB
lop s
r r pol s s or g n
. /
g n
IN
1.
t n
log
So, G(s)=
= 32 dB
(given)
[Ans. D]
M
r
s M
log
)
5.
[Ans. D]
z
z
For minimum phase system, all poles and
zeros must lie inside the unit circle. For
stable system, all poles must be inside the
unit circle. For the system, zero is at 2
pole is at 0.5. This system is stable but
non minimum phase.
[Ans. C]
Compare with Bode magnitude plot of
standard transfer function.
.
(
(z)
)
.
. /
log
= 3.88 dB
2.
log
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 322
Control Systems
Z

(s)
compensator is given by
where
. The maximum phaseshift
provided by such a compensator is
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
Group I
ECE  2007
2.
A control system with PD controller is
shown in the figure. If the velocity error
constant Kv =1000 and the damping ratio
t n t v lu s o p and KD are
r
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
3.
s(s
Kp=100, KD=0.09
Kp=100, KD=0.9
Kp=10, KD=0.09
Kp=10, KD=0.9
1. If the plant is
operated
in
a
unity
feedback
configuration, Then the lead compensator
that can stabilize this control system is
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
Group II
1. PID controller
2. Lead compensator
3. Lag compensator
(A) Q 1, R 2
(C) Q 2, R 3
(B) Q 1, R 3
(D) Q 3, R 2
ECE  2009
5.
The magnitude plot of a rational transfer
function G(s) with real coefficients is
shown below. Which of the following
compensators has such a magnitude plot?
(
)
20dB
log
ECE  2008
4.
Group 1 gives two possible choices for the
impedance Z in the diagram. The circuit
elements in Z satisfy the condition
R2C2 >R1C1. The transfer function
represents a kind of controller. Match the
impedances in Group I with the types of
controllers in Group II.
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
Lead compensator
Lag compensator
PID compensator
Lead lag Compensator
ECE  2010
6.
A unity negative feedback closed loop
system has a plant with the transfer
function G(s) =
and a controller
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 323
(s)
(B)
(s)
(C)
(s)
(D)
(s)
)(
)(
ECE  2012
Statement Linked answer Questions 7 and
8
The transfer function of a compensator is
given as
(s)
.
7.
8.
Control Systems
1
. A first
s(s 1)
EE  2007
1.
The system 900/s(s+1)(s+9) is to be
compensated such that its gaincrossover
frequency becomes same as its
uncompensated phasecrossover frequency and provides a 450 phase margin. To
achieve this, one may use
(A) A lag compensator that provides an
attenuation of 20 dB and a phase lag
of 450 at the frequency of rad/s
(B) A lead compensator that provides an
amplification of 20dB and a phase
lead of 450 at the frequency of 3
rad/s
(C) A laglead compensator that provides
an amplification of 20 dB and a phase
lag of 450 at the frequency of
rad/s.
(A)
(C)
(D)
(B)
r(s)
th
th
th
stur
l nt
(s)
m(s)
s
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 324
(s)
2.
* ( )
( )+
( ) m( )
* ( )
( ) m( )
m(
( ) m( )
m(
4.
motor is given as
( )
( )
. When
)+
)
)
R(s)
(s)
(s)
)
( )
,
3.
ECE/EE/IN  2013
6.
The open loop transfer function of a dc
)
, ( )
Control Systems
(A) 1
(B) 5
(C) 10
(D) 100
IN  2014
7.
Consider the control system shown in
figure with feed forward action for
rejection of a measurable disturbance
d(t). The value of K, for which the
disturbance response at the output ( ) is
zero mean, is:
(t)
y(t)
r(t)
(A) 1
(B) 1
IN  2007
5.
A Cascade control system with
proportional controllers is shown below.
(C) 2
(D) 2
(s)
(
)(
( s
(s)
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 325
Control Systems
4.
[Ans. B]
[Ans. D]
M xp s s t
(s)
t n
t n
From maximum phase shift
s
s
s
t
(
(
(
(
)
) 
(t )
)
s
(s)
(s
)(s
)
(s)
s
The above equation is a PID controller
or
t n ( )
2.
t n
s
( )
(
)
(
)
( )
The above equation is a lag compensator.
(
)
[Ans. B]
(s)
(
(s
m
m
s
(s) (s)
(
)
)
)
(s
5.
[Ans. D]
( ) plot shows presence of 2 poles &
2 zeroes in Bode equivalent plot
6.
[Ans. D]
m
3.
S.E(s)=
7.
[Ans. A]
(s
)(s
)
Only option (A) is satisfies.
t n
s
(s
)(s
)
The lead compensator C(s) should first
(s) (s)
m
s
for (D)
t n
term
(s
(s
( ) ( ))
[Ans. A]
(s)
should be positive
t n
)
Option (A) & (C) satisfies, it may be
observed have be observed that option (C)
will have poles and zero in RHS of s plane,
thus not possible (not a practical system)
it can be concluded that option (A) is right
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 326
8.
[Ans. A]
y ( )
t n
Control Systems
t n
2.
[Ans. A]
t n
t n
is always positive
t n
t n
is always negative
sl
IN
1.
r
EE
1.
)(s
)
.
.
s(s
)(s
) (
)
/
/
log
log (
 (
)
( )
(s
(s
(s)
(s)
) (s)
s(s
ol s o t
omp ns t syst m r g v n s s
s
(s
)
t (s)
(s
)
r t r st qu t on
)(s
)
(s
)
s(s
)
,(s
(s
)
(
)s
(
)s
s
(s
)(s
)
s
s
s
s
(
)
) (
(
(
(s)
( )
(s) (s)
(s) (s)
 (
s l g omp ns tor
[Ans. C]
Let the T.F of the compensator be
o t
omp ns t syst m
[Ans. D]
s(s
2.
)
)
[Ans. A]
v n
(s) {
m(s)
)}
s
{ (s)
m( )
s
th
* ( )
pl
th
(s)}
( )+
tr ns orm o
th
(t) t
I(s)
s
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 327
3.
(
)
0
s
For stable system all elements of first
column should be greater than zero. By
substituting all the given options in
o
nt o w ll g v n g t v v lu
except option D.
[Ans. B]
The given diagram can be reduced as
(s)
(s)
(s)
r ns r un t on (s)
( )
( )
( )
( )
Control Systems
6.
[Ans. C]
Open loop transfer function of a dc motor
as
( )
( )
( )
R(s)
( )
(s)
(s)
tor
Topic: P controller with unity feed back
Formula: For first order system loop
( )
transfer function is
with
. Now for
( )
[Ans. B]
(PD controller can be used)
( )
/
.
/
(
5.
[Ans. D]
(s)
(
)(
( s
(s)
ow
)( s
((s
)( s
( )
( )
(s)
(s)
comparing
( )
( )
( )
4.
(s)
(s)
times of
( )
( )
((
)(
)(
Characteristics equation is
(
)s
s
s
(
)
For stability, according to RH array
6
(6+3k2)
s
(
11
s
(
)
0
s
so
.
approximate value
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 328
7.
Control Systems
[Ans. D]
y(s)
(s)
(s)
y(s)) [
y(s)
(s)
(s) [
(s) [
s
s
(s) [
]
]
Zero means at
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 329
Control Systems
(t)
(t)
ECE  2007
2.
The state space representation of a
separately excited DC servo motor
dynamics is given as,
+
10 1
os
t
s
n t]
(C) [
s nt
os t
os t
s nt
(D) 0
1
s nt
os t
3.
4.
( )
(C)
(B)
(D)
x(0) = 0
x(t) = 0
1/
(B) .
1/ and .
1/
(C) .
1/ and . 0
1/
(D) .
1/ and . 0
1/
(B) 0
1
1
(C) 0
(D) 0
ECE  2009
5.
= Ax + Bu with
1 u;
1/ and .
(A) 0
of the motor is
(A)
(A) .
ECE  2010
Common Data for Questions 6 and 7
The signal flow graph of a system is
shown below.
1,
(s)
(s)
1.
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 330
6.
7.
1x
x
1x
x
1x
0 1u
0 1u
0 1u
x
1x
0 1u
x
(C)
(B)
(D)
ECE  2011
8.
The block diagram of a system with one
input and two outputs and is given
below.
u
ECE  2012
9.
The state variable description of an LTI
system is given by
x
x
x
[x ] [
][ ] [ ]u
x
x
x
 [x ]
y ,
x
Where y is the output and u is the input.
The system is controllable for
(A) a1 2 =0, a3
(B) a1 =0, a2
3
(C) a1=0, a2
3 =0
(D) a1 2
3 =0
ECE  2013
Statement for Linked Answer Questions 10
and 11:
The state diagram of a system is shown
below. A system is described by the state
variable equations
u y
u
u
10.
y
(B) x
(C) x
(D) x
, u y
x
, u
1x
1x
,
y
(C)
,
x
0 1x
11.
1u
1u
1u
1u
u
1

u
1
u
1
th
y
(D)
x
0 1u y
0 1u y
(B)
0 1x
(A) x
Control Systems
th
(C) 0
t
t
(D) 0
th
1
t
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 331
ECE  2014
12. Consider the state space model of a
system, as given below
x
x
x
[x ] [
][ ] [ ]u
x
x
x
 [x ]
y ,
x
The system is
(A) controllable and observable
(B) uncontrollable and observable
(C) uncontrollable and unobservable
(D) controllable and unobservable
13.
or x
(B) [
(C) [
(D) [
16.
0 1 x(t) s
(A) 0
0 1 x(t)
nx
Control Systems
EE  2006
1.
For a system with the transfer function
(
H(s) =
15.
1 x(t)
(A) [
(B) [
(C) [
(D) [
EE  2008
Statement for Linked Answer Questions 2
and 3
The state space equation of a system is
described by x = Ax + Bu, y = Cx, where
x is state vector, u is input, y is output
1 , B = 0 1, C = ,
and A = 0
2.
(A)
1 n
(B)
th
(
th
(C)
(D)
)
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 332
3.
r +
(
t
)
y
(
t
)
G(s)
x (t)
x (t)
()
x (t)
u(t)
4.
5.
EE  2013
Common Data Questions 7 and 8
The state variable formulation of a system
is given as
x
x
[ ] 0
1 0x 1 0 1 u x ( )
x
x
 0x 1
x ( )
n y ,
7.
The system is
(A) Controllable but not observable
(B) Not controllable but observable
(C) Both controllable and observable
(D) Both not controllable and not
observable
8.
u(t)
y(t) = x1(t)
Where u(t)is the input and y(t) is the
output
(C)
(D)
EE  2014
9.
A system matrix is given as follows.
[
(C)
(B)
(D)
(B) 0
(C) 0
(D) 0
0
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
y
the matrices P, Q and R as follows:
0
0 1
EE  2010
6.
The system
Control Systems
,
The system has the following controllability
and observability properties:
(A) Controllable and observable
(B) Not controllable but observable
(C) Controllable but not observable
(D) Not controllable and not observable
with
0 1 is
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 333
11.
(C) 0
1
t
(D) 0
Control Systems
IN  2008
2.
The state space representation of a
= 0
system is given by
t 1
IN  2006
1.
The statevariable representation of a
plant is given by
= Ax + Bu , y = Cx.
Where x is the state, u is the input and y is
the output. Assuming zero initial
conditions, the impulse response of the
plant is given by
(A) exp (At)
(B)
xp , (t  )] Bu () d
(C) C exp (At) B
(D)
xp , (t  )] Bu () d
( )
( )
of
12.
1 X + 0 1u,
(C)
(B)
(D)
IN  2009
3.
A linear timeinvariant singleinput
singleoutput system has a state space
model given by
=Fx + Gu; y = Hx
Where F =0
1; G=0 1; H =,
.
th
(D)
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 334
Control Systems
6.
[Ans. A]
(t) = L *( I
( I
) +
( I
)
s nt
1
os t
x
x
y
x
u ( )
x
x ( )
(x
x )
(x
x
x )
y
x ( )
From equation 1, 2, 3 the state variable
representation of the system is
(s)
I (s)
I (s)
(s)
u(s)
u(s)
( )
( )
(t)
1x
0 1u
[Ans. C]
,sI
,
&
0
,
s
10 1
s
(s
s
s
) )
s
s
s
[
1
)
(( I
(s
)(s
find eigen vector
s
s
Method II
It can also be solved by applying the
M sons g n ormul
&
[Ans. D]
From above, , I
0
5.
[Ans. A]
Let A = [
4.
7.
3.
x
x
(s)
(s)
) (s)
(s)
x
u
(s)
)(s
[Ans. A]
(s
(s)
(
os t
(t) = 0
s nt
2.
[Ans. B]
8.
[Ans. B]
(s)
u(s) s
(s) x (s)
x (s) u(s) s
x (s)
y (s)
u(s) s
x (s)
Similarly
x (s)
y (s)
u(s)
s
u(s)
so sx (s)
x (s) u(s)
y (s) x (s)
sx (s)
x (s) u(s)
[Ans. C]
,
p p
0q q1
p q un ontroll
p, q
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 335
y (s)
x (s)
x (t)
x (t) u(t) y (t)
x (t)
x (t) u(t) y (t)
x
x
[ ] 0
1 0x 1 0 1 u(t)
x
x
x
u
,y y 
rom qu st on y
9.
x (t)
x (t)
y=,
0 1
x
] [x ] + [ ]u
x
x
 [x ]
x
A=[
]& B = [ ]
So, AB = [
=*
][ ] = [ ]
+
=[
11.
[Ans. A]
,s I
[Ans. D]
x
*x + = [
x
Control Systems
s0
s

sI
[Ans. A]
For state variable form, we have to find
number of integral (1/s) in the graph
Assign output of these integral with state
variable & input of these integral with
derivative of state variable.
1. Then find out the relation between
these derivative in terms of state
variable and input
2. Similarly we can write the relation
between output and these variable
and input using state flow graph
3. Lets assume & as state variable
,sI
s
s
(s
sI
) s
[(s
]
Take inverse Laplace transform both side
,sI
[(s
0
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 336
12.
[Ans. B]
[
[ ]
,
Controllable matrix
,
[Ans. B]
Applying linearity property
0
o x(t)
the state
16.
[Ans. D]
(t)
, I
s
s
EE
1.
x
1 0x 1
s ]
3
1t
0
0
1
1
(s)
(s)
(s)
( )
( )
( )
( )
(s)
(s)
(s)
s x
t
)
0
[Ans. B]
x ( )
x ( )
(t)
The rank of S is 3
So the system is always controllable
(I
) 
[s
(t)
[Ans. C]
x
[ ] 0
,( I
s
0
14.
0 1
[ ]
[Ans. A]
From the state diagram,
equations are
[ ][
][ ] [ ]
15.
0 1
so o s rv
x (t) x ( )
x (t) x ( )
2
0
13.
Control Systems
(s
).
)
s
/
s
s
s
(s)
s x
sx (s)
u(s)
(s
s
x (s)
Replacing s by
x
t
th
x
t
x
t
th
x
t
u(t) ( )
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 337
3]
x
x
x
t
Replacing eq.(i)
x
x
x
x
u(t)
x
x
x
x
u(t)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
u(t)
x
x
[x ] [
] [x ] [ ] u(t)
x
x
o
2.
3.
 (0
5.
[Ans. B]
0
( I
( I
( ))
x (t)
y(t)
x (t)
[
]
x (t)
y
o
&
, I
s
s
s
0
s
(s
)(s
r ns r un t on
, I

[Ans. C]
, AB] 
controllable
(s) ( I
) & (t)
( (s )) has
exponential with positive power
Unstable
7.
[Ans. A]
,
M
1
ontroll
8.
( I
, I
*, I
(s)+
1
)
ot o s rv
[Ans. A]
Y(t) ,
6.
t(M )
t(M )
1
0 1
y(t)
)(s
[Ans. C]
Selecting x (t) and x (t) as state variables
x (t)
x (t)
x (t) x (t)
u(t)
t
x (t)
x (t)
x (t) u(t)
t
x (t)
x (t)
[
] 0
] 0 1 u(t)
1[
x (t)
x (t)
x
, I
(s
[s
m
s
s
[Ans. A]
1 )0 1
1
s
0 1
(s
)(s
)
(s
)
,
0
1
s
(s
)(s
)
s
s
(s
)(s
) s
s
,
s
4.
[Ans. D]
(s)
Control Systems
[s
]
s
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 338
[, I
x (t)
[
]
x (t)
9.
[s(s
)]
,, I
s
[(s
* I
(s)
12.
)(
(s)
0
,
)
)
,(
(
(s)
[Ans. C]
0
or ontroll
,
0 1
11.
1
2.
[Ans. C]
0
1+
1
s 0 1
rror
lm
(s)
l ms (
l m u(t)
s
s(s
y(t)
s
[Ans. A]
(s)
( I
1
(
th
(sI
(s)
th
)
s
)
(s)
y(t)
( I
(sI
(t)
(sI
( I
s
y st t
u(t)
(s)
ot o s rv
[Ans. C]
(s)
(s)
ontroll
For observability:
y(s)
(s)
)
(s)
s(s
l

IN
1.
y(s)
u(s)
v n
 *0 s
10.
[Ans. A]
,(
( I
r ns r un t on
x (t)
[
]
x (t)
Y(t)
s(s
(s)]
Control Systems
.,
0
0
.,
1/
th
1 0 1/
(s)
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 339
3.
Control Systems
[Ans. B]
The poles of the s/y are obtained from the
s/y matrix, f
det (SI F )= 0
0
S(S + 2) + 4 = 0
4.
[Ans. A]
T(s) = ( I
,
(
)

10 1
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 340
Analog Circuits
ECE  2007
2.
The correct full wave rectifier circuit is
(A)
Input
Output
(B)
(A)
6V
Input
6V
(B)
Output
(C)
12V
(C)
12V
Input
Output
6V
(D)
(D)
Input
6V
Output
3.
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 341
Analog Circuits
ECE  2008
4.
In the following limiter circuit, an input
voltage
= 10sin100 t is applied.
Assume that the diode drop is 0.7V when
it is forward biased. The Zener
breakdown voltage is 6.8V.The maximum
and minimum values of the output
voltage respectively are
6.
7.
8.
1k
D1
D2
Z
6.8 V
ECE  2009
5.
In the circuit below, the diode is ideal. The
voltage V is given by
(A) min (
(B) max (
)
)
(C) min (
(D) max(
ECE  2012
9.
The diodes and capacitors in the circuit
shown are ideal. The voltage v(t) across
the diode
is
)
)
ECE  2011
Statements for Linked Answer Questions 6
and 7
In the circuit shown below, assume that
the voltage drop across a forward biased
diode is 0.7V. The thermal voltage
(A)
(B) i
th
th
(C) 1
(D) 1 i
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 342
ECE/EE/IN  2012
10. The IV characteristics of the diode in the
circuit given below are
i
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
sin
(sin
(sin
0 for all t
Analog Circuits
i
i
)/2
)/2
{
ECE  2014
13. In the figure, assume that the forward
voltage drops of the PN diode
and
Schottky diode
are 0.7 V and 0.3 V,
respectively. If ON denotes conducting
state of the diode and OFF denotes nonconducting state of the diode, then in the
circuit,
(A) both
and
are ON
(B)
is ON and
is OFF
(C) both
and
are OFF
(D)
is OFF and
is ON
14.
100
ILoad
10V
RL
VZ=5V
1k
W
Y
Z
15.
X
1k
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 343
Analog Circuits
D1
D2
i
z
Vi
V0
RL =
5V
10V
16.
(A)
10
10
(B)
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
5
5
EE  2006
1.
What are the states of the three ideal
diodes of the circuit shown in figure?
(C)
10
5
5 10
10V
5A
(D)
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
ON,
OFF,
ON,
OFF,
OFF,
ON,
OFF,
ON,
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
10
10
2.
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 344
Analog Circuits
(B)
EE  2007
3.
The three terminal linear voltage
regula r i
e e
a
l a
resistor as shown in the figure. If Vin is
10 V, what is the power dissipated in the
transistor?
+10V
(C)
RL
Vin
6.6V
Zener diode
0
(A) 0.6 W
(B) 2.4 W
(D)
(C) 4.2 W
(D) 5.4 W
EE  2008
4.
The equivalent circuits of a diode, during
forward biased and reverse biased
conditions, are shown in the figure.
+
0.7
V
5.
~
If such diodes is used in clipper circuit of
figure given above, the output voltage (v0)
of the circuit will be
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
(A)
= 10V,
= 10V,
= 5V,
= 5V,
= 5V
= 5V
= 10V
= 10V
EE  2009
6.
The following circuit shown has a source
voltage Vs as shown in the graph. The
current through the circuit is also shown
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 345
Analog Circuits
10V
15V
15
10
(A) 4V
(B) 5V
Vs (Volts)
5
0
EE  2011
8.
A clipper circuit is shown below.
5
1k
10
15
100
200
300
Time (ms)
400
1.5
Current (mA)
(C) 7.5V
(D) 12.12V
5V
1.0
0.5
0
0.5
1.0
1.5
(A)
0
100
200
300
Time (ms)
400
4.3
4.3
a
(B)
10
4.3
EE  2010
7.
Assuming that the diodes in the given
circuit are ideal, the voltage
is
4.3
th
th
th
10
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 346
Analog Circuits
(C)
5.7
1.7V
0.7
0.7 5.7
(A)
(B)
(D)
10
10
(C)
(D)
IN  2011
2.
Assuming zener diode
has currentvoltage characteristics as shown below on
the right and forward voltage drop of
diode
is 0.7 V, the voltage
in the
circuit shown below is
EE  2014
9.
The sinusoidal ac source in the figure has
an rms value of
. Considering all
2.7V
0.7V
~
(A) 3.7 V
(B) 2.7 V
10.
~
(A)
(B)
(C) 2.2 V
(D) 0 V
IN  2014
3.
For the circuit shown in the figure assume
ideal diodes with zero forward resistance
and zero forward voltage drop. The
current through the diode
in mA is
___________.
(C)
(D)
IN  2008
1.
In the circuit shown below, the ideality
factor
of the diode is unity and the
voltage drop across it is 0.7V. The
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 347
4.
Analog Circuits
[Ans. B]
When
, zener diode is in forward
bias so
When
, zener diode is in reverse
bias, so when
, zener diode
will be OFF and
.
When
, zener diode will be in
breakdown region and
.
2.
[Ans. C]
Option C, Circuit makes Full wave
rectifier.
3.
[Ans. C]
For zener
When
4.
[Ans. C]
When
,
is forward bias and
are OFF, and
When
is +10V,
are ON and zener
diode is in reverse bias so
V
5.
[Ans. A]
When
, diode is ON and V =
When
, diode is OFF and V = 1 V
So V = min (
6.
[Ans. A]
7.
[Ans. B]
and
When
, current
~
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 348
10.
Analog Circuits
[Ans. D]
8.
[Ans. B]
Zener diode operated in reverse in
breakdown region.
i
i
r
Since diode will be forward biased voltage
across diode will be 0.7 V
i
Stabilized
9.
11.
[Ans. A]
[Ans. B]
i
5v
40 mA
10 V
la per
ea
e i ier
10 mA
he ex i e
y
he la pi g
section clamp the positive peak to 0 volts
and negative peak to 2 volts. So whole
cos (
i l wer y 1 volts
pu
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 349
12.
[Ans. D]
14.
Analog Circuits
[Ans. C]
1k
y
i
tz
1k
w
When
positive maximum
[Ans. D]
When
negative minimum
15.
w
p
is off and hence
i le
th
a pere
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 350
16.
[Ans. D]
3.
Analog Circuits
[Ans. B]
So current through
Current through 1k ,
So
mA
mA
= 0.5893
Power dissipated in transistor
i
r hi
W
4.
[Ans. A]
When diode is OFF, the equivalent circuit
is shown as follows:
i
EE
1.
r hi
[Ans. A]
Let
is ON,
OFF and
equivalent circuit
10 V
~
i
OFF, then
i.e. when
is max i.e.,
so
diode never conducts and it is always
OFF. So,
i
5A
In this case,
5.
10A
[Ans. D]
When
,
is ON and
charges upto 5V and
When
,
is ON and
charges by 10 V and
So in steady state,
and
A
So voltage across diode
So
is in reverse bias i.e. it is OFF.
Voltage across diode
V it is
also in Reverse bias so OFF.
Voltage across diode
it is in
forward bias and ON.
2.
[Ans. A]
When
,
,
and
is ON and
6.
is OFF so
.
is OFF, so
[Ans. A]
It is
are OFF, so
When
OFF so,
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 351
7.
Analog Circuits
[Ans. B]
Right side diode is off
So ,
8.
9.
[Ans. C]
When
output will
follow input, because zener diode and
normal diodes are off
When
V Zener diode forward
bias and
V
When
V Diode is forward bias and
IN
1.
[Ans. B]
Dynamic resistance r
r
2.
[Ans. C]
First Assume that the diode
does not
reach reverse breakdown. So circuit
becomes
10.
[Ans. B]
S
S
This is less than reverse breakdown
voltage
of diode
. So our
assumption is correct
3.
[Ans. 10]
Diode
goes to forward biased due to
10 V and 8V across
diode and current
through diode is
4.
[Ans. *] Range 40 to 43
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 352
Analog Circuits
Nodal at
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 353
Analog Circuits
10 k
2V
9.
1 k
5V
(A) cutoff
(B) saturation
W/L = 4
ECE  2010
4.
In the silicon BJT circuit shown below,
assume that the emitter area of transistor
Q1 is half that of transistor Q2.
(A) 1 V
(B) 2 V
th
th
(C) 3 V
(D) 3.67 V
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 354
ECE  2013
7.
In the circuit shown below, the silicon
npn transistor Q has a very high value of
. The required value of R2 in k to
produce IC = 1mA is
10.
Analog Circuits
. The value of
VCC
3V
R1
60 k
IC
Q
R2
(A) 20
(B) 30
8.
RE
500
(C) 40
(D) 50
11.
ECE  2014
9.
For the nchannel MOS transistor shown
in the figure, the threshold voltage
is
0.8 V. Neglect channel length modulation
effects. When the drain voltage =1.6 V,
the drain current
was found to be 0.5
mA. If
is adjusted to be 2 V by changing
the values of R and
, the new value of
(in mA) is
the figure,
0.5 V. The
saturation
(in Volts)
EE  2006
1.
Consider the circuit shown in figure. If
the of the transistor is 30 and ICBO is 20
nA and the input voltage is + 5 V, then
transistor would be operating in
+12V
.
(A) 0.625
(B) 0.75
(C) 1.125
(D) 1.5
12V
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 355
Analog Circuits
(A) 0 mA
(B) 3.6 mA
(C) 4.3 mA
(D) 5.7 mA
EE  2010
5.
The transistor circuit shown uses a silicon
transistor with
= 0.7V,
and a
dc current gain of 100. The value of is
+10 V
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
d
e er e
e er e
d
d
d
e er e
50 k
10 k
EE  2007
3.
The common emitter forward current
g i f he r i r h w i F = 100.
100
+10V
(A) 4.65V
(B) 5V
6.
(C) 6.3V
(D) 7.23V
EE  2008
4.
Two perfectly matched silicon transistors
are connected as shown in the figure.
Assuming the of the transistors to be
very high and the forward voltage drop in
diodes to be 0.7 V, the value of current I is
(B)
(A)
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 356
(D)
(C)
V
IN  2006
1.
The biasing circuit of a silicon transistor
is shown below. If = 80, then what is VCE
for the transistor?
+12V
EE  2011
7.
The transistor used in the circuit shown
be w h
f
d
is negligible.
15k
1k
Analog Circuits
RB
RC
2.2k
D
= 0.7V
.
(A) 6.08 V
(B) 0.2 V
(C) 1.2 V
(D) 6.08 V
IN  2007
2.
In the circuit shown below,
The
f he r
respectively,
(A) 19 and 2.8 V
(B) 19 and 4.7 V
(C) 38 and 2.8 V
(D) 38 and 4.7 V
3.
are,
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 357
Analog Circuits
IN  2014
6.
In the figure, transistors T and T have
identical characteristics.
of
transistor T is 0.1 V. The voltage
is
high enough to put T in saturation.
Voltage
of transistors T T and T is 0.7
V. The value of (
) in V is ___________.
10 V
2V
The voltage
(A) 0.2 V
(B) 2 V
is
(C) 7.4 V
(D) 10 V
IN  2010
4.
The matched transistors
and
shown
in the adjoining figure have
=100.
Assuming the baseemitter voltages to be
0.7V, the collectoremitter voltage V2 of
the transistor
is
(A) 33.9V
(B) 27.8V
(C) 16.2V
(D) 0.7V
IN  2013
5.
In the transistor circuit as shown below,
the value of resistance RE in k is
approximately,
+10V
1.5k
15k
.
(A) 1.0
(B) 1.5
6k
IC=2.0 mA
.
VCE=5.0 V
RE
Vout
(C) 2.0
(D) 2.5
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 358
Analog Circuits
5.
[Ans. D]
[Ans. D]
From the below graph it is clear that
a
increase conductance i.e. slope of
graph is increased.
.98
.98
.
6.
9
.
[Ans. C]
The transistor which has
12mA
and
6
V
2.
[Ans. B]
( ) (
r f c r
( )
(
.99
.98
3.
[Ans. B]
Given is large so
d
Assuming BJT is in active
Applying KVL in Base. Emitter loop
.
.
.
9.8
w
.9
7.
[Ans. C]
So BJT is in saturation
4.
[Ans. B]
Assuming
.
.
i ce is very large
=1mA
So,
eg igib e
So,
= 2.04 mA
ge dr
2 mA
th
th
cr
th
e i er f
re i
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 359
11.
.
w
Analog Circuits
.
.
( )]
gi e circ i
r .
r .
b i
i g
.
.
.
.
.8
.
8.
[Ans. D]
9.
[Ans. C]
ere
EE
1.
i
r i
[Ans. B]
Let the device is in saturation and
. V
regi
Collector current
.
.8
For saturation
Base voltage
.
current through 100
.
.
.8
.
.
.
.
10.
.
.
= 5.3mA
= 0.178 mA
re i
ce
= 0.127 mA
c rre hr
.
gh
re i
ce
= 0.29 mA
Base current
. 9
.
= 0.163 mA
So this is less than
it means device
is not in saturation. It is in active region.
2.
[Ans. C]
When
.
he
will be in
reverse active mode .i.e. Reverse on and
will be ON.
3.
[Ans. D]
We assume BJT is in active region
applying KVL in base emitter circuit
.
i g
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 360
8.
[Ans. *] Range 22 to 23
To calculate
max, take end condition
.
i
.
.
i
9.
9
.
Ti i
4.
Analog Circuits
.9
ci e
c i e regi
.
.
.
.8
[Ans. B]
.
IN
1.
[Ans. B]
.
.
9
9
. and drop across diode = 0.7
.
.
.
i
ery rge
.9
8
.
.
[Ans. A]
So device is in saturation, so
.
9.
2.
.
.
[Ans. A]
6.
[Ans. C]
When V will be + ve both transistor and
diode will be on making V across them
Zero and Current I will be flow and when
V is ve both will be off offering infinite
resistance so current I will be Zero.
7.
[Ans. D]
Transistor is in Saturation region
.
.
.
.
.
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 361
Apply KVL
.
Analog Circuits
.
8
For matched transistor
.
di
is same for both the
transistors)
Now apply KVL in the outer port of
transistor
.
8
.8
9
9.
Apply KVL to output terminals
5.
.9
3.
9.
.
[Ans. A]
10 V
.
.8
2m A
V=IR=1.5k 2mA=3V
15k
[Ans. C]
=103=7V
10V
gi e
2V
6k
gi e
be
.
6.
gi e
.
.
.
4.
[Ans. B]
rre hr
.
T
.
gh
re i
ce
.
.
=1.66mA
.
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 362
Tr
.
r ide ic
h
.
Analog Circuits
.
.
.98
.
.
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 363
Analog Circuits
defined to be
2.
3.
ECE  2008
4.
Two identical NMOS transistors M1 and
M2 are connected as shown below.
is
chosen so that both transistors are in
saturation.The equivalent g of the Pair is
of the
of the
If
is increased by 10%, then collectortoemitter voltage drop
(A) increases by less than or equal to
10%
(B) decreases by less than or equal to
10%
(C) increases by more than 10%
(D) decreases by more than 10%
The smallsignal gain of the amplifier
is
(A) 10
(C) 5.3
(B) 5.3
(D) 10
1.
at constant
, and
5.
6.
th
th
of
the
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 364
ECE  2009
7.
A small signal source
() A
+B i
is applied to
a transistor amplifier as shown below.
The transistor has =150 and h =3k
.Which expression best approximates
( )?
12V
3k
100k
V0(t)
100 nF
Vi(t)
100nF
20k
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
(
(
(
(
)=
)=
)=
)=
900k
ECE  2012
9.
The current ib through the base of a
silicon npn transistor is
1 + 0.1 cos(10000 t) mA . At 300 K, the
r in the small signal model of the
transistor is
i
Analog Circuits
i
i
ECE  2010
8.
The amplifier circuit shown below uses a
silicon transistor. The capacitors
and
can be assumed to be short at signal
frequency and the effect of output
resistance
can be ignored. If
is
disconnected from the circuit, which one
of the following statements is TRUE?
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
ECE  2013
10. The smallsignal resistance(i.e., dVB/dID)
in k offered by the n channel MOSFET
M shown in the figure below, at a bias
point of VB =2V is (device data for M:
device
transconductance
parameter
2
kn nCox(W/L) 4 / ,
threshold
voltage VTN=1V and neglect body effect
and channel length modulation effects)
ID
VB
(A) 12.5
(B) 25
th
th
(C) 50
(D) 100
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 365
Analog Circuits
ECE  2014
11. For the amplifier shown in the figure, the
BJT parameters are
and thermal voltage
= 25 mV. The
voltage gain ( / ) of the amplifier is
_____ .
(A) g
(B)
F
12.
(C) g
(D)
14.
15.
F
F
13.
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 366
ECE/EE/IN  2012
1.
The voltage gain
below is
(A) 0.967
(B) 0.976
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
EE  2014
2.
The magnitude of the midband voltage
gain of the circuit shown in figure is
(assuming h of the transistor to be 100)
Analog Circuits
(C) 0.983
(D) 0.998
IN  2008
2.
For a single stage BJT common base
amplifier
(A) current gain as well as voltage gain
can be greater than unity
(B) current gain can be greater than
unity but voltage gain is always less
than unity
(C) voltage gain can be greater than
unity but current gain is always less
than unity
(D) current gain as well as voltage gain is
always less than unity
3.
its VCE =
will be
(A) 1
(B) 10
(C) 20
(D) 100
IN  2006
1.
An amplifier circuit is shown below.
Assume that the transistor works in
active region. The low frequency smallsignal parameters for the transistor are
g = 20 mS, 0 = 50, =, =0. What
is the voltage gain,
( ) of the
amplifier?
(A) 3.75
(B) 4.5
+Vcc
Vi
(C) 9
(D) 19
IN  2009
Common Data Questions 4 and 5
The circuit shown in the figure uses three
identical transistors with
= 0.7V and
Gi e : = =
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 367
kT/ = 25mV.
The collector current of transistor
2mA.
4.
is
+12V
5.
R1
R2
Q1
Analog Circuits
Q2
Q3
R3
12V
So,
[Ans. C]
Under DC conditions capacitor
as open. By KVL,
will act
(
)
Which is equal to the g of
but
[Ans. A]
Equivalent circuit
5.
= 6V
2.
[Ans. B]
in increased by 10%, i.e.
By KVL,
4
i e
ge
By KVL, in E B loop,
e e e
3.
[Ans. A]
4.
[Ans. C]
Both transistor carry same current and
both are in saturation
[Ans. D]
6.
Voltage gain
u
th
th
)(
ge
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 368
11.
Analog Circuits
7.
[Ans. B]
The e
is
we f
u u
) e
ge
h
h
(
8.
[Ans. A]
The moment
is disconnected from the
circuit,
h
(
h )
but with capacitor,
h
which also reduces voltage gain
So, increases and
decreases.
9.
[Ans. C]
i = 1 + 0.1 cos (
Calculate
Solution:
[
)
= 3V
whe e
i he he
ge
e u e
44
10.
[Ans. B]
4
4
)
i
)
(
4
th
th
th
)i
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 369
Analog Circuits
i
i
i
i
i
i
4 4
he e
e figu e
i
i
(
) i
i
(
)i (
)
) (
i (
)
i
(
) i
4 4
4 4
g
g
12.
So if g
constant g
which is nearly
14.
15.
4
4
13.
[Ans. B]
This is a commoncollector configuration.
i e
eg i e
can vary
( )i
between 12V in the positive direction and
0V in the negative direction biased
around
So, positive excursion of output voltage =
4
Negative excursion of output voltage
i
u
`
Replacing the transistor
equivalent model, we get
with
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 370
Analog Circuits
u e
i
i
i e
eg i e
can vary
( )i
between 12V in the positive direction and
0V in the negative direction biased
around
So, positive excursion of output voltage
=
4
Negative excursion of output voltage
i (
(
) i
i (
(
) i
[Ans. D]
In DC Analysis capacitor will behave as an
open circuit
whe e
)
)
4
i
i
(i
i
i )
)i
i
(
i
i
i
i
(
)
2.
)i
[Ans. D]
g
whe e
g
Small signal analysis of circuit
i g
and Q point to be in
the middle of the load line
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 371
IN
1.
Analog Circuits
Vi
he
e i e
i ui
model
4
g
G i
4
 
4.
[Ans. A]
Emitter
voltage
of
transistor,
g
L
i
Where
i i
i
10 V
i
i
(i
i
(i
(
So
i )
5.
)
i
(
(i
[
2.
3.
[Ans. B]
When output is taken between one
collector and ground then
)i
)
g
i
i
i
(i e
i g
e g i )
[Ans. C]
For CB, current gain is close to unity while
voltage gain is very high.
/
and here output is taken between one
collector and ground therefore gain
g
[Ans. A]
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 372
Analog Circuits
RD
10 k
C
V0
Vi
M
RL
10 k
and
(A) 8
(B) 32
(C) 50
(D) 200
ECE  2014
4.
1.
2.
ECE  2013
3.
The ac schematic of an NMOS common
source stage is shown in the figure below,
where part of the biasing circuits has
been omitted for simplicity. For the nchannel MOSFET M, the transconductance
gm =1mA/V, and body effect and channel
length modulation effect are to be
neglected. The lower cutoff frequency in
Hz of the circuit is approximately at
IN  2011
1.
The amplifier shown below has a voltage
gain of
an input esistance of
and a lower 3dB cutoff frequency of 20
Hz. Which one of the following statements
is TRUE when the emitter resistance
is
doubled?
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 373
Analog Circuits
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 374
Analog Circuits
[Ans. B]
Equivalent model of the given circuit is
shown below
[
IN
1.
[Ans. A]
The small signal model is
g
The resistance seen by the source
h
2.
[Ans. B]
Lower cutoff frequency due to
f
h
increases
3.
ec eases
ec ease
f
f
4.
doubled Zi
ou e
ec eases
owe
frequency decreases as
increases
s
inc eases
[Ans. A]
w
ec eases
p ifie
p ifie
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 375
Analog Circuits
ECE  2011
4.
In the circuit shown below, capacitors
and are very large and are shorts at the
input frequency. is a small signal input.
The gain magnitude   at 10 Mrad/s
is
5V
2k
ECE  2007
2.
In a transconductance amplifier, it is
desirable to have
(A) A large input resistance and a large
output resistance
(B) A large input resistance and a
small output resistance
(C) A small input resistance and a
large output resistance
(D) A small input resistance and a
small output resistance
ECE  2009
3.
In the circuit shown below, the opamp is
ideal the transistor has
Decide whether the feedback in the
circuit is positive or negative and
determine the voltage V at the output of
the opamp
1nF
2k
2.7V
2k
~
(A) Maximum
(B) Minimum
(C) Unity
(D) Zero
ECE  2014
5.
In the ac equivalent circuit shown in the
figure, if is the input current and
is
very large, the type of feedback is
10V
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 376
6.
Analog Circuits
(A)
5
10
(B)
10
5
~
(C)
10
EE  2006
1.
A relaxation oscillator is made using
OPAMP as shown in figure. The supply
voltages of the OPAMP are
12V. The
voltage waveform at point P will be
(D)
10
EE  2009
2.
The nature of feedback in the opamp
circuit shown is
+6V
2
R1
Vin
C
6V
R2
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
_
+
2k
P
10k
10k
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 377
Analog Circuits
EE  2014
3.
In the Wien Bridge oscillator circuit
shown in figure, the bridge is balanced
when
F
( )
IN  2007
1.
A FET source follower is shown in the
figure below:
+ 15 V
( )
( )
( )
4.
Vin
V1
A0
vf=kvout
Vout
will be _______________
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 378
Analog Circuits
6.
[Ans. B]
Current Series
O/P is taken at collector which is voltage
emitter node will be current and
resistor is grounded
Series
7.
[Ans. A]
[Ans. D]
Ideal transconductance amplifier has
infinite input and output resistance.
2.
[Ans. A]
3.
[Ans. D]
EE
1.
2
[Ans. A]
Output will be either at
.
When output will be at
diode
connected to
resistance will be on
making voltage at point P equal to 6V.
When output is at
diode connected
to 2
resistance will be on making
voltage at point equal to
.
5v
V
+
+

[Ans. B]
It is voltage voltage feedback.
3.
[Ans. C]
Barkhausen criteria for oscillation (for
positive feedback)
4.
2.
[Ans. A]
In the parallel RLC Ckt
Hand
F

[Ans. B]
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 379
Analog Circuits
)(
)
2
( 2
)
)
(
(
2
2
2
2
[
(
K
th
th
2
( 2 )
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 380
( 2 )
(
IN
1.
[Ans. D]
Feedback in this circuit is drain voltage as
negative.
)
2
(
2.
[Ans. A]
Given connection is voltage series F/B.
increases and
decreases
2
]
2
Analog Circuits
y q
2
2
[
5.
2 ]
()
During discharging of capacitor
()
( )
()
( ( )
( ))
)
(
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 381
Analog Circuits
ECE  2007
4.
For the Opamp circuit shown in the
figure, is
2 k
1 k
1V
1 k
1 k
(A)
(B)
5.
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
2.
3.
(C) 0.5 V
(D) 0.5 V
2V
1V
=
=e
=
ln 2
= ln 2
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 382
6.
7.
(s)/
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
(s) is
10.
Analog Circuits
If
sin t and
sin t
, then the minimum
and maximum values of
(in radians)
are respectively
(A) / and /
(C) and
(B) and /
(D) / and
k
k
ECE  2008
8.
Consider the following circuit using an
ideal OPAMP. The IV characteristics of
the diode is described by the relation
I= (e
) where
m
and V is the voltage across the
diode (taken as positive for forward bias)
D
4k
= 1
100k
ECE  2009
11. In the following astable multivibrator
circuit, which properties of
t depend
on ?
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 383
Analog Circuits
ECE  2010
12. Assuming the OP AMP to be ideal, the
voltage gain of the amplifier shown below
is
13.
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
ECE  2011
14. The circuit below implements a filter
between the input current i and the
output voltage v . Assume that the opamp
is ideal. The filter implemented is a
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
ECE/EE/IN  2013
15. In the circuit shown below what is the
output voltage (Vout) if a silicon transistor
Q and an ideal op amp are used?
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 384
Analog Circuits
1 k
k
k
Vout
.7
5V
(A)
(B)
16.
15 V
15 V
0.7 V
(C) +0.7 V
(D) +15 V
19.
1 k
+15 V
+15 V
Vout
1 k
15 V
+1V
15 V
(A)
(B)
1 k
1 k
20.
(A) 4
(B) 6
(C) 8
(D) 10
ECE  2014
17. In the lowpass filter shown in the figure,
for a cutoff frequency of 5 kHz , the value
of
(in k ) is ________
18.
(C)
(D)
(A)
increases
(B) commonmode rejection ratio
increases
(C)
increases
(D) commonmode rejection ratio
decreases
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 385
21.
Analog Circuits
(A)
(B)
22.
(A)
(C)
(B)
(D)
12V
0.7V
(D)
EE 2006
1.
For a given sinusoidal input voltage, the
voltage waveform at point P of the
clamper circuit shown in figure will be
0.7V
12V
EE 2007
2.
The circuit shown in the figure is
~
oad
r
Vin
current
source
with
current
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 386
(D) A
current
source
with
current
Analog Circuits
(D)
.
3.
4.
10K
+10 V
8
7
+
IC 555
10K
10V
0.01
2, 6
C
5.0V
5.0V
k
1
10V
(A) It
(A)
makes a
to
at t
makes a
to
at t
makes a
to
at t
makes a
to
at t
(B) It
(C) It
(D) It
(B)
transition
.
s
transition
. 7 s
transition
.
s
transition
. 7 s
from
from
from
from
EE 2008
5.
The block diagrams of two types of half
wave rectifiers are shown in the figure.
The transfer characteristics of the
rectifiers are also shown within the block.
P
(C)
V0
V0
Vin
V0
Vin
V0
Vin
0
Vin
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 387
Analog Circuits
(A)
5V
2.5V
t(sec)
(B)
t(sec)
0
2.5V
5V
(C)
5V
0
t(sec)
5V
(D)
5V
0
5V
t(sec)
If the voltage
is made + 2.5 V, the
voltage waveform at point will become
7.
8.
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 388
Analog Circuits
/
k
z
rms
pamp
Gain
(A)
m
(B)
m
(C) 1 m
(D)
m
()
leading by 0
leading by 0
leading by 900
lagging by 0
(B)
10.
Gain
()
(C)
Gain
6V
k
()
+
(D)
3V
Gain
()
t
EE 2009
9.
The following circuit has
k
C = 10 F . The input voltage is a sinusoid
at 50Hz with an rms value of 10V. Under
ideal conditions, the current is from the
source is
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 389
Analog Circuits
(A)
(B)
t
t
t
t
(C)
EE 2010
11. Given that the opamp is ideal, the output
voltage is
(D)
(A) 4V
(B) 6V
(C) 7.5V
(D) 12.12V
EE 2011
12. For the circuit shown below,
13.
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 390
Analog Circuits
ECE/EE/IN 2012
14. The circuit shown is a
(
)
utput
ntput
rad/s
rad/s
rad/s
rad/s
/
/
EE 2014
15. Given that the opamps in the figure are
ideal, the output voltage is
(
)
(A)
(B)
16.
(C)
(D)
/
/
/
/
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 391
17.
(
Analog Circuits
)
/
/
)
or
(
18.
)
/
/
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 392
2.
Analog Circuits
k
k
(A) 0.5
(B) 2
IN  2006
1.
If the value of the resistance R in the
following figure is increased by 50%, then
voltage gain of the amplifier shown in the
figure will change by
(C) 4
(D) 8
3.
4.
k
k
Vin
(A) 50%
(B) 5%
(C) 50%
(D) negligible amount
(A) v0 1
th
th
R2
(v v 1 )
R1 2
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 393
(B) v0 1
2R2
(v v 1 )
R1 2
8.
2R2
(C) v0
(v v 1 )
R1 2
(D) v0 1
Analog Circuits
2R1
(v v 1 )
R 2 2
k
k
5.
I=5 mA
(A) 1.0 mV
(B) 2.0 mV
Output
6
2
555
discharge
(A) 20 kHz
(B) 30 kHz
(C) 2.5mV
(D) 3.0 mV
(C) 40 kHz
(D) 45 kHz
IN  2007
9.
When light falls on the photodiode shown
in the following circuit, the reverse
saturation current of the photodiode
changes from
to
.
k
6.
is given as
(C) 4.67
(D)
7.
Vi
Vo
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 394
and
=
amplifier is
(A) + 110
(B) + 11
11.
Analog Circuits
(D)
o/ i
4 dB
(C)
1
(D) 120
1dB
20 dB/decade
f
330pF
22k
21.9kHz
22k
330pF
12.
10k
7k
.
Vin
o/ i
4 dB
The circuit is a
(A) Low pass filter
(B) Level shifter
(C) Modulator
(D) Precision rectifier
1 dB
20dB/decade
f
21. 9kHz
(B)
13.
/
0 dB
3 dB
40dB/decade
R k
Input
1 k
10 k
21. 9kHz
(C)
o/ i
4 dB
1 dB
40 dB/decade
21. 9kHz
Output
(B)
th
(D)
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 395
14.
Analog Circuits
Noise
Square Wave
7V
8V
3V
RA
RB
output
7V
threshold
ground
is
(A)
VC
2/3 VCC
cc
cc
1/3VCC
0
16.
(B)
V
ccC
2/3 VCC
cc
cc
1/3 VCC
cc
(C)
3V
tr gger
If
6V
1V
1V
reset
discharge
cc
VC
+
+
k
k
cc
cc
2/3 VCC
1/3 VCC
0
(D)
VC
cc
2/3 VCC
1/3 VCC
0
15.
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 396
21.
+
(A) 10V
(B) 10.5V
22.

18.
19.
17.
Analog Circuits
If
.
.
and
7
and the opamp is ideal , the value of the
is
(A) k
(C)
k
(B)
k
(D)
k
Let
sin f t and
K .
The Opamp has a slew rate of . / s
with its other parameters being ideal .The
values of
and f for which the amplifier
output will have no distortion are,
respectively,
(A) 0.1 V and 300kHz
(B) 0.5 V and 300kHz
(C) 0.1 V and 30kHz
(D) 0.5 V and 30kHz
(C) 11V
(D) 15V
Let
and
k . Assume
that the opamp is ideal except for a
nonZero input bias current. What is the
value of
for the output Voltage of the
opamp to be Zero?
(A) . k
(C)
k
(B) . k
(D)
k
IN  2008
20. An ideal opamp has the characteristics of
an ideal
(A) Voltage controlled voltage source
(B) Voltage controlled current source
(C) Current controlled voltage source
(D) Current controlled current source
th
th
th
1V
1V
1V
1V
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 397
24.
is
27.
Analog Circuits
(A)
(B)
10V
5V
(A) R/3
(B) 2R/3
(C) +5V
(D) +10V
IN  2009
25. The circuit shown is the figure is
28.
(C) R
(D) 4R/3
osition
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
26.
An allpass filter
A bandpass filter
A highpass filter
A lowpass filter
(A) 5.00ms
(B) 8.75ms
.7k
ener
diode
.7k
ener
diode
(C) 10.00ms
(D) 13.75ms
IN  2010
29. In the ideal opamp circuit given in the
below figure, the value of Rf is varied from
k
k
(A)
(B)
10V
6.6V
(C)
(D)
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
5V
3.2V
th
remain constant at +1
remain constant at 1
vary as ( /10,000 )
vary as (
/10,000)
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 398
30.
Analog Circuits
IN  2011
Statement for Linked Answer Questions
33and 34
and in the circuit shown below
are matched nchannel enhancement
mode MOSFETs operating in saturation
mode, forward voltage drop of each diode
is .7 reverse leakage current of each
diode is negligible and the opamp is ideal
k
31.
32.
33.
The current
(A) 1 mA
(B) .5 mA
34.
35.
in the circuit is
(C) m
(D) 2 ma
0.5 F
, the
0.5 F
k
1 F
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
th
lowpass filter
highpass filter
bandpass filter
bandreject filter
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 399
36.
The value of
shown below is
40 V(DC)
k
k
6 V(DC)
(A) 24 V
(B) 28 V
(C) 30 V
(D) 32 V
sin
37.
1k
Analog Circuits
5V
1V
(C)
(D)
(A) 1V
(B) 1/3.3V
V
V
IN  2013
39. The operational amplifier shown in the
circuit below has a slew rate of 0.8 Volts /
s. The input signal is .
sin( t . The
maximum frequency of input in kHz for
which there is no distortion in the output
is
~V
470k
22k
0.25sin t
V0
(A) 23.84
(B) 25.0
40.
Assuming that the opamp is ideal and the
zener diodes have forward biased voltage
drop of 0.7V, the values of reverse breakdown voltages of
and
are,
respectively.
(A) 3.3 V and 5.3 V
(B) 4.7 V and 6.7 V
th
(C) 50.0
(D) 46.60
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 400
Analog Circuits
R2
mA
10 k
R1
10 k
Z
Y
5V,
50Hz
V0
R3
V0
V1
(A) 0.45
(B) 0.5
41.
R4
(C) 0.7
(D) 0.9
Fig. a
+5V
R
X
.
2k
1k
Strain
Gage
750
.
V1(t)
(A) 0 Hz
(B) 50 Hz
Differential
Amplifier
V0(t)
(C) 2 kHz
(D) 50kHz
42.
43.
th
Fig. b
Assuming its differential gain to be 10 and
the op amp to be otherwise ideal , the
CMRR is
(C)
(A)
(B)
(D)
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 401
IN  2014
44. For the opamp shown in the figure, the
bias currents are
= 450 nA and
=350 nA. The values of the input bias
current ( ) and the input offset current
( ) are:
47.
k
. 7
Analog Circuits
48.
output
k
nput
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
46.
k
k
k
k
k
k
in
of the
k
. k
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 402
Analog Circuits
4.
[Ans. C]
2 k
[Ans. D]
Initially the switch is closed at t= 0
Then circuit is
The circuit is integrator circuit
1 k
1V
dt
1 k
pply K at node
dv
k
dt
(
k
2.
k
k
k
k
( )
k
[Ans. D]
1 k
)
.
k
) .
k
(
.
.
k
5.
[Ans. D]
Applying KCL
exp (
k
Volt across 24 k
due to virtual
ground concept. So voltage across 12k
is 3V
exp (
ln
ow
)
i
k
ln
ln
watts
3.
[Ans. B]
Unregulated voltage increases by 20%
i. e. New regulated voltage = 18V
6.
k
k
ln
[Ans. A]
watts
increases
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 403
10.
.
Analog Circuits
[Ans. C]
k
k
j
j
j
s
s
s
s
7.
From KCL
s
s
[Ans. C]
s
s
..
Threshold depends on output
So, when
s
s
s
s
When
s
s
tan
tan
tan
inimum value of
at
maximum value of
at
11.
[Ans. A]
12.
[Ans. C]
a
8.
[Ans. B]
(e
Where
and
k
m
.
[Ans. B]
At low frequency, capacitor is open and
inductor short so,
At high frequency capacitor is short and
inductor open so,
so it is low pass filter.
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 404
[
13.
Analog Circuits
)]
[Ans. B]
i
i
Hence given circuit is a high pass filter
15.
[Ans. B]
k
.7
i
For nonzero value of
off, so i
, diode
must be
by virtual short
equivalent connection for transistor is
Then
t
0
t
.7
When
,
conducting so =0V
14.
both
diode
are
16.
0.7V
[Ans. C]
ain of
stage
k
(
)
k
[Ans. D]
At
Hence circuit can be redrawn as below
1k
2V
k
i
k
)
k
1k
Vout
+1V
15 V
1k
1k
Gain of stage II =
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 405
17.
20.
18.
[Ans. B]
e
h
is inversily proportional to Re
if
increases
decreases
f
.
k z
Analog Circuits
if
21.
[Ans. D]
a
.7
k
.7k
.7
.7k
.7k
.
7
22.
[Ans. C]
[Ans. D]
The circuit shown in the figure has
positive feedback. So it can be either a
oscillator or multivibrator.
So option A and C are cancelled out
Now, a voltage controlled oscillator is
usually implemented using a artleys
oscillator where the feedback is like
shown below.
.
19.
.7
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 406
EE
1.
2.
5.
[Ans. D]
When
is positive,
diode will be OFF, so
When
is negative,
diode will be ON, so
Analog Circuits
[Ans. B]
From the transfer characteristic of the
rectifier P is
for
for
will be ve and
V
will be ve and
.7
[Ans. D]
Voltage at non inverting terminal,
From the transfer characteristics of the
rectifier Q is
for
for
3.
[Ans. A]
An astable multivibrator is providing
pulses as given below.
[Ans. D]
It is limited circuit
It makes transition from +5V to 5V
(
[Ans. A]
When
. , O/P will be clamped by a
dc value of 2.5 V
7.
[Ans. C]
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 407
Analog Circuits
i
Let,
magnitude i
ere
s
s
is only on noninverting terminal
Let,
mA
and it will be lagging by 90
)
10.
(
[Ans. D]
k
, we get
k
ere
(
When
When
upto t
after t
ve
ve
( )
o it is high pass filter
8.
11.
[Ans. B]
[Ans. D]
(
12.
C
[Ans. D]
First section is differential amplifier
having gain off 1.
.
.
.
=
.
.
So gain
frequency characteristics will
be as option (D)
9.
[Ans. D]
Voltage at inverting terminal
Output is
So
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 408
15.
econd stage
Analog Circuits
[Ans. B]
schmitt trigger
x
x
y
y
Applying superposition theorem
When y = 0
x
when x
y/
13.
[Ans. D]
Low Pass Filter
y
y
x
from equation
16.
and
[Ans. A]
k
i
20Hz
30Hz
Pass band
[Ans. B]
V= =0
=
=
=
=
=
High pass Fitter with f
s
rad /sec
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 409
17.
Analog Circuits
[Ans. D]
Gain of opamp
is
Hence net output
will vary between
and
IN
1.
[Ans. D]
Voltage gain
So it does not depend on R.
2.
[Ans. B]
When switch
(
18.
is closed,
)
[Ans. C]
3.
[Ans. C]
When OpAmp is used in ve feedback
then voltage difference between the
terminals is treated as zero.
4.
[Ans. A]
The equivalent circuit is as follows:
When
is on
is off
when
is on
is off
 (1)
and
=(
th
th
)
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 410
5.
[Ans. B]
It is a sawtooth wave generator across
capacitor C.
8.
Analog Circuits
[Ans. D]
DC output Voltage that is output offset
voltage,
(
t
T
d
o
dt
d
dt
d
dt
) m
m
m
T
9.
[Ans. B]
k
.
a
T
f
T
6.
k z
The given circuit is
pply K at a
[Ans. C]
.7
=0
.
When
When
When reverse circuit of the photodiode
changes from 100 to
, the output
voltage change from 1V to 2V
I=
I
. =0
.
1.5 =
= 4.47
7.
10.
[Ans. C]
6.7V
I
1.5V
I=
=I
=
. =
.
[Ans. D]
Given that the imp. Parameters are
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Then the given opamp circuit is
= 2.45V
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 411
12.
Analog Circuits
[Ans. D]
R
R
k
k
a
Vin
b
pply K
at a
pply K
at x
Case1
When
ve half cycle then switch (s)
is closed and circuit will become
ain
11.
[Ans. B]
.
p
Vin
k
k
p
( )
(
7k
Case 2
When
ve half cycle then switch s is
open and circuit will become
Vin
. k z
It has a decade form 0 dB to
frequency range.
3 dB in mid
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 412
through resistor
. But
is shorted
out. So discharge time constant
.So
capacitor
will
instantly discharge so correct output is in
option (A)
=
So, the circuit as a rectifier (fullwave)
13.
[Ans. B]
O/P of first OPAMP
t
15.
t dt, where
t dt
t dt
input is
, 50Hz square wave. O/P
should be triangular wave of
.
50Hz means 20msec, so in 10msec O/P
should charge from
.
to
. ,
when
.
Analog Circuits
[Ans. B]
The UTP value selected in such a way that
to recover a square wave of same
frequency from the input signal
When
The output is
When
and
When
We can recover a square wave of same
frequency from the corrupted input signal
when UTP and LTP value are
16.
[Ans. B]
k
dt
k
+
+
14.
[Ans. C]
Apply KCL at
K
RA
node
reset
discharge
RB
out
tr gger
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Now, Apply KCL at
threshold
ground
Node
.
For an ideal opamp
.
.
.
.
.7
. m
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 413
17.
[Ans. B]
Analog Circuits
K
.

20.
[Ans. A]
21.
[Ans. B]
K
K
. K
and
.
[
Put,
. 7
]
.
and
.
22.
[Ans. D]
At low frequency, C is open and
At high frequency C is short and
(
k
18.
[Ans. C]
sin f (
23.
sin ft
d
 
dt
f cos ft
[Ans. D]
When
and is connected to
inverting terminal, output will saturate to
+10V.
f
To avoid distortion,
Slew rate
.
f

f
f
7 7. 7
So when f
k z and
Then f
7 7.7
So option (C) is correct.
19.
nd
When
crosses 1 V,
So, output
will not change to
.
So, output will change from
to
when
.
[Ans. B]
In order to avoid the effect of the bias
current, resistance at +ve terminal must
be equal to dc resistance seen from ve
terminal by replacing all the sources by
their internal resistances.
Therefore,
k
K
K
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 414
24.
[Ans. B]
Equivalent circuit
k
Analog Circuits
.
Now first open the zener diode then
circuit will be
k
k
k
k
.
Similarly, by neglecting current through
K compare to current through
resistance,
k
.
i
k
.7
.7
.7
o
.
5.2 V
25.
[Ans. A]
s
s [
[Ans. B]
Zener diode is in reverse bias. The
equivalent circuit is,
here i
k
k
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 415
27.
[Ans. A]
Analog Circuits
at time t , when
will switch to 5V.
2R
. ,
e
.7 ms
.
t
3R
becomes
29.
[Ans. A]
Input resistance
a
b
and
pply K
at a
[Ans. B]
When the switch is at position 1,
capacitor will be charged by +30V and
. so voltage at non inverting
terminal will be 2.5V.
When switch is moved to position 2,
capacitor will start discharging and when
. .
will switch to 5V.
Equivalent circuit
30.
[Ans. D]
DC gain = 20 log   = 20 dB
3dB cutoff frequency =
31.
= 1 kHz
[Ans. C]
7 k
7k
k
nvertinf terminal
7k
7 k
s
voltage
i t
e
at
i t
inverting
terminal
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 416
with
Since,
and
are all matched
transistors
So,
say
Then
m
or
. m
lso
. m
with
[Ans. B]
Now the effective circuit is
7 k
34.
[Ans. A]
will be reverse biased while
will be
forward biased
o
(Forward voltage drop of )
.7
.
.
35.
[Ans. A]
The ideal opamp based circuit is shown
in figure 1. with Tnetwork at the input
and feedback paths,. Note the specific
relations between resistances and
capacitances used. It can be shown that
this circuit acts as a double integrator and
hence it is a low pass filter specifically
transfer function
7k
Analog Circuits
7 k
7 k
.
.
33.
igure
[Ans. B]
k
s
s
s
.
or
.
. sec
. s
s
The frequency response is given by
j
40 dB per decade
Clearly
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 417
36.
[Ans. C]
38.
[Ans. D]
When input voltage
cycle)
Forward biased
Reverse biased
(During
(During
ve
[Ans. C]
.7
. m
or
so
or
37.
Analog Circuits
ve
.7
ow
39.
[Ans. A]
.
1k
Where
f
.7
.7
.7
.7
or
.
.
40.
[Ans. A]
41.
[Ans. C]
For OpAmp
Analysis
k z
sin t
.
sin t
.7
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 418
s
s
T.
Analog Circuits
. k z
7
d
. k z
d
d
Lower 3 dB dominant frequency is 0.5
kHz.
Total response
ere
one pole
s
OPAmp
east attenuated
frequency k z
Low frequencies
z
z
k z
f
. k z
k z
k z
OpAmp
Analysis
42.
[Ans. C]
from given data
m
m
Solving (1) & (2)
s
s
T.
s
s
*
43.
[Ans. B]
5V
+*
*
. k z
For
variation is
varies from 12.48mV to 12.56mV
.
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 419
Analog Circuits
m , given
from bridge
For
change
.
m
=127.8 mV
For
change
op amp
. m
m
. m
m
. m
O/P varies from 7. m to
. m
i
.
47.
[Ans. *]Range 15 to 16
It is secondorder low pass system. ts
high cutofffrequency
f
ere
44.
[Ans. D]
In an OPAMP,
45.
48.
[Ans. B]
Given
k and gain
For an inverting amplifier, Gain =
10
/ k
Then
k
f
. 7
k
k
. 7
. 7
ln [
ln [
]
]
.
Time period
.
46.
.
m secs
[Ans. 0.6]
k
. k
i
d
virtual ground
K
i
at ode
k
oi
i
. ki
. k
ki
ki
. k
ki
. k
ki
ki
. ki
ki
ki
k
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 420
Analog Circuits
Power Amplifiers
EE  2007
1.
The input signal Vin shown in the figure is
a 1 KHz square wave voltage that
alternates between +7V and 7V with a
50% duty cycle. Both transistors have the
same current gain, which is large. The
circuit delivers power to the load resistor
RL. What is the efficiency of this circuit for
the given input? Choose the closest
answer.
(A) 46%
(B) 55%
EE  2009
2.
Transformer and emitter follower can
both be used for impedance matching
at the output of an audio amplifier. The
basic relationship between the input
power Pin and output power Pout in both
the cases is
(A) Pin = Pout for both transformer and
emitter follower
(B) Pin > Pout for both transformer and
emitter follower
(C) Pin < Pout for transformer and
Pin = Pout for emitter follower
(D) Pin = Pout for transformer and
Pin < Pout for emitter follower
(C) 63%
(D) 92%
[Ans. C]
load voltage = 6.3 V
So efficiency
2.
[Ans. D]
For emitter follower
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 421
Digital Circuits
ECE2007
3.
X = 01110 and Y = 11001 are two 5bit
binary numbers represented in twos
complement format. The sum of X and Y
represented in twos complement format
using 6 bits is,
(A) 100111
(C) 000111
(B) 001000
(D) 101001
ECE2008
4.
The two numbers represented in signed
2s complement form are P = 11101101
and Q = 11100110. If Q is subtracted
from P, the value obtained in signed 2s
complement form is
(A) 100000111
(C) 11111001
(B) 00000111
(D) 111111001
ECE2014
5.
The number of bytes required to
represent the decimal number 1856357
in packed BCD (Binary Coded Decimal)
form is __________.
EE2007
1.
The octal equivalent of the HEX number
AB.CD is
(A) 253.314
(C) 526.314
(B) 253.632
(D) 526.632
EE2014
2.
A cascade of three identical modulo5
counters has an overall modulus of
(A) 5
(C) 125
(B) 25
(D) 625
3.
IN2006
1.
A number N is stored in a 4bit 2s
complement representation as
a3
a2
a1
a0
It is copied into a 6bit register and after a
few operations, the final bit pattern is
a
a
a
a
a
1
The value of this bit pattern in 2s
complement representation is given in
terms of the original number is N as
(A) 32 a3 + 2N + 1 (C) 2N 1
(B) 32 a3 2N 1
(D) 2N + 1
IN2008
2.
The result of (45)10 (45)16 expressed in
6bit 2s complement representation is,
(A) 011000
(C) 101000
(B) 100111
(D) 101001
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 422
IN2009
3.
The binary representation of the decimal
number 1.375 is,
(A) 1.111
(C) 1.011
(B) 1.010
(D) 1.001
Digital Circuits
IN2011
4.
The base of the number
addition operation 24 +
true is
(A) 8
(C)
(B) 7
(D)
2.
3.
4.
5.
[Ans. D]
100 010
4
2
011
3
001
1
[Ans. A]
1
1 byte = 8 bit so
Here d = 7
No. of bits = 28
[Ans. C]
x
= 01110
y
= 11001
)
x y(
= 100111
Carry discard it
00111 in 6 bits will be 000111
[Ans. B]
igned 2 s complement of
P = 11101101
o P = 00010011
igned 2 scomplement of
= 11100110
P
= P (2 s complement of )
= 00010011
11100110
11111001
) = 00000111
2 s complement of (P
byte =
EE
1.
= 3 5= 4
[Ans. B]
Hex number (AB.CD)
1010
1011
1100
1101
For finding its octal number, we add one
zero in both extreme and group 3 bit
together
010
101
011
110
011
010
2.
[Ans. C]
Overall modulus = 5 = 125
3.
[Ans. D]
BCD counter counts up to 1001
IN
1.
[Ans. D]
Given number is a a a a in 2s
complement form.
We know that in 2s complement form if
we copy MSB at left of MSB any times the
number remains unchanged.
So a a a a = a a a a a a =
When we left shift a number by 1 bit then
it is multiplied by 2, a a a a a 0 = 2
Now,
a a a a a 0 1=a a a a a 1=2
1
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 423
2.
[Ans. C]
(45)
(45)
= ( 24)
3.
[Ans. C]
0.375 2 = 0.750
0.750 2 = 1.5
1.5 2 = 1.0
Hence answer is 1.011
4.
[Ans. B]
Let the base is x, Here
(24)
(14) = (41)
(4 x
2 x) (4 x
= (4 x
4 + 2x + 4 + x = 4x + 1
x=7
Digital Circuits
= (101000)
1 x)
1 x )
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 424
Digital Circuits
be minimized to
(A)
(B)
can
(A) X
(B) Y
(C)
ECE2014
5.
The Boolean expression (
( ) simplifies to
(C)
(B)
(D)
7.
ECE2009
2.
If X = 1 in the logic equation
EC/EE/IN 2012
3.
In the sum of
products function
(
) (
), the prime implicants
are
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
(C) XY
(D) X+Y
6.
(D)
[X+Z{
( +X ) }] { + ( X + Y)}
=1 then
(A) Y = Z
(C) Z = 1
(D) Z = 0
(B) Y =
)(
EE2010
Statement for Linked Answer Questions1
and 2
The following Karnaugh map represent a
function .
F
YZ
ECE2013
4.
In the circuit shown below, Q1 has
negligible collector to emitter
saturation voltage and the diode drops
negligible voltage across it under forward
bias. If Vcc is +5 V, X and Y are digital
signals with 0 V as logic 0 and
as logic
1, then the Boolean expression for Z is
X
YZ
0
01
11
10
00
01
11
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
A minimized form of the function is
(A)
(C)0
1
0
1
(B)
(D)
1.
R1
Z
R2
X
00
F
10
0
0
0
Q1
Diode
2.
(A) XY
(C) X
(B)
(D)
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 425
(A)
Digital Circuits
( )
X
F
(A)
Y
Z
(B)
X
(B)
X
F
Y
Z
(C)
X
F
Y
Z
F
(C)
X
Y
Z
(D)
X
4.
)(
)(
(B) (
)(
)
)( )( )
(C) (
)(
)( )(
(D) (
)(
)
F
Y
Z
(D)
Y
X
( )
Y
Z
F
Z
F
EE2014Y
Z
3.
Which of the following
logic circuits is a
realization of the function F whose
Karnaugh map is shown in figure
( )
( )
IN2006
1.
Minterm (Sum of Products) expression
for a Boolean function is given as follows.
f(A, B, C) = m (0, 1, 2, 3, 5, 6) where A is
the MSB and C is the LSB. The minimized
expression for the function is
(A) A + (B C)
(C)
(B C)
(B) (A B) + C
(D)
IN2007
2.
A logic circuit implements the Boolean
function F = . Y + X . . . It is found that
the input combination X = Y = 1 can
never occur. Taking this into account, a
simplified expression for F, is given by
(C) X + Y
(A) + .
(B) X + Z
(D) Y + X.
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 426
3.
Let X
and Y =
be unsigned
2bit numbers. The function F = 1 if X > Y
and F = 0 otherwise. The minimized sum
of products expression for F is
(A)
+ . .
+ +
(B)
(C)
+
+
+
. +
(D)
Digital Circuits
IN2011
6.
For the Boolean expression
,
the
minimized Product of Sum (PoS)
expression is
(
(A)
) (
)
)
(B)
(
) (
(C)
(
)(
)
(D)
IN2008
4.
The minimum sum of products form of
the Boolean expression
Y =
(A) Y = P +
(B) Y = P
(C) Y = P
(D) Y =
IN2009
5.
The minimal sumofproducts expression
for the logic function f represented by the
given Karnaugh map is
PQ
RS
00 01 11 10
00 0 1 0 0
01
11
10
(A) QS +
(B)
(C)
+
+
(D)
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 427
Digital Circuits
4.
[Ans. B]
X Y Z
0 0 0
[Ans. D]
Kmap corresponding to given Boolean
expression
CD
AB
01
00
00
11
10
1
1
01
11
Comments
Transistor off
diode ON
Transistor off
diode rev biases
Transistor ON
diode rev biases
Transistor ON
diode rev biased
10
So, Y=Z
OR
5.
[Ans. A]
(
)(
6.
2.
[Ans. D]
yz
[Ans. D]
(
wx
))+ [
)]
By putting X = 1
(
*
[
) (
)
))+ [
)]
xz
y
[Ans. A]
(
YZ
1
7.
[Ans. D]
Maximum P.I will occurs at condition like
1 1
(
)
So prime implicants are and .
1
1
1
1
1
1
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 428
EE
1.
2.
[Ans. D]
[Ans. B]
X
01 11 10
F = + YZ
2.
3.
4.
[Ans. D]
From the figure it is clear that, two NAND
and now two
gates generate the
and inputs
AND gates with inputs
Y and Z is used to generate two terms of
SOP form and now OR gate is used to sum
them and generate the F.
[Ans. C]
[Ans. A]
K map
YZ
00
X
0 0
)(
)(
)(
X
F=Y+X
[Ans. D]
F = 1 if X > Y, so following will be K map
of function F.
00
00
0
01
0
11
0
10
0
01
11
10
F=
4.
00
01
11
10
1 0
F
0
0
1
1
1
0
x
x
10
1
[Ans. C]
From K map
BC
Z
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
01 11
0
1
3.
IN
1.
Truth table:
X
Y
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
YZ
00
Digital Circuits
[Ans. A]
By K map
f = + B + C
=+B C
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 429
5.
00
00 1
01
0
11
0
10
1
01
11
10
[Ans. A]
PQ
RS
00
Q
S 00
0
6.
Digital Circuits
01
1
11
0
10
0
01
11
10
[Ans. A]
(
)
(
[
)(
[(
)]
(
)
(
)
(
)(
)
(
)(
)
Alternative method:
00
1
01
0
11
0
10
1
)(
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 430
Digital Circuits
Logic Gates
ECE2007
1.
The Boolean function Y =AB + CD is to be
realized using only 2 input NAND gates.
The minimum number of gates required
is
(A) 2
(C) 4
(B) 3
(D) 5
5.
ECE2008
2.
The logic function implemented by the
following circuit at the terminal OUT is
(A) P NOR Q
(B) P NAND Q
3.
P
Q
Y
R
Y
R
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
ECE2011
6.
The output Y in the circuit below is
always 1 when
(C) P OR Q
(D) P AND Q
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
OUT
P
= (P OR Q)XOR R
= (P AND Q) XOR R
= (P NOR Q) XOR R
= (P XOR Q) XOR R
ECE2010
4.
For the output F to be 1 in the logic circuit
shown, the input combination should be
A
B
F
C
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 431
Digital Circuits
ECE2012
7.
In the circuit shown
5 Volts
A
C
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
B
Y
C
10.
A
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
4
1024
3
1024
E
2
1024
E
B.
C.
D.
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
input
S1 S0
0C00H
2C00H
1800H
3800H
0500H
3500H
0800H
2800H
0FFFH, 1C00H
2FFFH, 3C00H
1FFFH, 2800H
3FFFH, 4800H
08FFH, 1500H
38FFH, 5500H
0BFFH, 1800H
2BFFH, 3800H
XOR
1
11
10
01
00
0,
EE2007
1.
A, B, C and D are input bits, and Y is the
output bit in the XOR gate circuit of the
figure below. Which of the following
statements about the sum S of A, B, C, D
and Y is correct?
A
XOR
B
1024
A15
A.
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
y
y
y
y
ECE2013
8.
There are four chips each of 1024 bytes
connected to a 16 bit address bus as
shown in the figure below. RAMs 1, 2, 3
and 4 respectively are mapped to
addresses
A0 A9
y
y
y
y
1FFFH,
3FFFH
2FFFH,
4FFFH
18FFH,
58FFH
1BFFH,
3BFFH
ECE2014
9.
The output F in the digital logic circuit
shown in the figure is
C
XOR
D
(A) S is always either zero or odd
(B) S is always either zero or even
(C) S = 1 only if the sum of A, B, C and D
is even
(D) S = 1 only if the sum of A, B, C and D
is odd
EE2009
2.
The complete set of only those Logic
Gates designated as Universal Gates is
(A) NOT, OR and AND Gates
(B) XNOR, NOR and NAND Gate
(C) NOR and NAND Gates
(D) XOR, NOR and NAND Gates
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 432
EE2011
3.
The output Y of the logic circuit given
below is
(A) 1
(B) 0
Digital Circuits
(A)
( )?
Vav
5V
(C) X
(D)
T/2
IN2006
1.
All the logic gates in the circuit shown
below have finite propagation delay. The
circuit can be used as a clock generator, if
(B)
Vav
5V
Vav
Y
(C)
Vav
X
(A) X = 0
(B) X = 1
1
T/2
Vav
(C) X = 0 or 1
(D) X = Y
IN2007
2.
Two square waves of equal period T, but
with a time delay are applied to a digital
circuit whose truth table is shown in the
following figure.
X
Y
Output
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
X
5V
T/2
(D)
Vav
2.5V
T/2
IN2009
3.
The diodes in the circuit shown are ideal.
A voltage of 0V represents logic 0 and
+5V represents logic1.The function Z
realized by the circuit for inputs X and Y
is
+ 5V
T/2
Y
1
T/2
(C) Z =
(D) Z=
(A) Z=X + Y
(B) Z=XY
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 433
IN2010
4.
The logic gate circuit shown in the figure
realizes the function
A
X
(A) XOR
(B) XNOR
Digital Circuits
EC/EE/IN2013
5.
A bulb in a staircase has two switches,
one switch being at the ground floor and
the other one at the first floor. The bulb
can be turned ON and also can be turned
OFF by any one of the switch irrespective
of the state of the other switch. The logic
of switching of the bulb resembles
(A) An AND gate
(C) A XOR gate
(B) An OR gate
(D) A NAND gate
5.
[Ans. D]
P = = = 4
Q = = + = 2
R = A B = A + B = 3
S = A B = AB + = 1
6.
[Ans. B]
The output Y expression in the ckt
(Majority circuit)
So that two or more inputs are 1,
always 1.
[Ans. B]
A
B
AB + CD
C
D
2.
3.
[Ans. D]
When P = Q = 1, then OUT = 1
P = Q = 0, then OUT = 0
P = 0, Q = 1, then OUT = 0
P = 1, Q = 0, then OUT = 0
So, it is AND gate
7.
[Ans. A]
In NMOS circuit
Since & are in parallel so those
represent (
) & is in sense, so it
represents dot operation and the whole
function should be inverted or it is
complementary logic.
So,
(
)
8.
[Ans. D]
For RAM #1
[Ans. D]
X=
;Y=P+Q
Z = XY =
=(
. (P + Q)
)(
4.
[Ans. D]
For 3 input XNOR for output to be one,
two input must be one, and we know that
2 input XOR & XNOR gate are
complementary & hence only 1(1s) will
be generated & C=1 is required
i.e, When A = 0, B = 0 and C = 1,
then F = 1
is
0 0 0
0
0 0
0
ower add
ighest add
0000
1 0 1 1 11
0
So range of add for RAM #1
0 00
0
which is present only in option D
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 434
9.
10.
[Ans. A]
( )(( )
( )(( )
( )
)
(
)
(
IN
1.
A
B
[Ans. B]
When X = 1, equivalent circuit is
))
Y
This circuits act as clock generator.
[Ans. A]
C
2.
[Ans. C]
When = 0 X and Y will be same and
output will be equal to dc of 5V.
(
(
EE
1.
2.
3.
AB
A
B
)
) (
[Ans. B]
from the given
diagram. We know that sum of any
number of bits is XOR of all bits.
So
S
S=YY
S = either zero or even because LSB is
zero (always).
[Ans. C]
NOR and NAND are designated as
universal logic gates, because using any
one of them we can implement all the
logic gates.
[Ans. A]
Y= .
X
1
0
0
1
.
Y
Digital Circuits
, O/P will
[Ans. B]
When any of X or Y is zero, Z = 0. For
X = Y = 1, Z = 1
4.
[Ans. A]
X
y
x
Z= y. y
5.
= y
y =xy
[Ans. C]
When both switches in on position, bulb
is off
When both switches in off position, bulb
is off
Bulb
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
It is a XOR gate
1
1
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 435
Digital Circuits
1 4k
4k
Q1
100k
R
2
(A) 4 V, 3 V, 2 V
(B) 5 V, 5 V, 5 V
Q4
D
4.
Q2
(C) 4 V, 4 V, 4 V
(D) 5 V, 4 V, 3 V
Q3
1k

(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
EE  2010
1.
The TTL circuit shown in the figure is fed
with the waveform X (also shown). All
gates have equal propagation delay of
10ns. The output Y of the circuit is
x
100 ns
ECE  2014
3.
In the following circuit employing pass
transistor logic, all NMOS transistors are
identical with a threshold voltage of 1V.
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 436
Digital Circuits
IN  2007
1.
A CMOS implementation of a logic gate is
shown in the following figure:
5v
(A)
Y
X
Y
PMOS
1
0
NMOS
(B)
Y
1
0
(C)
IN  2014
2.
The figure is a logic circuit with inputs A
and B and output Y. = + 5 V. The
circuit is of type
(D)
1
0
(A) NOR
(B) AND
th
th
(C) OR
(D) NAND
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 437
Digital Circuits
EE
1.
[Ans. B]
reverse active,
saturation
saturation,
2.
[Ans. A]
X
cut off
[Ans. C]
TTL Transistor Transistor Logic
CMOS Complementary Metal Oxide
Semiconductor
1
X
0
3.
[Ans. C]
Suppose all NMOS at saturation
For
1 &
Y=X
4
For
(
IN
1.
1)
(4
[Ans. C]
NOR Gate
(4
2.
[Ans. D]
Given circuit is of the standard 2 input
NAND gate.
4
1
(4
4.
4
4
[Ans. A]
The given circuit is CMOS implementation
If the NMOS is connected in series, then
the output expression is product of each
input with complement to the final
product.
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 438
Digital Circuits
1 0 1 1
MSB
LSB
FULL
ADDER
CK
f
0 0 1 1
Shift Registers
Ci
C0
CK
D
(A)
(B)
CK
(C)
(D) A
CLOCK
2.
The inputs
and
respectively should
be connected as
ECE  2007
4.
For the circuit shown, the counter state
(Q1 Q0) follows the sequence
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
3.
(C) S = 1, C0= 0
(D) S = 1, C0= 1
and
and
and
and
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
5.
Y
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 439
Digital Circuits
CLK
1
CLK
0
T
6.
I0
I1
I2
I3
4to1
MUX
Y
S1
S0
0
1
1
0
I0
I1
I2
I3
S1
4to1
MUX
Y
S0
(A)
1
0
2T
t
1
(A)
(B)
(B)
(C)
0
4T
t
(D)
(C)
ECE  2008
7. For the circuit shown in the following
figure,
are inputs to the 4:1
multiplexer. R(MSB) and S are control
bits.
1
0
2T
(D)
1
0
4T
t
9.
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 440
ECE  2009
10. What are the counting states (Q1, Q2) for
the counter shown in the figure below?
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
11.
ip
ip
Q1 P 1
Digital Circuits
a
f
Q1
b
c
d
P2
Q2 P 2
Q2
Consider
(i) Push Button pressed/not Pressed in a
equivalent to logic 1/0 respectively.
(ii) A segment glowing / not glowing in the
display is equivalent to logic 1/0
respectively.
13.
(C) g
e b c
(D) g
e b c
14.
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 441
ECE  2010
15. The Boolean function realized by the logic
circuit shown is
Data
Digital Circuits
Clock
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
MUX
19.
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
16.
5
5
5
cha ged fr
t
cha ged fr
t
changed in either direction
not changed
(A) F = AND(P, Q)
(B) F = OR(P, Q)
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
ECE  2014
20. Five JK flipflops are cascaded to form the
circuit shown in Figure. Clock pulses at a
frequency of 1 MHz are applied as shown.
The frequency (in kHz) of the waveform
at Q3 is _____.
ECE  2011
17. Two D flip flops are connected as a
synchronous counter that goes through
the
following
sequence
The connections to the inputs
are
(A)
and
(C) F = XNOR(P, Q)
(D) F = XOR(P, Q)
21.
(B)
(C)
(D)
18.
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 442
23.
Digital Circuits
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
and S is
24.
(C)
(D)
In the circuit shown, choose the correct
timing diagram of the output (y) from the
given waveforms
a d
.
(A)
(B)
25.
(C)
(D)
atch
atch
utput y
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 443
26.
Digital Circuits
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
28.
29.
30.
th
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 444
Digital Circuits
EE  2011
3.
A twobit counter circuit is shown below.
EE  2006
1.
A 4 1 MUX is used to implement a 3
input Boolean function as shown in figure.
The
Boolean
Function
F(A,B,C)
implemented is
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
F (A,B,C) =
F (A,B,C) =
F (A,B,C) =
F (A,B,C) =
If the state
of the counter at the
clock time t is the the state
of the counter at t
(after three clock
cycles) will be
(A) 00
(C) 10
(B) 01
(D) 11
F (A, B, C)
CLK
EE  2013
4.
The clock frequency applied to the digital
circuit show in the figure blow is 1 kHz. If
the initial state of the output Q of the flip
f p is the the freque cy f the
output wavefrom Q in kHz is
(1,2,4,6)
(1,2,6)
(2,4,5,6)
(1,5,6)
EE  2008
2.
A 3 line to 8 line decoder, with active low
outputs, is used to implement a
3 variable Boolean function as shown in
the figure.
CLK
3L x 8L Decoder
z
y
x
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
(A) 0.25
(B) 0.5
F
(
)
>
(C) 1
(D) 2
EE  2014
5.
A state diagram of a logic gate which
exhibits a delay in the output is shown in
the figure, where X is the d t care
condition, and Q is the output
representing the state.
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 445
6.
Digital Circuits
f ip f p
8.
utput
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
7.
The monoshots a d
when triggered
produce pulses of width
a d
respectively, where
. The steady
state output voltage
of the circuit is
f ip f p
t
f ip f p
f ip f p
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 446
IN  2006
1.
Given that the initial state (Q1Q0) is 00,
the counting sequence of the counter
shown in the following figure is, Q1Q0 =
Digital Circuits
IN  2007
Statement for Linked Answer Questions 3 & 4
Consider the circuit shown in the following
figure.
J0
J1
Q1
CLK
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
2.
K0
00
00
00
00
11
01
11
10
01
11
10
01
10
10
01
11
00
00
00
00
I0
I1
I2
I3
I4
I5
I6
I7
(MSB)
4.
The
5.
Y
Z
MUX
A
B
C
Select Inputs
(A)
(B) C (A + B)
3.
(LSB)
(C)
(D) + AB
to
QB
QA
CLK
TA
CLK
Q
TB
CLK
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 447
6.
1
MUX out
9.
F1
I0
I1
4
0
S
Digital Circuits
I2
I3
1
MUX out
F0
0
Y
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
(A) ()
)
(B) (
+Z
(C)
(D)
IN  2008
Statement for Linked Answer Questions 7
&8
Consider the counter circuit shown
below.
10.
1 MUX
S1
S0
F=PQR
F = PQ + QR + RP
F = (P Q) R
F = (P Q)
J Q
Q0
J Q
Q1
Q2
Clock
KCLR
KCLR
KCLR
J Q Q3
(A) 5 ns
(B) 10 ns
K CLR
IN  2009
11. The figure below shows a 3bit ripple
counter, with
as the MSB. The flipflops are risingedge triggered. The
counting direction is
8.
1
Clock
7.
(C) 20 ns
(D) 50 ns
CLK
1
Q1
CLK
CLK
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 448
Q2
12.
CLK
(A) 0 0 0 0 . . .
(B) 1 0 1 0 . . .
(C) 1 1 1 1 . . .
(D) 1 0 0 0 . . .
16.
IN  2011
13. The circuit below shows as up/down
counter working with a decoder and a
flipflop. Preset and clear of the flipflop
are asynchronous activelow inputs
CLOCK
15.
Digital Circuits
e ect
3 to 8 Decoder
C
reset
Q
FlipFlop
Clock
c ear
Count
Down
A(L.SB)
Up/down Counter
Count Up
Clock
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 449
IN  2013
17. The digital circuit shown below uses two
negative edge triggered D flip flops.
Assuming initial condition of
and
as zero, the ouput
of this circuit is
D1
D0
DFlipflop
DFlipflop
Digital Circuits
IN  2014
18. Frequency of an analog periodic signal in
the range of 5 kHz  10 kHz is to be
measured with a resolution of 100Hz by
measuring its period with a counter.
Assuming negligible signal and transition
delays the minimum clock frequency and
minimum number of bits in the counter
needed, respectively, are:
(A) 1 MHz, 10bits
(B) 10 MHz, 10bits
(C) 1 MHz, 8bits
(D) 10MHz, 8bits
Clock
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
S = 1,
[Ans. D]
When P is stuck at 1, f = A
4.
[Ans. B]
The i/p to first F/F
=
The i/p to second F/F
=
C
(
2.
0
0
1
1
3.
[Ans. A]
Present State
So
,C=1
0
1
1
0
[(
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
5.
[Ans. C]
When X = 0, Y = 1 then P = 1 and Q = 0
X = 0, Y = 0 then P = 1 and Q = 1
X = 1, Y = 1 then P = 0 and Q = 1 or
P = 1 and Q = 0
6.
[Ans. A]
Let the output of first MUX is Y
Y = B + A = A B
and
[Ans. D]
Before clock pulse S = C = 0
After first clock pulse A = B = 1 So
S = 0,
C=1
After second clock pulse A = B = 1 So
(initially
at rest)
1st
0 0 1 1
clk
2nd 1 1 0 0
3rd
0 0 0 0
So sequence generated
00, 01, 10, 00
Next State
0
1
1
0
)]
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 450
X=
So X = A B C
i.e,
7.
[Ans. A]
(
ts
11.
[Ans. C]
For NAND latch, when (
) are (0, 1),
(
) will be (1, 0) and when (
)
are (1, 1), (
) will be (1, 0).
For NOR latch, when (
) are (0, 1),
(
) will be (1, 0) and when (
)
are (1, 1), (
) will be (0, 0).
12.
[Ans. A]
ap
PQ
RS
00
00
01
11 10
1
01
11
10
Digital Circuits
SP
O
Y = AB
PQ
So
Now only option (A) has two similar
terms, we can say that option A is not
most simplified version of Z it can be
obtained as
A
B
Y=A B
1
PQ
RS
11
10
01
11
10
00
00
01
0
A
PS
PQ
9.
10.
13.
[Ans. B]
At
clock will be divide by 4 and will
have 2 T delay w.r.t clock.
[Ans. C]
Initially, when clk is high and D is low,
Q = 0 or 1,
When clk goes low and D is also low ,
Q = 1,
When clk is low and D goes high, Q = 0.
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
14.
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
g
d
[Ans. A]
0
1
0
1
1
[Ans. B]
.
.
c e
[Ans. D]
gates
gates
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 451
15.
[Ans. D]
21.
[Ans. D]
If one input of the gate is kept constant,
and A is interchanged with , an XNOR
gate acts as XOR gate.
22.
[Ans. C]
In half subtractor
Difference x y xy
x y
b rr w x y
x
y
Borrow
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
x.
5
16.
[Ans. D]
Initially
0
After first clk
1
nd
After 2 clk
1
After 3rdclk
0
So
. . . . . ..
17.
[Ans. D]
Q(present)
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
Digital Circuits
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
23.
Difference
0
1
1
0
[Ans. C]
Q (next)
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
18.
19.
20.
[Ans. A]
Given Y=1, this implies
Both the output of D flip flop
should be 1 i.e, input at first flip flop is 1
and for output of 2nd flip flop to be 1,
inverted output of first flip should be 1 in
previous clock, for which input must be 0
so data is changing from 0 to 1.
[Ans. D]
From the CKT
0 is connected to
&
d is c
ected t
So wave form
24.
[Ans. D]
This is a figure of Johnson counter
So
0
1
1
0
0
1
So =
and
is correct
0
0
1
1
0
0
z
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 452
25.
[Ans. D]
26.
[Ans. D]
2.
Digital Circuits
[Ans. A]
[
3.
[Ans. C]
Clock
Input
Output
utput f first
et
utput f sec d
Initial
state
1
2
3
28.
[Ans. C]
CLK
[Ans. A]
30.
EE
1.
[Ans. C]
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
[Ans. B]
.
]
[
ecause
a ways
29.
0
1
0
4.
27.
1
0
1
>
a ways
i put
a ways
r f ip flop if input is =1 then output
will be complemented at the time of
triggering.
CLK
[Ans. A]
2T
F (A, B, C)=
th
.5 f
.5
.5 z
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 453
5.
[Ans. D]
IN
1.
Digital Circuits
[Ans. A]
Clock
(
1
1
1
1
1
gate
6.
[Ans. A]
Gray code output
o/p
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
When
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
2.
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
[Ans. C]
)
)(
utput
e ect i puts
3.
[Ans. B]
Y=
[Ans. A]
TFF to JKFF is given by eq
4.
[Ans. B]
a d
1
0
1
0
utput
7.
1
1
1
1
1
[Ans. C]
Let
is initially high. Since
is from
will be high for
time. The
waveform is shown below:
So initially
it means
so after one clock cycle
will be 010.
5.
[Ans. D]
01
10, both
both will toggle.
= 1 so
and
6.
[Ans. B]
7.
[Ans. A]
Y =
.
trigger
t
=
=
t
8.
[Ans. C]
Whenever Y=1, then clear input of all the
s receives a d utputs f the
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 454
10.
So sequence is 0,1,2,3,4,5,4,3,2,1,0,1,2.
14.
[Ans. B]
Let A1 A0 be the bits of number A and
B1B0 be the bits of number B and let Y be
the output
A1
A0
B1
B0
Y
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
A1
A0
B1
B0
Y
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
From the truth table we see that the
u ber f ti es bec es is
15.
[Ans. A]
[Ans. A]
(
[Ans. B]
f
t
where N no. of inverters
and t  Propagation delay of each, so
t
sec
11.
[Ans. A]
Since triggering in positive edge
triggering & Q of pervious flip flop is
input to next hence always down
12.
[Ans. C]
Digital Circuits
1
1
13.
[Ans. D]
Initially Q=0 and count up ( =1) is active
so it started counting up and when it
reaches to 5 then decoder output at pin 5
becomes 0 and preset will be active and it
will set Q and it will make the counter
mode down and count becomes 4, then 3
then 2 then 1 then 0, as soon as it reaches
0, decoder output at pin 0 is low and clear
is active and Q goes to 0 and = 1 so up is
active a d it c u ts
next
= .
.
= A.CLK + Q
next = A.CLK +
If CLK = 1 and A and B = 1
then
} No race around
If CLK = 1 and A = B = 0
} No race around
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 455
Digital Circuits
[Ans. D]
State table
A
Q=O
Q=1
A=O
A=1
A=1
17.
[Ans. B]
State table
Present
state
Next
state
0
0 0
0
1 1
1
1 1
1
0 0
00, 01, 11, 10, 00
18.
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
[Ans. C]
i c c freque cy
z
5
i
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 456
Digital Circuits
AD /DA Convertor
ECE2006
1.
A 4bit D/A converter is connected to a
freerunning 3bit UP counter, as shown
in the following figure. Which of the
following waveforms will be observed at
V 0?
3.
D3
D2
D1
D0
Q1
Q0
Clock 3bit
Counter
IDEAL
Vo
1k
(C) 3.125 V
(D) 6.250 V
ECE2008
Statement for linked Answer Questions 4
and 5
In the following circuit, the comparator
output is logic 1 if
and is logic
0otherwise. The D/A conversion is
done as per the relation
=
2
Volts, where
(MSB),
and
(LSB) are the
counter outputs.
The counter starts from the clear state.
1k
Q2
The voltage Vo is
(A) 0.781 V
(B) 1.562 V
D/A
Convertor
4 bit D/A
converter
+5V
Binary
to
BCD
(B)
2 Digit
LED
Display
4bit
Upcounter
= 6.2
Clock
(C)
4.
5.
(D)
ECE2007
Statement for Linked Answer Questions 2
and 3
In the DigitaltoAnalog converter circuit
shown in the figure below,
= 10 V and
R = 10k.
R
2R
V
R
2R
2R
2R
2R
R
+
2.
The current I is
(A) 31.25 A
(B) 62.5 A
V0
ECE2011
6.
The output of a 3 stage Johnson
(twisted ring) counter is fed to a
digital to analog (D/A) converter as
shown in the figure below. Assume all
states of the counter to be unset initially.
The waveform which represents the D/A
converter output is
(C) 125 A
(D) 250 A
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 457
D/A
Converter
D
Clock
Johnson
Counter
(A)
Digital Circuits
EE2006
1.
A student has made a 3 bit binary down
counter and connected to the R 2R
ladder type DAC [Gain = ( 1 K/2R)] as
shown in figure to generate a staircase
waveform.
The output achieved is
different as shown in figure. What could
be the possible cause of this error?
(B)
2R
1kHz
clock
2R
2R
2R
1k
+12V
Vo
12V
Counter
10k
7
6
(C)
5
4
3
2
1
0
ms
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
(D)
ECE2014
7.
For a given sampleandhold circuit, if the
value of the hold capacitor is increased,
then
(A) droop rate decreases and acquisition
time decreases
IN2006
Common Data for Questions 1 and 2
An R2R ladder type DAC is shown below.
If a switch status is 0 0 is applied and if
a switch status is 1 5 is applied to the
corresponding terminal of the DAC.
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 458
R
2R
2R
2R
+
5V
1.
(B)
2.
(C)
(D)
.
.
Digital Circuits
IN  2010
5.
A 4bit successive approximation type
ADC has a full scale value of 15V. The
sequence of the states, the SAR will
traverse, for the conversion of an input of
8.15V is
(A)
( )
IN2007
3.
The circuit shown in the figure below
works as a 2bit analog to digital
converter for 0
3 .
3V
0.5k
(C)
tart
conversion
tart
conversion
1 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
1 1 0 0
0 1 0 0
1 0 1 0
0 0 1 0
1 0 0 1
0 0 0 1
1 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
End
conversion
End
conversion
(D)
tart
conversion
tart
conversion
1.0k
1.0k
Digital
1 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
Circuit
0 1 0 0
1 1 0 0
0 1 1 0
1 1 1 0
0 1 1 1
1 1 1 1
1 0 0 0
1 1 1 1
End
conversion
End
conversion
0.5k
IN2014
6.
A thermopile is constructed using 10
junctions
of
ChromelConstantan
(sensitivity 60 /C for each junction)
connected in series. The output is fed to
an amplifier having an infinite input
impedance and a gain of 10. The output
from the amplifier is acquired using a
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 459
(C)
(D)
Digital Circuits
tart of conversion
( C)
Control
logic
l
l
R 2R
adder
DAC
Clock
p
counter
l
utpt uffer
8.
Reset l
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
th
th
Ena le
End of
Conversion
l
(E C)
directly proportional to
inversely proportional to
l
independent of
directly proportional to
frequency
th
clock
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 460
Digital Circuits
2.
7.
[Ans. B]
[Ans. B]
The i/p to D/A will be 0000, 0001, 0010,
0011, 1000, 1001, 1010, 1011. So O/P will
be in B waveform
dv 1
dt C
From the above relation it is clear that if
capacitor value increases then the drop
rate decreases because of inversion
relation.
C
Also = C = it t =
t c
i
From the above relation, it is clear that if
capacitor value increases acquisition time
also increases as of proportionality
relation
[Ans. B]
I
2
I
V
2R
I
4
2R
I
8 R
I
16
2R
2R
2R
I
16
I
4
R
V0
EE
1.
[Ans. C]
=
4.
= 1mA
= 62.5 A
I
R[
4
I
]=
16
[Ans. C]
Sequence generated is
7111
0000
3011
1001
5101
2010
1001
3011
6110
Instead of
4100
2010
5101
4100
6110
0000
7111
Simply just by observation we can say
that error is because of lack of proper
connections
3.125
[Ans. D]
=
volts
6.
[Ans. B]
In steady state
= 0.5
6.5V
So error = 6.5 6.2 = 0.3V
dv
dt
4=
IN
1.
[Ans. B]
At switch status
=0
=
=1
[Ans. A]
For the Johnson counter sequence
D D D
0 0 0
0
1 0 0
4
1 1 0
6
1 1 1
7
0 1 1
3
0 0 1
1
0 0 0
0
2R
2R
2R
2R
Thevenin s equivalent
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 461
Digital Circuits
i.e 2V 128
2R
2R
1.5V
2R
2R
5
2
2R
5
5.
[Ans. A]
By characteristics of SAR ADC.
6.
7.
[Ans. A]
8.
[Ans. A]
Maximum error is equal to step size
which is directly proportional to
.
2.
15
2
[Ans. C]
Step size =
3.
4.
= = 0.625
[Ans. B]
Truth table of ADC is
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
=
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
128 = 96
[Ans. D]
8 it ADC o/p is in 2s complement form
i.e it represents 127
128
i/p voltage Range = 2 to 2
aximum Error =
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 462
Digital Circuits
Semiconductor Memory
ECE2014
1.
If WL is the Word Line and BL is the Bit
Line, an SRAM cell is shown in
EE2009
1.
The increasing order of speed of data
access for the following devices is
i. Cache Memory
ii. CDROM
iii. Dynamic RAM
iv. Processor Registers
v. Magnetic Tape
(A) (v), (ii), (iii), (iv), (i )
(B) (v), (ii), (iii), (i), (iv)
(C) (ii), (i), (iii), (iv), (v)
(D) (v), ( ii), (i) , (iii), (iv)
IN2011
1. An
bit RAM is interfaced to an 8085
microprocessor. In a fully decoded Scheme
if the address of the last memory location
of this RAM is 4FFFH, the address of the
first memory location of the RAM will be,
(A) 1000 H
(C) 3000 H
(B) 2000 H
(D) 4000 H
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 463
Digital Circuits
EE
1.
IN
1.
[Ans. B]
For an SRAM construction four MOSFETs
are required (2PMOS and 2NMOS) with
interchanged outputs connected to each
CMOS inverter. So option (B) is correct.
[Ans. B]
Processor registers has highest speed.
Followed by cache memory then dynamic
ram (slower than static ram because of
refreshing required)
[Ans. C]
Capacity of chip
= last memory address First memory
address+1
= last memory address Capacity of chip+1
= 4FFFH 2000H+1
=3000H
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 464
Digital Circuits
Microprocessors
ECE2006
1.
An I/O peripheral device shown in
Figure (b) below is to be interfaced to an
8085 microprocessor. To select the I/O
device in the I/O address range D4 H  D7
H, its chipselect () should be
connected to the output of the decoder
shown in Figure (a) below.
A2
LSB
A3
3 8
Decoder
A4
MSB
3.
o de ice
hip e ec
o
decode
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
A7
A6
Data
Fig.
(a)
I/O
Peripheral
A1
A0
Fig. (b)
(A) output 7
(B) output 5
(C) output 2
(D) output 0
ECE2010
2.
For the 8085 assembly language program
given below, the content of the
accumulator after the execution of the
program is
3000
MVI A, 45H
3002
MOV B, A
3003
STC
3004
CMC
3005
RAR
3006
XRA B
(A) 00H
(C) 67H
(B) 45H
(D) E7H
ECE2011
4.
An 8085 assembly language program is
given below. Assume that the carry flag is
initially unset. The content of the
accumulator after the execution of the
program is
MVI A, 07H
RLC
MOV B, A
RLC
RLC
ADD B
RRC
(A) 8CH
(B) 64H
(C) 23H
(D) 15H
ECE2014
5.
For the 8085 microprocessor, the
interfacing circuit to input 8bit digital
data (
) from an external device
is shown in the figure. The instruction for
correct data transfer is
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 465
EE2006
1.
In an 8085 microprocessor based system,
it is desired to increment the contents of
memory location whose address is
available in (D, E) register pair and store
the result in same location. The sequence
of instructions is
(A) XCH G
(C) INXD
INRM
XCH G
(B) XCH G
(D) INRM
INXH
XCH G
2.
e ice
aa u
igi a
inpu
Digital Circuits
EE2008
3.
The contents (in Hexadecimal) of some of
the memory location in an 8085A based
system are given below
Address Contents
..
..
26FE
00
26FF
01
2700
02
2701
03
2702
04
..
..
The contents of stack pointer (SP),
Program counter (PC) and (H, L) are
2700H, 2100H and 0000H respectively,
when the following sequence of
instruction are executed,
2100 H: DAD SP
2101 H: PCHL
The contents of (SP) and (PC) at the end
of execution will be
(A) PC = 2102 H, SP = 2700 H
(B) PC = 2700 H, SP = 2700 H
(C) PC = 2800 H, SP = 26 FE H
(D) PC = 2A02 H, SP= 2702 H
EE2009
4.
In an 8085 microprocessor, the contents
of the Accumulator, after the following
instructions are executed will become
XRA A
MVI B, F0H
SUB B
(A) 01 H
(C) F0 H
(B) 0F H
(D) 10 H
EE2010
5.
hen a
dd in uc ion i
executed, the CPU carries out the
following
sequential
operations
internally:
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 466
Note:
(R) means content of register R
((R)) means content of memory location
pointed to by R
PC means Program Counter
SP means Stack Pointer
(A) (SP) incremented
(PC) Addr
((SP)) (PC)
(B) (PC) Addr
((SP)) (PC)
(SP) incremented
(C) (PC) Addr
(SP) incremented
((SP)) (PC)
(D) ((SP)) (PC)
(SP) incremented
(PC) Addr
EE2011
6.
A portion of the main program to call a
subroutine SUB in an 8085 environment
is given below.
:
:
LXI D, DISP
LP: CALL SUB
:
:
It is desired that control be returned to
LP + DISP + 3 when the RET instruction
is executed in the subroutine. The set of
instructions that precede the RET
instruction in the subroutine are
(A) POP D
(C) POP H
DAD H
DAD D
PUSH D
PUSH H
(B) POP H
DAD D
INX H
INX H
INX H
PUSH H
(D) XTHL
INXD
INX D
INX D
XTHL
Digital Circuits
EE2014
7.
An output device is interfaced with 8bit
microprocessor 8085A. The interfacing
circuit is shown in figure
ecode
u pu
u pu
e ice
9.
IN2006
1.
An 8085 assembly language program is
given as follows. The execution time of
th
th
th
THE GATE ACADEMY PVT.LTD. H.O.: #74, KeshavaKrupa (third Floor), 30 Cross, 10 Main, Jayanagar 4 Block, Bangalore11
: 08065700750, info@thegateacademy.com Copyright reserved. Web: www.thegateacademy.com
Page 467
2.
Digital Circuits
4.
IN2008
5.
A part of a progr